Personal Property Secured Transactions

I. THE SCOPE OF ARTICLE 9

A. IN GENERAL

The first task for a lawyer advising a client about a planned secured transaction is to determine whether Article 9 applies to it (including whether it is a secured transactions at all). Reaching an incorrect conclusion on this issue can lead to a disastrous result. For example, if a person is unaware that Article 9 applies, the person might fail to perfect a security interest under Article 9 and end up losing all interest in the collateral to some other claimant. Alternatively, if Article 9 does not apply, the person might erroneously comply with Article 9 but fail to do whatever applicable law does require to obtain and perfect an interest in the collateral.

The latter problem arose in In re Montreal, Maine & Atlantic Railway, Ltd.,1 in which Wheeling & Lake Erie Railway Company (“Wheeling”) extended the debtor, Montreal, Maine & Atlantic Railway, a $6 million line of credit. The debtor in return granted Wheeling a security interest in all accounts and payment intangibles. A few years later, a tragic derailment accident occurred in Quebec and the debtor filed a claim with its insurer for business interruption damages. In the debtor’s bankruptcy, Wheeling claimed that the insurance proceeds were part of its collateral. The court concluded that—because Article 9 does not apply to an interest in, or a claim under, an insurance policy, unless the claim is for loss or damage to collateral,2 and because an insurance claim for lost business is not a claim for loss or damage to collateral—Article 9 did not apply to Wheeling’s security interest.3 The court then analyzed Wheeling’s security interest under Maine common law. The court was unsure what Maine law would require to perfect a security interest in an insurance policy or claim, but ultimately concluded that some step, beyond the execution of a security agreement, designed to furnish fair notice to other creditors is required.4 The secured party had taken none of the possible steps.5

Sometimes, other law takes precedence over Article 9. In Lili Collections, LLC v. Terrebonne Parish Consolidated Government,6 the court ruled that—because Article 9 does not apply to the extent that other state law expressly governs the creation, perfection, priority, or enforcement of a security interest created by the state or a governmental agency thereof,7 and because provisions of the relevant state law restrict the ability of state agencies to borrow funds and pledge assets— Article 9 did not apply to a contractor’s assignment of its right to payment from a state agency.8 According to the court, Article 9’s anti-assignment rules did not render ineffective the clause in the contractor’s agreement with the agency prohibiting assignment. This conclusion is suspect because the state did not create the security interest, the contractor did.

A somewhat similar issue arose in Etzler v. Indiana Department of Revenue,9 in which a secured party claimed its security interest in a breeder’s award owed to the debtor by a state agency was superior to the rights of a judgment creditor. The judgment creditor claimed that the security interest was excluded from Article 9 by Indiana’s non-uniform section 9-104(d)(14), which refers to “the creation, perfection, priority, or enforcement of a security interest created by . . . a governmental unit of the state,” and which was modeled on section 9-109(c)(2) of the U.C.C. However, the court properly rejected that argument, noting that the provision deals with government debtors, not government account debtors.10

One recurring issue concerning the scope of Article 9 arises when a seller of goods, particularly motor vehicles, includes language in the sales agreement conditioning the entire transaction on the availability of third-party financing, yet allows the buyer to take possession of the goods. Section 2-401(1) provides that the retention of title by the seller of delivered goods is limited in effect to a security interest.11 If the conditional sale is a “sale,” it creates a security interest and the seller must comply with Article 9 when perfecting and enforcing its rights to the goods. If no “sale” has occurred because of the condition, then there is no security interest.12 In In re Heien,13 a vehicle buyer signed a bailment contract in connection with the purchase of a car. The bailment contract provided that the purchase was conditioned on approval of the buyer’s financing and, until then, the vehicle remained the seller’s property. The court ruled that, even if the bailment contract was contemporaneous with the purchase agreement, because the buyer obtained delivery of the vehicle, a “sale” had occurred. Thus, the seller’s interest was limited to a security interest and the vehicle came into the buyer’s bankruptcy estate.

B. LEASING

Distinguishing a lease of goods—which is governed by Article 2A of the U.C.C.—from a sale with a retained security interest—which is governed by Articles 2 and 9—is often difficult. The issue is a heavily factual one, and rests on whether the putative lessor retains, as a practical matter, a meaningful economic interest in the goods.14 The U.C.C. contains some detailed rules that give a definitive answer in some situations in which the lease is not terminable by the lessee. Among these are when the lease extends beyond the economic life of the goods or the lessee has an option to buy the goods for nominal consideration.15 When these definitive rules do not apply, the analysis falls back to an all-the-facts-and-circumstances test.16 The issue can be important because a lessor that overlooks the possibility that its transaction is a sale combined with a security interest might not perfect what turns out to be a “security interest.”

In re Gutierrez17 involved an automobile lease that was not subject to termination by the lessee. The lease provided that the lessee would become the owner of the automobile at the end of the lease. Although these facts ordinarily should make the transaction a disguised sale with a retained security interest, the court ruled that the agreement was a lease, not a secured sale, because the agreement expressly stated that it was a lease.18 As such, the transaction was governed by the Puerto Rico Act to Regulate Personal Property Lease Contracts and the lessee waived the right to have the lease treated under the U.C.C. as a secured sale.19 Because of this non-U.C.C. statute, the lessee’s waiver was effective. Ordinarily, a person subject to a particular article of the U.C.C. cannot waive its application.

Four other courts held that leasing transactions were true leases after properly analyzing whether the lessor retained a residual interest in goods. In In re Johnson,20 the court held that a four-year lease of a truck with an option to purchase at the end of the term for $8,500 was a true lease. The court ruled that, because the lessee did not show that the option price was nominal in relation to the anticipated fair market value of the truck at the end of the lease term or the lessee’s costs of performing under the agreement, the transaction was a true lease.21

The court, in In re Wells,22 ruled that a ninety-one-month lease of a two-year-old vehicle with an option to purchase at the end of the term for $3,444 was a true lease because the term was not for the remaining economic life of the vehicle and, regardless of whether the option price was equal to 20 percent or 38.8 percent of the vehicle’s original value, it was not nominal.23

In GEO Finance, LLC v. University Square 2751, LLC,24 a ten-year lease of a geo-thermal water supply system with an option to purchase at any time for approximately $300,000 and an option to renew for eight consecutive five-year terms was a true lease because the system had a useful life of fifty years and the option price was not nominal.25

Finally, CD Construction, LLC v. Hard Hat Industries, Inc.26 involved a sale-leaseback transaction for an excavator. The court ruled that the transaction created a true eighteen-month lease even though the lessee had a purchase option any time after the sixth month. The lease term was for less than the economic life of the excavator, there was no obligation or option to renew the lease, and the purchase option price was not nominal. The court properly concluded that the transaction did not satisfy the bright-line test under section 1-203(b) for a sale with a retained security interest.27

II. ATTACHMENT OF A SECURITY INTEREST

In general, there are three requirements for a security interest to attach, that is, effectively to come into existence: (i) the debtor must authenticate a security agreement that describes the collateral; (ii) value must be given; and (iii) the debtor must have rights in the collateral or the power to transfer rights in the collateral.28 There were significant cases on each of these requirements last year.

A. EXISTENCE OF SECURITY AGREEMENT

The requirement of an authenticated security agreement is fairly easy to satisfy. The agreement must create or provide for a security interest;29 that is, it must include language indicating that the debtor has given a secured party an interest in personal property to secure payment or performance of an obligation (or in connection with a sale covered by Article 9),30 and it must describe the collateral.31 If no single document satisfies these requirements, multiple writings may do so collectively, under what is known as the “composite document rule.”32

In In re Brown,33 the debtor signed a letter granting her former romantic partner the right to drive her vehicle until the debtor paid a $3,000 debt (unless the former partner earlier allowed any female in the vehicle). The court ruled that the letter did not create a security interest because it provided only the right to drive the vehicle, not to repossess or sell the car in the event of a default.34

In Royal Jewelers Inc. v. Light,35 the debtor signed an agreement purporting to grant a security agreement in collateral—a ring—described in a separate exhibit, but did not sign the exhibit. The court properly ruled that there is no requirement that the debtor separately authenticate or sign an exhibit that the security agreement references, even though that exhibit contains the description of the collateral.36

Four cases last year dealt with whether the proper person authenticated the security agreement. In Old Battleground Properties, Inc. v. Central Carolina Surgical Eye Associates, P.A.,37 a creditor claimed a security interest in specified works of art. Several pieces of art were expressly excluded from the collateral description in the creditor’s financing statement and the creditor sent a letter to another secured party denying that the creditor had a security interest in those works of art. The remaining art was described in a security agreement purportedly executed by the debtor’s husband on the debtor’s behalf, but the debtor alleged that her husband was not so authorized to sign on her behalf and that his signature was a forgery. Accordingly, the court refused temporarily to restrain the debtor from transferring the artwork because the creditor had not shown a likelihood of success on its claim of a security interest in any of the artwork.

The remaining three cases all dealt with collateral owned by a limited liability company (“LLC”) or by the members of an LLC. In Hepp v. Ultra Green Energy Services, LLC,38 the court held that the managing member of an LLC did not have actual authority to bind the LLC to a note and security agreement and might not have had apparent authority, which requires conduct by the principal—not the agent—that causes a third party to believe that the agent is authorized.39

The case of United Bank v. Expressway Auto Parts, Ltd.40 is somewhat similar. An individual signed a security agreement on behalf of the debtor, an LLC of which he identified himself as a member. However, the individual was neither a member nor a manager of the LLC, and thus lacked actual authority to bind the LLC. However, the court held that the individual had apparent authority and that the LLC ratified his action by reporting the secured obligation as a liability on its federal income tax returns and making monthly payments for eight years.41

In In re Floyd,42 the sole members of an LLC signed a note and security agreement on behalf of the LLC and had the creditor’s security interest noted on the certificate of title for, among other things, a vehicle owned by one of them individually. The court ruled that this was sufficient because the parol evidence— including the application for the certificate of title that the owner must have signed—demonstrated their intent to grant a security interest.43

The debtor need not authenticate a written security agreement if the secured party has possession of the collateral pursuant to an unauthenticated security agreement (which can be oral). In In re Cable’s Enterprise, LLC,44 the court applied this rule and held that a lender—to whom the debtor had, at the time the loan was made, given possession of an excavator as security for the loan— had a valid security interest despite the absence of an authenticated agreement.

For some transactions or collateral, law outside Article 9 imposes additional requirements for a valid security agreement. Such was the case in Martino v. American Airlines Federal Credit Union,45 which involved a credit union’s efforts to set off a customer’s deposit account against the customer’s obligation on a credit card issued by the credit union. The Truth in Lending Act prohibits a credit card issuer from offsetting a cardholder’s indebtedness arising in connection with a consumer credit transaction against funds of the cardholder held on deposit with the issuer.46 The regulations promulgated thereunder clarify that this prohibition does not alter or affect the right of the card issuer to “[o]btain or enforce a consensual security interest in the funds.”47 However, the Official Staff Interpretation of the regulation places a hurdle on the card issuer’s path toward obtaining such a security interest by requiring that the consumer “specifically intend to grant a security interest in the deposit account.”48 The Martino court ruled that a credit union did not satisfy this heightened standard because the language in the credit card agreement purporting to grant the credit union a security interest was not separately signed and did not reference a specific amount of deposited funds or a specific deposit account number, even though it did appear in a box with bolded text.49

To be effective, an authenticated security agreement must provide a description of the collateral.50 In most cases, a description of collateral by type of property defined in Article 9 is sufficient.51 However, in a consumer transaction, a description of consumer goods only by type is insufficient.52

In Morris v. Ark Valley Credit Union,53 the debtor executed mortgages on his real property. A clause in the mortgages purported to grant a security interest in “fixtures” on the real property. In reversing a bankruptcy court decision to the contrary, the district court held that, because the mortgage described the collateral not just as fixtures, but as fixtures attached to specified real property, the description was not just by type of collateral, and hence a security interest could attach to the debtor’s mobile home if it was a fixture.54

B. VALUE GIVEN

The requirement for attachment that “value has been given”55 is written in the passive voice quite intentionally. The value need not come from the secured party and need not go to the debtor, a term defined to mean the owner of the collateral.56 In fact, Article 9 contemplates that the debtor need not be the principal obligor or even owe the secured obligation at all, but might instead be someone other than the person to whom the secured party extended credit.57 Two cases explored this rule last year.

In Citigroup Global Markets, Inc. v. KLCC Investments, LLC,58 the debtor received a $14 million loan and later that day executed a security agreement purporting to grant a security interest in a securities account to an LLC to secure the resulting indebtedness. The court ruled that the security interest attached even though the loaned funds came from the personal account of the LLC’s owner.59 Similarly, in In re DigitalBridge Holdings, Inc.,60 the funds loaned to the debtor came from an affiliate of the secured party, rather than the secured party itself. The court ruled that the security interest attached, after noting that the debtor authenticated a promissory note payable to the secured party and no other party claimed a right to collect the debt.61

C. RIGHTS IN THE COLLATERAL

A few secured parties ran into trouble last year with the requirement that the debtor have rights in the collateral or the power to convey rights in it. For example, in In re 11 East 36th, LLC,62 an LLC authenticated a pledge agreement by which it purported to grant a security interest in its membership interest in a subsidiary LLC that owned several condominium units. When both entities filed for bankruptcy protection, the lender claimed a security interest in the subsidiary’s condominium units. The court ruled that the parent did not own the subsidiary’s units, so the security interest could not attach to those units, even though the lender filed a financing statement identifying some of those units as the collateral.63 The lender had only a security interest in the parent’s interest in its subsidiary.64

In ACF 2006 Corp. v. William F. Conour Clerk’s Entry of Default Entered 11/18/ 2013,65 a lender had a perfected security interest in a law firm’s accounts, which included the firm’s rights under contingent fee agreements with clients. However, the court ruled the security interest did not encumber all the fees recovered upon resolution of the cases after the representation was switched to another firm because the debtor law firm was entitled only to the quantum meruit portion of the fees for the services that the debtor law firm had performed.66

Even when a debtor’s rights to transfer property are restricted by contract or law, the debtor might nevertheless be permitted to grant a security interest in that property. Article 9 contains several rules that override some contractual and legal restrictions on assignment.67 In Clark v. Missouri Lottery Commission,68 a lottery winner purported to grant a bank a security interest in the winner’s right to future lottery distributions to secure a series of loans. Later, relying on a state statute that prohibits the assignment of lottery proceeds,69 the winner sought a declaratory judgment that the assignment was void. The court ruled that, because section 9-406 overrides restrictions on assignment and expressly prevails in the event of conflict with other law, the security interest attached.70

III. PERFECTION OF A SECURITY INTEREST

A. GOVERNING LAW AND METHOD OF PERFECTION

In general, perfection of a security interest is necessary for the secured party to have priority over the rights of lien creditors, other secured parties, and buyers, lessees, and licensees of the collateral.71 The method or methods by which a secured party can perfect depend on the type of collateral and the nature of the transaction. The dominant method of perfection is by filing a financing statement, but other methods include taking possession or control of the collateral, complying with a certificate of title statute, and complying with any preemptive federal law.72 Some security interests are perfected automatically upon attachment.73 The first issue to resolve in determining how to perfect is to ascertain which state’s law governs.

In general, the law of the jurisdiction in which the debtor is located governs perfection and the effect of perfection.74 This rule played a critical role in an important case from last year: In re SemCrude, L.P.75 The debtors in the case purchased oil from producers in several states and resold the oil to downstream purchasers. The debtors also traded financial oil derivatives on the New York Mercantile Exchange and on over-the-counter markets, and these trades eventually led to a liquidity crisis that caused the debtors to file bankruptcy. On the date of the petition, the debtors had not yet paid numerous producers. The producers brought adversary proceedings against the downstream purchasers, alleging that the purchasers violated the producers’ security interests in the oil. The producers, which had not filed financing statements against the debtors, relied on nonuniform statutes in several states that purport to grant producers, such as themselves, an automatically perfected purchase-money security interest in the oil or gas they produce and then sell on credit.76 In decisions several years ago, the bankruptcy court ruled that the law of the jurisdictions in which the debtors were located for Article 9 purposes—Delaware and Oklahoma—governed perfection of the producers’ security interests and thus the automatic perfection rules of other states did not apply.77 Because the producers had not filed in Delaware or Oklahoma or otherwise complied with those states’ law on perfection, the producers’ security interests were unperfected and the downstream buyers took free of those security interests under U.C.C. section 9-317(b). Last year, the district court affirmed, following the reasoning of the bankruptcy court.78

Article 9 does not apply to a landlord’s lien, which is a product of the common law or non-U.C.C. statutory law, not of a contract.79 However, Article 9 does apply if a lease of real property grants the landlord a security interest in the tenant’s personal property. Such was the case in In re University General Hospital System, Inc.80 Because the landlord had not done anything to perfect its security interest, the landlord was not entitled, in the tenant’s bankruptcy proceeding, to relief from the stay to use the collateral.81

B. ADEQUACY OF A FINANCING STATEMENT

To be sufficient to perfect a security interest, a filed financing statement must be authorized by the debtor in an authenticated record.82 By authenticating a security agreement, a debtor automatically authorizes the secured party to file a financing statement covering the collateral described in the financing statement.83 A financing statement filed before a security agreement is made, and without the debtor’s authorization in some other authenticated record, is ineffective when filed. However, the debtor’s subsequent authentication of a security agreement or other authorization provides the needed authorization, which then in turn makes a previously filed financing statement retroactively effective.84

In In re Adoni Group, Inc.,85 a lender filed a financing statement one day before the debtor authenticated the security agreement. The court ruled quite properly that the financing statement was sufficient to perfect the security interest.86

To be sufficient, a filed financing statement must also indicate the collateral covered.87 That indication need not be specific, it need only reasonably describe the collateral.88 Moreover, a filed financing statement with a minor error is effective provided the error does not render the statement seriously misleading.89 In In re Sterling United, Inc.,90 a filed financing statement described the collateral as:

[a]ll assets of the Debtor including, but not limited to, any and all equipment, fixtures, inventory, accounts, chattel paper, documents, instruments, investment property, general intangibles, letter-of-credit rights and deposit accounts . . . and located at or relating to the operation of the premises at 100 River Rock Drive, Suite 304, Buffalo, New York.

The debtor’s bankruptcy trustee argued that the security interest was unperfected and avoidable because the debtor no longer owned or operated from the River Rock Drive location. The court rejected this argument. In doing so, the court first observed that the language specifying the incorrect location modified the clause beginning “including, but not limited to,” not the opening phrase “[a]ll assets of the Debtor.”91 Hence, the collateral description was not incorrect. The court then observed that, even if the description was ambiguous, and if the description could be read to limit all the collateral to the incorrect location— because the purpose of filing is to provide inquiry notice and a reasonable searcher confronting an ambiguous description should investigate further—the financing statement was not seriously misleading.92

C. TERMINATION STATEMENTS

Another decision was made last year in the widely publicized case of In re Motors Liquidation Co. In 2014, in response to a certified question from the U.S. Court of Appeals for the Second Circuit, the Delaware Supreme Court ruled that a termination statement is authorized by the secured party if the secured party of record reviewed and knowingly approved the termination statement for filing, regardless of whether the secured party subjectively intended or understood the effect of the filing.93 Early last year, the Second Circuit applied that ruling and held that termination statements prepared by debtor’s counsel in connection with the payoff of a separate $300 million lease transaction, and which, the court concluded, were reviewed and approved by the secured party and its counsel, were effective. As a result, the financing statement referenced in one of the terminations statements, and which related to a $1.5 billion term loan, was terminated.94

D. PERFECTION BY CONTROL

A security interest in a deposit account as original collateral can be perfected only by control.95 If the secured party is not the depositary bank, then the secured party can obtain control either by becoming the depositary bank’s customer with respect to the deposit account or, more commonly, entering into an agreement with the bank pursuant to which the bank agrees to comply with the secured party’s instructions with respect to the deposit account.96

In In re Southeastern Stud & Components, Inc.,97 there were discrepancies between the correct numbers for the debtor’s deposit accounts and the account numbers referenced in a deposit account control agreement among the debtor, the depositary bank, and the secured party. The court ruled that the discrepancies did not undermine control given that the debtor and the bank were aware of the accounts to which the control agreement applied and, because a financing statement filed by the secured party identified deposit accounts as the collateral, a third party would have inquiry notice regarding the secured party’s security interest.98 Although the court’s conclusion is correct, given that nothing about control requires or imparts notice to third parties,99 the court’s comments about the financing statement seem irrelevant to the issue.

IV. PRIORITY

A. BUYERS

A buyer of goods takes free of an unperfected security interest in the goods if the buyer gives value and receives delivery without knowledge of the security interest.100 Two noteworthy cases dealt with this rule last year.

In In re SemCrude, L.P., after concluding that oil producers’ security interests were unperfected because the producers had not filed financing statements in the states where the debtors were located,101 the court addressed the priority between the producers of the oil and the downstream buyers. The court held that there was insufficient evidence to raise a factual dispute about whether the buyers knew of the security interests even though the buyers allegedly knew: (i) that the debtors had purchased oil in states with laws that created the security interests in the oil, (ii) the identities of some of the producers, and (iii) that the producers were unpaid.102 While the buyers might have known that the debtors had purchased the oil on credit, they might not have known that the producers were still unpaid at the time the oil was resold to the buyers or that the oil was encumbered, especially because the debtors had warranted good title.103

In Four County Bank v. Tidewater Equipment Co.,104 a secured party filed financing statements to perfect its security interest in two items of equipment before the debtor sold the equipment. However, the secured party failed to file continuation statements until after the financing statements had lapsed, and thus its interest became unperfected and was deemed never to have been perfected against a purchaser for value.105 As a result, a buyer that had no knowledge of the security interest when it received delivery of the equipment took free of the secured party’s retroactively unperfected security interest.106 The court refused to impose, under the guise of the duty of good faith, a requirement that buyers search for filed financing statements.107

B. COMPETING SECURED PARTIES

In general, when there are two perfected security interests in the same collateral, priority is determined under the first-to-file-or-perfect rule. The first security interest perfected or subject to an effective financing statement has priority, provided there was no period thereafter when there was neither filing nor perfection.108

In HSBC Bank USA v. Perez,109 each of two banks purchased a duplicate original promissory note for the same mortgage loan. When the mortgagor defaulted, each bank sought to foreclose. Because the sale of a promissory note is an Article 9 transaction,110 the court looked to Article 9’s priority rules to determine which bank had priority.111 The court then correctly ruled that priority was based not on the order in which the banks filed an assignment of the mortgage, but on the first-to-file-or-perfect rule of section 9-322.112 Accordingly, the first bank to take possession of its note had priority with respect to the mortgage.113

Cases involving duplicate original promissory notes—each assigned to a different party—are not that unusual.114 Unfortunately, the court in Perez, like the courts in many of the other cases, got tripped up in the analysis. First, the court offered no explanation as to why the first-to-file-or-perfect rule of section 9-322 was the appropriate priority rule to resolve the dispute, rather than either section 9-330 or 9-331,115 each of which deals with purchasers of promissory notes. More to the point, none of these three priority rules is designed to deal with the problem resulting from duplicate original notes. In other words, the court implicitly treated the two notes as the same piece of property, but nothing in the priority rules contemplates such a thing. While doing so has the advantage of protecting an unsophisticated home buyer duped into making the duplicate notes, it ignores an assumption underlying both Articles 3 and 9 that anything capable of being possessed is unique.

C. OTHER CLAIMANTS

In general, a security interest is effective against creditors of the debtor and purchasers of the collateral.116 Article 9 does allow a licensee in ordinary course of business to take its rights under a nonexclusive license free of a security interest, even if that security interest is perfected,117 but there is no protection for a licensee under an exclusive license.

In Cyber Solutions International, LLC v. Priva Security Corp.,118 a secured party had a perfected security interest in the debtor’s intellectual property, including the copyrights associated with a specific semiconductor chip. Subsequently, the debtor granted an exclusive license to the copyrights. In a later dispute between the secured party and the licensee, the court ruled that the licensee took subject to the security interest and that the secured party also had priority over derivative products developed by the licensee. As the court put it, although the license agreement purported to grant the licensee ownership over improvements, the debtor did not, in light of the security agreement, have authority to grant such ownership to the licensee.119

Article 9 protects depositary banks. Such a bank has no duty, beyond those to which it agrees, to anyone with a security interest in a deposit account.120 If the bank has a security interest in a deposit account it maintains, that security interest will have priority over almost any other security interest.121 And, the bank’s setoff rights are largely unaffected by the debtor’s grant of a security interest in a deposit account.122 In spite of all this, in American Home Assurance Co. v. Weaver Aggregate Transport, Inc.,123 the court ruled that a garnishee bank that had a perfected security interest in a deposit account it maintained for the debtor did not have setoff rights sufficient to defeat the rights of the garnishing judgment creditor. The court reasoned that, because the bank failed to declare the debtor in default before service of the writ of garnishment, the bank did not have a present right to the funds or a basis on which to object to their release.124 The decision is wrong.

V. ENFORCEMENT OF A SECURITY INTEREST

A. NOTIFICATION OF DISPOSITION

After default, a secured party may repossess and dispose of the collateral.125 Before most dispositions, the secured party must send notification of the disposition to the debtor and any secondary obligor.126 This duty cannot be waived or varied in the security agreement,127 but can be waived in an agreement authenticated after default.128

In Ross v. Rothstein,129 after the debtor defaulted on a secured loan, the debtor and secured party entered into a superseding security agreement in which the debtor acknowledged default, granted a security interest in additional collateral, and authorized the secured party to sell all the collateral without notification. At the same time, the parties entered into a forbearance agreement under which the secured party agreed not to foreclose for about four months. When the forbearance period expired, the secured party sold the collateral without sending notification to the debtor. In subsequent litigation, the court ruled that the debtor had waived the right to notification of the sale in the superseding security agreement, noting that the forbearance agreement did not extend the due date of the secured obligation or negate the existence of a default.130

In Key Equipment Finance v. Southwest Contracting, Inc.,131 the debtor and guarantors similarly and effectively waived the right to notification of a disposition of the collateral—a dredge—by signing a workout agreement after default. The parties agreed that, upon breach of the workout agreement, “the total indebtedness then outstanding would be due and owing ‘without . . . any other notice to [the debtor or the guarantors] whatsoever.’”132

B. CONDUCTING A COMMERCIALLY REASONABLE DISPOSITION

A secured party may dispose of collateral by a sale, lease, or license.133 The disposition may be public—that is, an auction—or private.134 However, every aspect of a disposition must be “commercially reasonable.”135 If a secured party’s compliance with this standard is challenged, the secured party has the burden of proof.136 There were several notable cases about commercial reasonableness last year.

In Ross v. Rothstein,137 the debtor not only challenged the secured party’s failure to send notification of the disposition,138 but also claimed that the disposition—a series of sales of stock on the Over-The-Counter QB Tier Market (“OTCQB”)—was conducted in a commercially unreasonable manner because a sale a few hours later would have generated several thousand dollars more. The court rejected this argument on two grounds. First, the court noted that the secured party had, at the time, no benefit of hindsight and, pursuant to U.C.C section 9-627(a),139 the fact that a greater amount could have been obtained by disposition at a different time is not sufficient to show that the disposition was commercially unreasonable.140 Second, the court concluded that sales of stock on the OTCQB were not the subject of individual negotiation, and thus the OTCQB is a “recognized market” within the meaning of section 9-627(b).141 Because the shares were sold in the usual manner on that market, the court conclusively treated the sale as having been conducted in a commercially reasonable manner.

In Bank of America v. Dello Russo,142 the foreclosing secured party relied on an investment broker hired by the debtor to market the collateral and find a buyer. The broker used a national marketing campaign to identify prospective purchasers for the assets: nearly all of the assets of three manufacturing companies. The secured party then, in an effort to increase the purchase price, negotiated with the only potential buyer expressing interest. The court held that the sale was commercially reasonable.143 There was no conflict of interest arising from the fact that one of the debtor’s executives was hired by the buyer following the acquisition nor was there any inference of collusion to sell the collateral for less than its value, given that the secured obligation exceeded $17 million, the purchase price was $1.5 million, and the guaranty was capped at $5.95 million, so that the secured party was not able to collect the full amount owed.144

In Harley-Davidson Credit Corp. v. Galvin,145 the secured party sold a repossessed aircraft through a dealer specializing in the sale of repossessed aircraft. However, the plane had been vandalized while in the secured party’s possession and then sold without repair and while not “airworthy.” The court noted that a sale through a dealer, if fairly conducted, is normally commercially reasonable, but it was the secured party’s obligation to show that the sale was fairly conducted, which the secured party had not yet done.146 The court concluded that a reasonable trier of fact could determine that the “sale after the vandalism fell below the standard of reasonable commercial practices among dealers.”147

Similarly, in In re Godfrey,148 the court ruled that the secured party’s private disposition of equipment might not have been commercially reasonable because the secured party: (i) did not respond to other potential purchasers who had expressed interest; (ii) sold the equipment to an auctioneer, who two days later re-sold the equipment at a previously noticed public auction; and (iii) might not have provided the debtor an opportunity to arrange for friendly or competitive bidders and was not responsive to the debtor’s request for the details of the sale.149

Finally, in In re Estate of Nardoni,150 a bank received certificates in its own name for the pledged stock, placed the certificates in a vault, and for three years refused either to sell the stock or to permit the debtor to sell the stock to pay off the secured obligation. The court ruled that the bank acted in a commercially unreasonable manner, even though no sale had yet been conducted, and in so doing, discharged the guarantors from any further liability.151

C. COLLECTING ON COLLATERAL

Upon default, or when otherwise agreed by the debtor, a secured party may notify account debtors to make payment directly to the secured party.152 After receipt of such a notification and of proof of the secured party’s security interest, if requested and not previously provided, an account debtor may discharge its obligation only by paying the secured party; payment to the debtor will not discharge the obligation.153

In Swift Energy Operating, LLC v. Plemco-South, Inc.,154 a factor bought some accounts of an oilfield service company and obtained a security interest in the debtor’s remaining accounts. Shortly thereafter, the accounts payable supervisor for one account debtor, Swift Energy Operating, LLC (“Swift Energy”), received an e-mail message from the factor instructing Swift Energy to pay the factor and requesting that the supervisor sign and return an acknowledgment form. The supervisor responded that she did not have authority to sign the form and advised the factor to make that request to the appropriate department. Soon thereafter, Swift Energy learned that the debtor was ceasing operations and wished to be paid the balance due on the account. Swift Energy complied and paid the debtor. Thereafter, the factor sued Swift Energy, claiming that the payment to the debtor had not discharged the obligation. The court155 concluded that, because Swift Energy’s accounts payable supervisor informed the factor that she was not the individual responsible for making payment decisions and informed the factor to whom it should send the assignment information, the factor had not provided proper notification to Swift Energy prior to the time it paid the debtor.156 This decision seems incorrect because it gives the account debtor the ability to control the effectiveness of a notification it receives.157

VI. LIABILITY ISSUES

There were several interesting cases last year about liability in connection with a secured transaction. In Macquarie Bank Ltd. v. Knickel,158 a secured party fore-closed on the debtor’s oil and gas leases in apparent satisfaction of the secured obligation and then used the debtor’s trade secrets that had also been pledged as collateral. The court held that the secured party did not have the right to use the trade secrets and was liable for misappropriation of those trade secrets.

In Citigroup Global Markets, Inc. v. KLCC Investments, LLC,159 a securities intermediary faced with competing claims to the securities credited to the debtor’s account refused to complete a transfer requested by the secured party with whom it had a control agreement. The intermediary then initiated an inter-pleader action. The secured party, which had priority in the securities at issue, filed a counterclaim against the intermediary for the lost value of the securities during the period when the intermediary refused to honor its instructions. The court dismissed the counterclaim. Noting that the “commencement of an interpleader action cannot itself give rise to liability,”160 the court con cluded that the damages the secured party claimed to have suffered arose from acts within the intermediary’s rights granted by law.161

In BancorpSouth Bank v. 51 Concrete, LLC,162 a secured party brought a successful conversion claim against the buyers of the debtor’s equipment subject to the secured party’s security interest for failing to turn over the proceeds they received upon resale. The secured party then sought to collect its attorney’s fees from the buyers, claiming a right to them under both law and contract. The court rejected both claims. First, the court concluded that the secured party was not entitled to attorney’s fees under U.C.C. section 9-607(d) because that provision allows a secured party to deduct attorney’s fees from any collections made; it does not create a right to attorney’s fees in addition to other damages.163 The court also ruled the secured party was not entitled to attorney’s fees pursuant to its security agreement with the debtor, even though that agreement became effective against the buyers under section 9-201(a),164 because the agreement stated only that the secured party could “apply the proceeds of any collection or disposition first to . . . reasonable attorney’s fees,” and this case did not involve any collection or disposition.165 The result might have been different if the language of the security agreement was different, such as by referring to the “enforcement” of the security interest.

In Peterson v. Katten Muchin Rosenman LLP,166 the bankruptcy trustee for some investors that made loans secured by nonexistent collateral sued a law firm for malpractice in connection with an accounts financing transaction. The trustee claimed that the firm negligently failed to advise the investors that, by not confirming with the account debtor the existence of the accounts while simultaneously structuring the transaction so that the funds putatively coming from the account debtor actually flowed through another entity owned and controlled by the borrower, there was a risk that the borrower was engaged in a massive Ponzi scheme. The court concluded that there was no principled distinction between business advice and legal advice,167 and that, in any event, the claim was not for failing to advise the investors not to do business with the debtor, but for failing to advise the client about the risks associated with the structure of the transaction.168

A buyer of collateral at an Article 9 disposition acquires the debtor’s rights in the collateral,169 but does not normally assume responsibility for the debtor’s obligations. However, the fact that the collateral is sold through an Article 9 disposition does not insulate the buyer from the principles of successor liability.170 There were two notable cases last year on successor liability that involved asset purchases at foreclosure sales.

In Millbrook IV, LLC v. Production Services Associates, LLC,171 the court held that a new entity formed to purchase the assets of the debtor at an Article 9 disposition was merely a “continuation” of the debtor because all four members of the board of managers of each entity were the same, the new entity voluntarily assumed the compensation and bonus agreements of the managers as well as specified debts to suppliers and vendors, and two of the three owners of the debtor owned a majority of the new entity.172

In contrast, the court, in Celestica, LLC v. Communications Acquisitions Corp.,173 ruled that an entity formed to buy the debtor’s assets at a foreclosure sale did not have successor liability under the de facto merger doctrine. Although the buyer did initially conduct the same business from the same location with the same management, the buyer did so to preserve the value of the assets as a going concern and, in the ensuing months, the management, location, and nature of the business changed.174 Although the owners of the buyer collectively owned 40.5 percent of the debtor, the majority owner of the debtor had no stake in the buyer, and the owners of the buyer paid $600,000 in cash to acquire the debtor’s assets.175 Finally, although the buyer did assume selected liabilities of the debtor, it assumed only those necessary to ensure continued operation of the business and did not assume substantial debts to insiders, including the two individuals who owned the buyer and who lost millions of dollars.176

_______________

* Steve Weise is a partner in the Los Angeles office of Proskauer Rose LLP. Stephen L. Sepinuck is the Frederick N. & Barbara T. Curley professor and the associate dean for administration at Gonzaga University School of Law and the director of its Commercial Law Center.

1. Wheeling & Lake Erie Ry. Co. v. Keach (In re Montreal, Me. & Atl. Ry., Ltd.), 799 F.3d 1 (1st Cir. 2015).

2. See U.C.C. §§ 9-102(a)(64)(E), 9-109(d)(8) (2013).

3. In re Montreal, 799 F.3d at 5–10. In so ruling, the court noted that, even when the insurance claim is settled, the resulting promise by the insurer to pay is still excluded. Id. at 6–8.

4. Id. at 10–11.

5. Id. at 11. Although Wheeling had filed a financing statement describing the collateral to include accounts and payment intangibles, the court ruled that “[t]hose forms of collateral, as defined in the UCC, do not include rights under an insurance policy.” Id. The court seems to have confused definitions with scope. The definition of “payment intangibles” is broad enough to cover the insurance claim, even though such claims are outside the scope of Article 9. See U.C.C. § 9-102(a)(42), (61) (2013).

6. 175 So. 3d 434 (La. Ct. App. 2015).

7. U.C.C. § 9-109(c)(2) (2013).

8. Lili Collections, LLC, 175 So. 3d at 436 (citing LA. CONST. art. VII, §§ 8, 14; LA. STAT. ANN. § 39:1410.60).

9. 43 N.E.3d 250 (Ind. Ct. App. 2015).

10. Id. at 256–57 (citing IND. CODE § 26-1-9.1-109(d)(14)). The court also ruled that the judgment creditor did not have priority over the secured party under U.C.C. § 9-317(a), because the judgment creditor was not a lien creditor. Id. at 257.

11. U.C.C. § 2-401(1) (2011); see also id. § 1-201(b)(35) (making a similar point in the definition of “security interest”).

12. The courts are divided on the effect of the condition. Compare Patterson v. Univ. Ford, Inc., 758 S.E.2d 185 (N.C. Ct. App. 2014) (holding that unsatisfied financing condition in the conditional delivery agreement prevented the existence of a contract), with Hillen v. Dennis Dillon Auto Park & Truck Ctr., Inc. (In re Byrd), 546 B.R. 434 (Bankr. D. Idaho 2016) (holding that contract, which acknowledged that buyer would finance the transaction, but which was not “contingent on [buyer] obtaining financing,” did not prevent a sale from occurring), and In re Jones, No. 12-14608, 2013 WL 1092099 (Bankr. E.D. Tenn. Jan. 17, 2013) (holding that conditional language in bills of sale created a condition subsequent, not a condition precedent, and thus auto dealer was limited to a security interest).

13. Autocenters St. Charles, LLC v. Heien (In re Heien), 528 B.R. 901 (E.D. Mo. 2015).

14. See U.C.C. § 1-203(a)–(b) (2011).

15. See id. § 1-203(b).

16. See, e.g., In re Grubbs Constr. Co., 319 B.R. 698 (Bankr. M.D. Fla. 2005); Coleman v. Daimler-Chrysler Servs. of N. Am., LLC, 623 S.E.2d 189 (Ga. Ct. App. 2005).

17. Gutierrez v. Popular Auto, Inc., (In re Gutierrez), 526 B.R. 449 (Bankr. D.P.R. 2015).

18. Id. at 454–55, 462–63.

19. Id. at 462–63.

20. No. 15-00104-NPO, 2015 WL 1508460 (Bankr. S.D. Miss. Mar. 27, 2015).

21. Id. at *4–6.

22. Wells v. Am. Fin., Inc. (In re Wells), No. 15-80056-CR-13, 2015 WL 3862969 (Bankr. N.D. Ala. June 22, 2015).

23. Id. at *2.

24. 105 F. Supp. 3d 753 (E.D. Mich. 2015).

25. Id. at 764–65. Consequently, the lessor did not need to file a financing statement and a buyer of the property in which the system was installed took subject to the lease and was liable in unjust enrichment for continuing to use the system without paying the monthly metered usage fee. Id. at 766–68.

26. No. 1-1552, 2015 WL 6509507 (Iowa Ct. App. Oct. 28, 2015).

27. Id. at *2–5. Unfortunately, the court then failed to analyze the transaction under the facts-and-circumstances test of section 1-203(a) or discuss the fact that the parties did not discuss the value of the excavator when setting the option price, or that its value apparently exceeded all the consideration due under the lease. See id. at *4.

28. See U.C.C. § 9-203(b) (2013).

29. See id. § 9-102(a)(74) (defining “security agreement”).

30. See U.C.C. § 1-201(b)(35) (2011) (defining “security interest”).

31. See U.C.C. § 9-203(b)(3)(A) (2013).

32. See, e.g., Bank of Am., N.A. v. Outboard Marine Corp. (In re Outboard Marine Corp.), 300 B.R. 308, 323 (Bankr. N.D. Ill. 2003); see generally In re Weir-Penn, Inc., 344 B.R. 791, 793 (Bankr. N.D. W. Va. 2006) (citation omitted) (referencing “a collection of documents . . . [that] in the aggregate disclose an intent to grant a security interest in specific collateral”).

33. Simmons v. Brown (In re Brown), No. 14-72940-BEM, 2015 WL 2123819 (Bankr. N.D. Ga. Apr. 29, 2015).

34. Id. at *3.

35. 859 N.W.2d 921 (N.D. 2015).

36. Id. at 927.

37. No. 15 CVS 1648, 2015 WL 846697 (N.C. Super. Ct. Feb. 25, 2015).

38. No. 13 C 4692, 2015 WL 1952685 (N.D. Ill. Apr. 28, 2015).

39. Id. at *5–6; see also RESTATEMENT (THIRD) OF AGENCY § 3.03 & cmt. b (AM. LAW INST. 2006) (“[A]n agent’s apparent authority originates with express conduct by the principal . . . .”).

40. No. 15CA51, 2015 WL 6697469 (Ohio Ct. App. Nov. 2, 2015).

41. Id. at *4.

42. Gugino v. Rowley (In re Floyd), 540 B.R. 747 (Bankr. D. Idaho 2015).

43. Id. at 756–57.

44. Cable’s Enter., LLC v. Dunn (In re Cable’s Enter., LLC), No. 14-10782, 2015 WL 9412805 (Bankr. M.D.N.C. Dec. 21, 2015).

45. 121 F. Supp. 3d 277 (D. Mass. 2015).

46. 15 U.S.C. § 1666h (2012).

47. 12 C.F.R. § 226.12(d)(2) (2016); see also id. § 1026.12(d)(2).

48. Id. pt. 226, supp. I, para. 12(d)(2), cmt. (1)(i).

49. Martino, 121 F. Supp. 3d at 284–90; see also Allen Benson, An Avoidable Trap for Credit Card Issuers, THE TRANSACTIONAL LAW., Oct. 2015, at 6, 6–9 (analyzing the Martino case).

50. U.C.C. § 9-203(b)(3)(A) (2013).

51. See id. § 9-108(b).

52. Id. § 9-108(e)(2).

53. 536 B.R. 887 (D. Kan. 2015).

54. Id. at 892–93. But cf. Angell v. Accugenomics, Inc. (In re Gene Express, Inc.), No. 10-08432-8-JRL, 2013 WL 1787971, at *5–7 (Bankr. E.D.N.C. Apr. 26, 2013) (holding that commercial real estate lease that purported to grant the landlord a security interest in “any personal property belonging to Tenant and left on the Premises” did not adequately describe the collateral because “personal property” is not a permissible description, but failing to address why the phrase “left on the premises” did not suffice to render the description something other than supergeneric). On remand, the bankruptcy court found that the mobile home was a fixture. Morris v. Ark. Valley Credit Union (In re Gracy), No. 13-11917, 2015 WL 5552651, at *4 (Bankr. D. Kan. Sept. 17, 2015).

55. U.C.C. § 9-203(b)(1) (2013).

56. See id. § 9-102(a)(28)(A). But cf. In re Adirondack Timber Enter., Inc., No. 08-12553, 2010 WL 1741378, at *3 (Bankr. N.D.N.Y. Apr. 28, 2010) (holding that debtor that authenticated an agreement granting a security interest to a manufacturer to secure all obligations owed to the manufacturer and its affiliates did not grant a security interest to the bank subsidiary of the manufacturer, and thus the bank was not entitled to adequate protection).

57. See, e.g., U.C.C. § 9-102(a)(59) (2013) (defining “obligor”); id. § 9-102(a)(72) (defining “secondary obligor”); id. § 9-611(c)(1), (2) (specifying that notification of a disposition must be sent to the debtor and any secondary obligor, among others); id. § 9-621(b) (indicating when a secondary obligor is entitled to be sent a proposal to accept collateral); id. § 9-623(a) (indicating that collateral may be redeemed by the debtor and any secondary obligor, among others); id. § 9-625 (indicating the debtor, the obligor, and the secondary obligor, among others, may be entitled to damages if a secured party fails to comply with Part 6 of Article 9).

58. No. 06 Civ. 5466 (LAP), 2015 WL 5853916 (S.D.N.Y. Sept. 28, 2015).

59. Id. at *8. The court also noted that contract law requires that consideration exist, not that it flow from the promisee to the promisor. Id.

60. Bird v. SKR Credit, Ltd. (In re DigitalBridge Holdings, Inc.), No. 10-34499, 2015 WL 5766761 (Bankr. D. Utah Sept. 30, 2015).

61. Id. at *9.

62. No. 13-11506 (RG), 2015 WL 397799 (Bankr. S.D.N.Y. Jan. 29, 2015).

63. Id. at *2.

64. Id. at *3. Moreover, this security interest was unperfected because the filed financing statement described the condominium units, rather than the membership interest in the subsidiary. Id.

65. No. 1:13-cv-01286-TWP-DML, 2015 WL 417553 (S.D. Ind. Jan. 30, 2015).

66. Id. at *6–7.

67. See U.C.C. §§ 9-406(d)–(f), 9-407, 9-408, 9-409 (2013).

68. 463 S.W.3d 843 (Mo. Ct. App. 2015).

69. MO. REV. STAT. § 313.285.1 (2000).

70. Clark, 463 S.W.3d at 846–48. Courts in Texas and California have reached conflicting decisions on this issue. Compare Tex. Lottery Comm’n v. First State Bank of DeQueen, 325 S.W.3d 628, 635–39 (Tex. 2010) (holding that section 9-406 trumps the lottery statute’s restriction on assignment even though the lottery statute was more recent and more specific because section 9-406(f) makes clear that it takes precedence over other law), with Stone St. Capital, LLC v. Cal. State Lottery Comm’n, 80 Cal. Rptr. 3d 326, 330–40 (Ct. App. 2008) (holding that the California Lottery Act’s restriction on assignment of lottery winnings trumped section 9-406(f) because the specific rules in the Lottery Act controlled over the more general rules in Article 9, even though Article 9 was enacted more recently).

71. See U.C.C. §§ 9-317, 9-322(a) (2013).

72. See id. §§ 9-310 to -314.

73. Id. § 9-309.

74. See id. § 9-301(1).

75. J. Aron & Co. v. SemCrude, L.P. (In re SemCrude, L.P.), No. 08-11525 (BLS), 2015 WL 4594516 (D. Del. July 30, 2015), appeal docketed, No. 15-3097 (3d Cir. Sept. 17, 2015).

76. See KAN. STAT. ANN. § 84-9-339a (Supp. 2014); TEX. BUS. & COM. CODE ANN. § 9.343 (West 2001).

77. Arrow Oil & Gas, Inc. v. SemCrude, L.P. (In re SemCrude, L.P.), 407 B.R. 112, 137 (Bankr. D. Del. 2009) (“Texas § 9.343 does not apply in deciding whether the Texas Producers’ claimed security interests were perfected. Rather, Delaware law or Oklahoma law governs perfection.”); Mull Drilling Co. v. SemCrude, L.P. (In re SemCrude, L.P.), 407 B.R. 82, 109 (Bankr. D. Del. 2009) (“Kansas § 9-339a does not govern in deciding whether the Kansas Producers’ claimed security interests were perfected. Rather, Delaware law or Oklahoma law governs perfection.”). This conclusion might have been different if laws in these states had purported to create a statutory lien rather than a security interest.

78. In re SemCrude, L.P., 2015 WL 4594516, at *9–10.

79. See U.C.C. § 9-109(d)(1) & cmt. 10 (2013).

80. No. 15-31086-H3-11, 2015 WL 3879484 (Bankr. S.D. Tex. June 22, 2015).

81. Id. at *1–2.

82. See U.C.C. § 9-509(a)(1) (2013).

83. Id. § 9-509(b).

84. See id. §§ 9-322 cmt. 4, 9-509 cmt. 3.

85. Official Comm. of Unsecured Creditors of Adoni Grp., Inc. v. Capital Bus. Credit, LLC (In re Adoni Grp., Inc.), 530 B.R. 592 (Bankr. S.D.N.Y. 2015).

86. Id. at 596–99.

87. See U.C.C. § 9-502(a)(3) (2013).

88. See id. § 9-108(a).

89. See id. § 9-506(a).

90. Ring v. First Niagara Bank, N.A. (In re Sterling United, Inc.), No. 1-13-11351-MJK, 2015 WL 7573240, at *1 (W.D.N.Y. Nov. 25, 2015).

91. Id. at *2.

92. Id.

93. Official Comm. of Unsecured Creditors of Motors Liquidation Co. v. JPMorgan Chase Bank, 103 A.3d 1010, 1017–18 (Del. 2014).

94. Official Comm. of Unsecured Creditors of Motors Liquidation Co. v. JPMorgan Chase Bank (In re Motors Liquidation Co.), 777 F.3d 100, 105 (2d Cir. 2015) (per curiam). Each of the authors provided advice to the secured party during the litigation.

95. See U.C.C. § 9-312(b) (2013).

96. See id. § 9-104(a)(1)–(3).

97. Alexander v. Mill Steel Co. (In re Se. Stud & Components, Inc.), No. 14-32906-DHW, 2015 WL 7750209 (Bankr. M.D. Ala. Dec. 1, 2015).

98. Id. at *3.

99. See U.C.C. § 9-342 (2013) (indicating that a bank need not disclose the existence of a control agreement to anyone unless requested to do so by the depositor).

100. Id. § 9-317(b).

101. J. Aron & Co. v. SemCrude, L.P. (In re SemCrude, L.P.), No. 08-11525 (BLS), 2015 WL 4594516, at *9 (D. Del. July 30, 2015), appeal docketed, No. 15-3097 (3d Cir. Sept. 17, 2015); see supra notes 75–78 and accompanying text (discussing the case).

102. In re SemCrude, L.P., 2015 WL 4594516, at *10.

103. Id. The court also ruled that the buyers qualified as buyers in ordinary course of business who took free of the producers’ security interests under U.C.C. section 9-320(a), even if the security interests were perfected. Id. at *11–14. Although the buyers partially purchased on credit and partially paid in kind through cross-product netting arrangements prevalent in the oil and gas markets, these facts did not cause the transactions to fall outside the ordinary course of business or mean that the buyers acquired the goods in partial satisfaction of a money debt. Id.; see also U.C.C. § 1-201(b)(9) (2011) (defining “buyer in ordinary course of business”).

104. 771 S.E.2d 437 (Ga. Ct. App. 2015).

105. Id. at 438–39; see U.C.C. § 9-515(c) (2013).

106. Four Cty. Bank, 771 S.E.2d at 439–40.

107. Id. at 440; cf. U.C.C. § 9-331 cmt. 5 (2013) (“‘[G]ood faith’ does not impose a general duty of inquiry . . . .”).

108. U.C.C. § 9-322(a)(1) (2013).

109. 165 So. 3d 696 (Fla. Dist. Ct. App. 2015).

110. See U.C.C. § 9-109(a)(3) (2013).

111. Perez, 165 So. 2d at 699–701.

112. Id. at 701–702.

113. Id. Because the sale of a promissory note creates a security interest that is automatically perfected, see U.C.C. §§ 9-109(a)(3), 9-309(4) (2013), the court was incorrect to focus on which bank took possession first.

114. See, e.g., Provident Bank v. Cmty. Home Mortg. Corp., 498 F. Supp. 2d 558 (E.D.N.Y. 2007), discussed in Stephen L. Sepinuck & Kristen Adams, UCC Spotlight, COM. L. NEWSL. 1, 1–2 (A.B.A., Bus. L. Sec., July 2007), http://apps.americanbar.org/abanet/common/login/securedarea.cfm?areaType=committee&role=CL190000&url=/buslaw/committees/CL190000/newsletter/200707/spotlight.pdf; DLJ Mortg. Capital, Inc. v. Home Loan Mortg. Corp., No. B193493, 2008 WL 376941 (Cal. Ct. App. Feb. 13, 2008), discussed in Stephen L. Sepinuck & Kristen Adams, UCC Spotlight, COM. L. NEWSL. 2, 2–3 (A.B.A. Bus. L. Sec. July 2008), http://apps.americanbar.org/buslaw/committees/CL190000pub/newsletter/200807/spotlight.pdf.

115. U.C.C. §§ 9-330, 9-331 (2013).

116. See id. § 9-201(a).

117. See id. § 9-321(b).

118. No. 1:13-CV-867, 2015 WL 852354 (W.D. Mich. Feb. 26, 2015), aff’d sub nom. Cyber Sols. Int’l, LLC v. Pro Mktg. Sales, Inc., No. 15-1359, 2016 WL 106087 (6th Cir. Jan. 11, 2016).

119. Id. at *6.

120. See U.C.C. § 9-342 (2013).

121. See id. § 9-327(3). The one exception is if the secured party has become the bank’s customer with respect to the deposit account. See id. § 9-327(4).

122. See id. § 9-340.

123. 84 F. Supp. 3d 1314 (M.D. Fla. 2015).

124. Id. at 1325–26.

125. See U.C.C. §§ 9-609, 9-610 (2013).

126. See id. § 9-611(b)–(d).

127. See id. § 9-602(7).

128. See id. § 9-624(a).

129. 92 F. Supp. 3d 1041 (D. Kan. 2015).

130. Id. at 1060–61.

131. No. 14-cv-00206-RBJ, 2015 WL 5159073 (D. Colo. Sept. 3, 2015).

132. Id. at *6 (quoting workout agreement). Even if the secured party failed to comply with Article 9 by not providing notification of the sale, the debtor and guarantors presented no evidence that they could have paid the debt or produced a buyer who would have purchased the dredge at a higher price. Id. at *7. Accordingly, the court also ruled that the presumption that no deficiency is owing, which arises when a secured party’s enforcement does not comply with Part 6 of Article 9, see U.C.C. § 9-626(a)(3)–(4) (2013), was rebutted. Key Equip. Fin., 2015 WL 5159073, at *7.

133. U.C.C. § 9-610(a) (2013).

134. See id. § 9-610(b).

135. Id.

136. Id. § 9-626(a)(1), (2).

137. 92 F. Supp. 3d 1041 (D. Kan. 2015).

138. Id. at 1061–62; see supra notes 129–30 and accompanying text (discussing the case).

139. U.C.C. § 9-627(a) (2013).

140. Ross, 92 F. Supp. 3d at 1062.

141. Id. at 1062–63.

142. 610 F. App’x 848 (11th Cir. 2015) (per curiam).

143. Id. at 854–56.

144. Id. at 855.

145. 807 F.3d 407 (1st Cir. 2015).

146. Id. at 411–12.

147. Id. at 413.

148. Morgantown Excavators, Inc. v. Huntington Nat’l Bank (In re Godfrey), 537 B.R. 271 (Bankr. N.D. W. Va. 2015).

149. Id. at 281–82.

150. No. 1-13-1075, 2015 WL 1514908 (Ill. App. Ct. Mar. 31, 2015).

151. Id. at *8–11.

152. U.C.C. § 9-607(a)(1) (2013).

153. Id. § 9-406(a), (c).

154. 157 So. 3d 1154 (La. Ct. App. 2015).

155. The trial court based its decision on the fact that Swift Energy’s account had not been sold to the factor, and thus the factor was not an “assignee” of the account within the meaning of section 9-406(a). Id. at 1161–62. The court of appeals rejected this conclusion and ruled that the factor was an “assignee” of all the debtor’s accounts. Id. at 1162.

156. Id. at 1162–64.

157. See U.C.C. § 1-202(e), (f) (2011) (providing when an organization is deemed to have received a notification).

158. 793 F.3d 926, 937–38 (8th Cir. 2015).

159. No. 06 Civ. 5466 (LAP), 2015 WL 5853916 (S.D.N.Y. Sept. 28, 2015).

160. Id. at *15 (quoting Union Cent. Life Ins. Co. v. Berger, No. 10 Civ. 8408 (PGG), 2012 WL 4217795, at *11 (S.D.N.Y. Sept. 20, 2012)).

161. Id. at *15–16.

162. No. W2013-01753-COA-R3-CV, 2015 WL 340364 (Tenn. Ct. App. Jan. 27, 2015). The Tennessee Supreme Court remanded the case “solely for the purpose of full consideration of Bancorp-South Bank’s prejudgment interest issue.” BancorpSouth Bank v. 51 Concrete, LLC, No. W2013-01753-SC-R11-CV (Tenn. June 11, 2015) (per curiam) (order at 1).

163. BancorpSouth Bank, 2015 WL 340364, at *4.

164. See U.C.C. § 9-201(a) (2013) (“[A] security agreement is effective according to its terms between the parties, against purchasers of the collateral, and against creditors.”).

165. BancorpSouth Bank, 2015 WL 340364, at *5.

166. 792 F.3d 789 (7th Cir. 2015).

167. Id. at 791.

168. Id. at 793.

169. See U.C.C. § 9-617(a)(1) (2013).

170. See, e.g., Call Ctr. Techs., Inc. v. Grand Adventures Tour & Travel Publ’g Corp., 635 F.3d 48 (2d Cir. 2011); Elvis Presley Enters., Inc. v. Passport Video, 334 F. App’x 810 (9th Cir. 2009); Sourcing Mgmt., Inc. v. Simclar, Inc., 118 F. Supp. 3d 899 (N.D. Tex. 2015); Opportunity Fund, LLC v. Savana, Inc., No. 2:11-CV-528, 2014 WL 4079974 (S.D. Ohio Aug. 19, 2014); Ortiz v. Green Bull, Inc., No. 10-CV-3747 (ADS) (ETB), 2011 WL 5554522 (E.D.N.Y. Nov. 14, 2011); Perceptron, Inc. v. Silicon Video, Inc., No. 5:06-CV-0412 (GTS/DEP), 2010 WL 3463098 (N.D.N.Y. Aug. 27, 2010); Miller v. Forge Mench P’ship Ltd., No. 00 Civ. 4314 (MBM), 2005 WL 267551 (S.D.N.Y. Feb. 2, 2005); Milliken & Co. v. Duro Textiles, LLC, 887 N.E.2d 244 (Mass. 2008); Cont’l Ins. Co. v. Schneider, Inc., 873 A.2d 1286 (Pa. 2005).

171. No. 2-14-0333, 2015 WL 1516531 (Ill. App. Ct. Apr. 1, 2015).

172. Id. at *3, *5–7.

173. 126 A.3d 835 (N.H. 2015).

174. Id. at 839–41.

175. Id. at 841.

176. Id. at 842.

 

That Pesky Little Thing Called Fraud: An Examination of Buyers’ Insistence Upon (and Sellers’ Too Ready Acceptance of ) Undefined “Fraud Carve-Outs” in Acquisition Agreements

 

In those states that have a high regard for the sanctity of contract, a well-crafted waiver of reliance provision can effectively eliminate the specter of a buyer’s post-closing fraud claim based upon alleged extra-contractual representations of the seller or its agents. But undefined “fraud carve-outs” continue to find their way into acquisition agreements notwithstanding these otherwise well-crafted waiver of reliance provisions. An undefined fraud carve-out threatens to undermine not only the waiver of reliance provision, but also the contractual cap on indemnification that was otherwise stated to be the exclusive remedy for the representations and warranties that were set forth in the contract. Practitioners continue to exhibit a limited appreciation of the many meanings of the term “fraud” and the extent to which a generalized fraud carve-out can potentially expand the universe of claims and remedies that can be brought outside the remedies specifically bargained-for under the parties’ written agreement. Given the frequent insistence upon (and continued acceptance by many of) undefined fraud carve-outs, and recent court decisions that bring the undefined fraud carve-out issue into focus, this article will examine the various (and sometimes surprising) meanings of the term “fraud,” and the resulting danger of generalized fraud carve-outs, and will propose some possible responses to the buyer who insists upon including the potentially problematic phrase “except in the case of fraud” as an exception to the exclusive remedy provision of an acquisition agreement.

I. INTRODUCTION

Post-closing fraud claims by a buyer against a seller are “regrettably familiar.”1 Indeed, allegations of fraud can occur whenever a buyer encounters what it contends to be an unanticipated problem with a business it acquired, and either the bargained-for contractual representations and warranties do not cover that particular problem or the bargained-for contractual cap on liability for breach of those contractual representations and warranties proves insufficient.2 If the buyer was in fact deliberately lied to by the seller, or facts were deliberately concealed from the buyer by the seller, respecting a matter that was specifically negotiated by the buyer to be represented by the seller as a predicate to the buyer’s decision to purchase, such claims are understandable and, more importantly, may be enforceable, without regard to any contractual limits on fraud claims. But, in many states, fraud claims can be premised upon something less than the intentional, personal deceit that is commonly understood to be encompassed by the term fraud.3 And for the seller who instructed its representatives to be completely forthcoming with all relevant information requested by the buyer, and who believed that it had a clear agreement with the buyer as to what the seller was and was not prepared to represent and warrant regarding the business being purchased (and the extent to which the seller was and was not prepared to compensate the buyer in the event any of those bargained-for representations and warranties were inaccurate), the assertion of a claim of fraud by the buyer is a breach of the very bargain the seller believed it had made with the buyer.

In 2009, The Business Lawyer published an article that was designed to awaken deal professionals and their counsel to the dangers of these generalized fraud in-trusions into the heavily negotiated contractual limitations of liability that are effected through indemnification caps and exclusive remedy provisions.4 Specifically, the 2009 The Business Lawyer article provided guidance for drafting contractual provisions designed to preserve the integrity of a fully negotiated contractual deal against at least some of the corrupting effects of the everelusive “fraud” claim.5

Based on the proliferation of published practice notes concerning this subject since the publication of that article,6 the message as to the need to disclaim reliance on extra-contractual representations has been heard and more or less acted upon by many practitioners. Recent case law suggests, however, that the disclaimers of reliance used by many practitioners are not as clear or robust as they could be and, as a result, varied fraud claims have been permitted to proceed in the face of some of these less than fully effective provisions.7 But it is not the purpose of this article to re-plow old ground regarding the need for clear disclaimers of reliance.8 Rather, the purpose of this article is to address a more troubling issue—that is, the persistent insistence by buyers upon, and the agreement by many sellers to, a generalized fraud carve-out even where the disclaimer of reliance clause is clear that extra-contractual representations should not form the basis of any post-closing claim.

II. DEFINING THE PROBLEM

After listing a number of drafting tips for maximizing the effectiveness of disclaimer of reliance provisions, the 2009 The Business Lawyer article warned that draftspersons should avoid generalized fraud carve-outs because they could potentially undermine the effectiveness of the enumerated drafting tips.9 But the article did not suggest that certain types of fraud cannot or should not be an appropriate exception to the otherwise carefully negotiated caps on liability that formed the basis for the contracting parties’ written agreement; rather, the message was that the decision to permit any tort or equity based claims outside of the contractually negotiated indemnification should be done knowingly and carefully, within the parties’ written agreement, and as a matter of contract. Accordingly, the article suggested that, in lieu of an undefined fraud carve-out, an appropriate area for negotiations was a specific carve-out for deliberate misrepresentations by certain agreed upon persons relating to the bargained-for representations and warranties specifically set forth in the written agreement.10

The suggestion that the term “fraud” be specifically defined, when used as an exception to an exclusive remedy provision, appears to have been largely ignored by many within the transactional bar.11 Indeed, a recent practice note analyzing “recent case law and market practice on barring fraud claims by disclaiming extra-contractual representations and warranties and reliance in private acquisition agreements” notes a surprising number of publicly reported private company acquisition agreements that contain an undefined fraud carve-out as an exception to the exclusive remedy provision, suggesting that in certain cases the fraud carve-out was even made directly to the disclaimer of reliance provision itself.12 And the ABA’s 2013 Private Target Mergers & Acquisitions Deal Points Study similarly suggests that the undefined fraud carve-out persists as a common component of most private target acquisition agreements.13 In fact, there appears to be a basic assumption among many practitioners that it is simply inappropriate for a seller to refuse to agree to a generalized fraud carve-out.14

So, if a generalized fraud carve-out is apparently “market,”15 why are such carve-outs problematic and why write an article decrying their use? First, an undefined fraud carve-out to an exclusive remedy provision potentially “renders that provision meaningless” with respect to any allegations of fraud,16 thereby exposing a seller to lengthy and expensive litigation defending itself against uncapped claims, which may or may not be related to the bargained-for contractual representations and warranties, and which may or may not prove valid.17 Second, a 2013 Delaware decision noted the ambiguity created with respect to the efficacy of a disclaimer of reliance provision due to the existence of a generalized fraud carve-out—i.e., whether the carve-out related only to fraud claims premised upon the contractual warranties set forth in the written agreement or also to extra-contractual statements or omissions that were otherwise disclaimed.18 Third, recent cases suggest that the existence of a fraud carve-out renders the survival period and indemnification procedures applicable to the contractual warranties and representations irrelevant to any misrepresentation claim premised upon fraud, even with respect to those contractual warranties and representations.19 Fourth, undefined fraud is an “elusive and shadowy term,”20 which may not be limited to deliberate lying despite that common conception.21 Fifth, an undefined fraud carve-out not only fails to define the term fraud, but also fails to define whose fraud is being carved-out. Sixth, the person alleging the fraud may in fact be the fraudster, who is seeking to extort an unbargained-for post-closing purchase price concession from the seller based upon the mere threat of an undefined fraud claim. And lastly, the courts are not always in the best position to sort out the valid from the invalid claims when it comes to allegations of fraud, particularly when those claims are based on extra-contractual statements.22

III. THE MANY MEANINGS OF THE TERM FRAUD

The common conception of the term fraud is that it necessarily involves dishonesty, trickery, and deceit on the part of the accused. Indeed, to think in terms of someone being “accused” of fraud—that fraud is essentially theft by deception—is not an uncommon view of the nature of fraud. Thus, the classic dictionary definition of the term fraud is an “intentional pervasion of truth in order to induce another to part with something of value or to surrender a legal right.”23 But fraud, in fact, is a legal term derived from the common law and courts of equity that is not necessarily limited to the deliberate conveyance of deceptive falsehoods designed to swindle an unsuspecting counterparty. And a fraud carve-out that does not qualify the term “fraud” with the specific type of fraud to which one is intending to refer may well be a carve-out that captures more than the egregious conduct intended to be captured.24

Fraud has many meanings in the law. Indeed, “fraud is a many splendored thing”25 that defies specific definition by the courts,26 and that varies from state to state. Fraud has been described by courts as being “infinite in variety”27 and “taking on protean form at will.”28 Perhaps the best description of the varied meanings of the term fraud is the statement made by one court that “[f]raud is kaleidoscopic.”29 The images of fraud that emerge through the eyehole of this “judicial kaleidoscope” may not be as multifaceted as the patterns that can be seen through a real kaleidoscope, where the cylinder is turned and the colored glass falls into place,30 but they are more varied than many practitioners appear to think. To illustrate that premise, this article will focus on just four possible meanings of the term fraud: common law fraud, equitable fraud, promissory fraud, and unfair dealings fraud. The conduct involved in each of these types of fraud may all be deemed fraudulent under the law, but such conduct may or may not involve the type of dishonest misrepresentation of fact sought to be captured by the use of the phrase “except in the case of fraud.”31

A. COMMON LAW FRAUD

Common law fraud in the United States is a tort that is derived from the original English action of deceit.32 In most states, a plaintiff ’s successful claim of common law fraud requires proof of each of the following elements:

(i) the defendant made a representation; (ii) the representation was false; (iii) the defendant acted with scienter (i.e., knew the representation was false or made it recklessly without sufficient knowledge as to whether it was true or false); (iv) the defendant intended that the plaintiff rely on the representation; (v) the plaintiff reasonably or justifiably relied upon the representation; and (vi) the plaintiff suffered injury as a result of the representation.33

Thus, proof of common law fraud requires not only that a false representation was made by the seller, intending that it be relied upon by the buyer, with the buyer actually and justifiably relying upon that false representation to its detriment, but also that the seller acted with the requisite fraudulent state of mind in conveying that false representation.

While it may be a common belief that the “actual wickedness” that the term fraud connotes is the necessary fraudulent state of mind required to support a common law cause of action premised upon fraud, such has never truly been the case.34 It is true that in the nineteenth century English case of Derry v. Peek,35 which has been widely cited in the United States,36 it was established by Lord Herschell that proof of “fraud” is a requirement of an action for deceit and that “fraud is proved when it is shewn that a false representation has been made (1) knowingly, or (2) without belief in its truth, or (3) recklessly, careless whether it be true or false.”37 And this concept was reduced by Lord Herschell into a seemingly simple requirement that “[t]o prevent a false statement being fraudulent, there must, I think, be an honest belief in its truth.”38 But the interpretation of this simple guidance that suggested that all fraud was based in moral dishonesty or wickedness plays out quite differently in the modern deal world.

Based on the principles set forth in Lord Herschell’s opinion in Derry v. Peek, the Restatement (Second) of Torts defines the required state of mind to support a fraudulent misrepresentation claim as follows:

A misrepresentation is fraudulent if the maker (a) knows or believes that the matter is not as he represents it to be, (b) does not have the confidence in the accuracy of his representation that he states or implies, or (c) knows that he does not have the basis for his representation that he states or implies.39

And the Restatement’s comment to clause (b) above adds additional color to its definition of fraudulent misrepresentation as follows:

In order that a misrepresentation may be fraudulent it is not necessary that the maker know the matter is not as represented. Indeed, it is not necessary that he should even believe this to be so. It is enough that being conscious that he has neither knowledge nor belief in the existence of the matter he chooses to assert it as a fact. Indeed, since knowledge implies a firm conviction, a misrepresentation of a fact so made as to assert that the maker knows it, is fraudulent if he is conscious that he has merely a belief in its existence and recognizes that there is a chance, more or less great, that the fact may not be as it is represented. This is often expressed by saying that fraud is proved if it is shown that a false representation has been made without belief in its truth or recklessly, careless whether it is true or false.40

This is certainly less than the concept of deliberate lying or concealment that is often associated with the term “fraud.”

American courts have always had a broader view of the scienter requirement of Derry v. Peek than have the courts of England, reducing the scienter requirement in some cases to a standard that was “little more than negligence.”41 Indeed, as the law of fraud or deceit developed in the United States, it was made to fill gaps where the law of warranty was insufficient and the law of negligent misrepresentation had not yet been fully recognized as a cause of action.42 As a result, a claim of fraud was often the only available remedy when a buyer was induced by a seller’s false statement (regardless of the seller’s state of mind) to enter into a business transaction, and the line between statements being knowingly false and statements which were believed to be true, but not actually known to be true, appears to have become blurred.43 Essentially, fraud could arise in some states whenever a party made a statement that proved false unless at the time he or she made it he or she objectively knew it to be true: “The fraud consists in stating that the party knows the thing to exist, when he does not know it to exist; and if he does not know it to exist, he must ordinarily be deemed to know that he does not.”44 And “[a]n unqualified affirmation amounts to an affirmation of one’s own knowledge.”45 Thus, according to one court, any time an unqualified statement of fact is made (which is deemed by law to have been made to one’s own knowledge), “[i]t is immaterial whether a statement made as of one’s own knowledge is made innocently or knowingly” for the purpose of establishing fraudulent intent.46

The idea of a seller of a business having an honest belief in and being deemed to assert personal knowledge as to the absolute “truth” of every unqualified statement made as part of the representations and warranties of a modern acquisition agreement is a strange one indeed. Can a shareholder have an honest belief in the truth of an unqualified representation being made in a stock purchase agreement with respect to which the stockholder has no actual personal knowledge and which was based solely upon members of management’s knowledge? And is a qualification of a representation “to the knowledge of the seller” an in-dication that the seller actually has some direct knowledge upon which to base that representation? What about representations required to be made in the modern acquisition agreement with respect to which there is no basis to know whether they are true or false, but which are nonetheless made on an un-qualified basis as a matter of risk allocation? Can some form of negligence on the part of the seller, whether simple or gross, be a sufficient basis to sustain a claim of fraud?

This author does not believe that any seller intends to suggest that he or she has actual, personal knowledge sufficient to assert as true many of the representations and warranties contained in a modern acquisition agreement, never mind many of the statements made in management presentations. But does the existence of an undefined fraud carve-out create an opportunity for a buyer to suggest that the seller did in fact assert such personal knowledge? And given the fact that the representations and warranties in modern acquisition agreements are for the most part contractual risk allocation devices that are not dependent upon what the seller knew or did not know, should the modern U.S. acquisition agreement continue to contain “representations” (as opposed to only warranties) at all?47

An early statement of the less than wicked state of mind required to impose liability for common law fraud in the United States is that made by Oliver Wendell Holmes, Jr. in his classic work, The Common Law:

The common-law liability for the truth of statements is, therefore, more extensive than the sphere of actual moral fraud. But, again, it is enough in general if a representation is made recklessly, without knowing whether it is true or false. Now what does “recklessly” mean. It does not mean actual personal indifference to the truth of the statement. It means only that the data for the statement were so far insufficient that a prudent man could not have made it without leading to the inference that he was indifferent. That is to say, repeating an analysis which has been gone through with before, it means that the law, applying a general objective standard, determines that, if a man makes his statement on those data, he is liable, whatever was the state of his mind, and although he individually may have been perfectly free from wickedness in making it.48

Indeed, if the elements of common law fraud are otherwise present, “it need not be shown that the defendant also had a ‘bad’ motive in doing what he or she did,” because proof of a conscious intent to deceive is not necessarily a separate element of the cause of action for fraud in some states.49 Thus, a judge and a jury, looking at the available evidence after the fact, when the representation has in fact been proven false, decide what was the state of the seller’s mind when the representation was made (whether the seller had knowledge of the falsity of the statement itself, or simply had knowledge of the limited information upon which the seller had based its statement) in determining liability for generalized common law fraud. And common law fraud claims are “highly susceptible to the erroneous conclusions of judges and juries.”50

In light of the foregoing, one may well ask whether all claims that could be denominated “common law fraud” are truly intended to be carved out by a generalized fraud carve-out or only a specific subset?

B. EQUITABLE FRAUD

It is troubling enough that statements made in the negotiation of, or actually incorporated into the written representations and warranties set forth in, an acquisition agreement can be deemed fraudulent based upon an after-the-fact in-quiry into the real-time state of mind of the party who made those statements, particularly when that state of mind can be something less than the deliberate dishonesty that many suppose is required to support a claim of fraud. Even more troubling, however, is the fact that in the field of equity jurisprudence there is a type of fraud that does not require proof of scienter of any kind— i.e., equitable fraud. Indeed, “[t]he elements of scienter, that is, knowledge of the falsity and an intention to obtain an undue advantage therefrom, are not essential if plaintiff seeks to prove that a misrepresentation constituted only equitable fraud.”51

Equitable fraud is based on the simple principle that it is “fraudulent (in the equitable sense) for a defendant to hold a plaintiff to a bargain which has been induced by representations of the defendant which were untrue” regardless of any actual dishonesty on the part of the defendant.52 Thus, with only a slight twist of our judicial kaleidoscope, there appears a form of fraud that is devoid of any concept of moral fault. Unlike common law fraud, however, “[i]n an action for equitable fraud, the only relief that may be obtained is equitable relief, such as rescission or reformation of an agreement and not monetary damages.”53

Several recent Delaware cases confirm that the concept of equitable fraud is alive and well in modern jurisprudence.54 According to Delaware law, equitable fraud is available only in circumstances where equity jurisdiction is appropriate— i.e., claims involving abuse of fiduciary relationships or where an equitable remedy such as rescission or reformation is being sought.55 While the typical buyer/seller relationship in a sophisticated acquisition agreement rarely involves fiduciaries, claims of rescission are frequently made by disappointed buyers when the bargained-for indemnification is considered an insufficient remedy for a post-closing representation and warranty claim. Indeed, it was a claim of rescission that was made by the buyer in ABRY Partners V, L.P. v. F & W Acquisition LLC.56

As most transactional lawyers are aware, ABRY stands for the proposition that Delaware public policy will not permit a court to enforce an exclusive remedy provision to dismiss fraud claims that are based upon the seller’s deliberate lies respecting the contractual representations and warranties set forth in a written acquisition agreement.57 But ABRY also stands for the proposition that Delaware public policy will permit, and courts will enforce, disclaimer of reliance and exclusive remedy provisions with respect to deliberate lies made outside the specific contractual representations and warranties made within the four corners of an acquisition agreement. Likewise, Delaware will permit an exclusive remedy provision to limit the remedies available for false statements of fact set forth in the specific contractual representations and warranties to the extent that those contractual misrepresentations did not constitute deliberate lies made by the seller itself or by others acting on behalf of the seller and with the seller’s knowledge of the falsity of such representations.58 Thus, but for the disclaimer of reliance and the exclusive remedy provision that limited the buyer’s remedies to the capped indemnification provision, the public policy issue regarding a seller’s in-ability to exclude claims of fraud based upon a seller’s deliberate lies respecting the representations and warranties set forth in the written acquisition agreement may have never been reached in the ABRY case, as an innocent or negligent misrepresentation either inside or outside the four corners of the written acquisition agreement may have been the basis for equitable relief.59

Accordingly, a generalized fraud carve-out could be deemed to include (and thus permit claims based on) equitable, as well as common law, fraud. Is that what the parties intended? And is it clear that claims premised upon misrepresentations of existing fact, whether at common law or in equity, are the extent of a generalized fraud carve-out?

C. PROMISSORY FRAUD

With another twist of our judicial kaleidoscope, the concept of “promissory fraud” appears. Although it has often been said that representations about future performance cannot form the basis of a fraud claim because a fraud claim must be premised upon a misrepresentation concerning an existing fact, many states permit fraud claims based upon allegations that a party to a contract made a promise of future performance that such party never intended to perform.60

Promissory fraud is an exception to the longstanding rule of the common law that “[t]he duty to keep a contract at common law means a prediction that you must pay damages if you do not keep it[]—and nothing else.”61 Thus, “the cele-brated freedom to make contracts” supposedly includes “a considerable freedom to breach them as well.”62 But promissory fraud is considered a form of fraudulent inducement,63 where the existence of a contract is a required element of the cause of action,64 but the existence of the contract does not prevent the introduction of extraneous promises made outside the four corners of the written agreement to the extent those promises induced the execution of the written agreement.65 Moreover, once those extraneous promises are denominated as fraudulent, the existence of the contract also does not limit the available remedies for nonperformance of those promises to those arising under contract law as opposed to tort law.66 And while breach of a promised future performance is not proof of promissory fraud, in some states, a subsequent failure to perform, when coupled with even slight circumstances indicating an intention not to perform at the time the promise was made, is sufficient to prove fraud.67

A circumstance that has been deemed in certain cases to be evidence of promissory fraud is the defendant’s denial that he or she made the promise of future performance.68 Thus, if there is an ambiguity in an agreement, with the defendant claiming that it does not require performance under specified circumstances and the plaintiff claiming that it does, a subsequent finding in favor of the plaintiff as to the contract’s meaning can also result in a finding of promissory fraud against the defendant because the defendant has already admitted that he or she never intended to perform in accordance with the plaintiff ’s claimed interpretation of the contract.69

And imagine a circumstance in which a seller states at some point in the negotiation of the sale of his company that he intends to retire to his ranch following the sale of the business. The buyer then requests a non-compete and the seller refuses to agree to anything in writing regarding his future business activities, but reasserts that he is going to the ranch. The buyer closes, without a written non-compete agreement, and several years later the seller starts a competing business. Can the buyer successfully sue the seller for fraud notwithstanding its decision to proceed without a written non-compete? A nineteenth century English case (and remember that the United States inherited its common law from England) suggests that the answer to this question may well be yes.70

When carving out “claims of fraud” from exclusive remedy provisions, are the sophisticated parties involved in most corporate acquisitions intending to open up the possibility of introducing extraneous promises regarding future performance made in the period leading up to the execution of the written agreement, or dis-agreements as to the meaning of ambiguous provisions in the acquisition agreement, as potentially having been “insincere promises”71 that thereby constitute fraud? Are parties to a written agreement desirous of placing themselves in a position where a breach of contract claim can be converted into a tort claim through the use of the concept of promissory fraud? While these concepts have their place in protecting the consumer,72 do they really belong in the world of corporate acquisition agreements?

D. UNFAIR DEALINGS FRAUD

Even if the seller is somehow comfortable carving out common law fraud, equitable fraud, or promissory fraud from an exclusive remedy provision, a generalized fraud carve-out may not be limited to misrepresentations of fact or intention that have proved to have been false when made. Indeed, fraud can be “presumed or inferred from the circumstances or conditions of the parties’ contracting.”73

Conduct-based fraud can arise anytime one party is deemed to have taken an unfair advantage of the other party in such a manner that the court determines that the resulting bargain is “such as no man in his senses and not under delusion would make on the one hand, and as no honest and fair man would accept on the other: which are unequitable and unconscientious bargains.”74 So, with yet another slight twist of our judicial kaleidoscope, there appears the concept of “unfair dealings fraud,” a concept that eliminates the requirement that there has even been any false representation.

An example of a case finding “actual fraud,” without a misrepresentation having been made at all, is the Texas case of Dick’s Last Resort v. Market/Ross, Ltd.75 Dick’s involved the efforts of a landlord to pierce the veil of a corporate tenant to recover damages for breach of a lease agreement from the tenant’s parent companies and an ultimate individual owner.76 In Texas, by statute, a veil piercing claim arising from a contractual relationship requires proof of the use of a corporate counterparty for the purpose of perpetrating an “actual fraud” for the “direct personal benefit” of the person sought to be charged with the corporate counterparty’s contractual obligations.77

In essence, the landlord’s claim was that the tenant had deliberately set up a new entity that had no assets in order to enter into a lease renewal specifically for the purpose of shielding the parent companies from liability so that the parent companies would preserve flexibility to breach the lease in the future.78 The tenant’s ultimate individual owner admitted that he indeed had done exactly that.79 But the evidence was that there had never been any representation made to the landlord as to the financial wherewithal of the new corporate tenant, the new corporate tenant had fully performed for six of the ten years of the renewal term, the landlord never even inquired or did any diligence as to the financial soundness of the new tenant, and the existing tenant had expressly made its willingness to enter into the extended lease term conditioned upon the landlord’s acceptance of the new corporate tenant as the sole entity liable on the lease.80 Thus, the parent companies and their ultimate individual owner defended against the piercing claim by saying that “actual fraud” was simply a shorthand expression for common law fraud—i.e., the type of fraud that requires a misrepresentation and reliance, neither of which had been alleged by the landlord.81

But the Dick’s court held that “actual fraud” was not the same as common law fraud (with the elements of a false representation and reliance), but instead could be premised simply upon a finding of “conduct involving either dishonesty of purpose or intent to deceive”82—in this case, the use of a shell company as the new tenant in a lease renewal with a sophisticated lessor. With this finding of actual fraud by the jury, the new corporate tenant’s obligations under the lease were imposed upon the parent companies and their ultimate individual owner.83

While the doctrine of unfair dealings-based fraud may be appropriate to protect consumers from unscrupulous vendors who misrepresent the terms of so-called standard form contracts,84 do they really belong in a transaction between sophisticated parties who have bargained for the written agreement, negotiated at length, to be the extent of their respective obligations?85 And are sophisticated parties truly intending to carve out this type of fraud through a generalized fraud carve-out?

IV. SO WHAT DOES AN UNDEFINED FRAUD CARVE-OUT POTENTIALLY CARVE OUT?

Notwithstanding the many images of fraud that can be viewed through our judicial kaleidoscope, anecdotal evidence suggests that when transactional lawyers agree to a generalized fraud carve-out to an exclusive remedy provision, they are intending to preserve only their right to bring claims for “common law fraud.”86 But is language that simply carves out “claims of fraud” limited to claims based upon common law fraud, or can “claims of fraud” encompass some of the other concepts of fraud that do not necessarily require a false representation, scienter, and reliance? A 2009 English case provides one potential answer to that question.

In Cavell USA, Inc. v. Seaton Insurance Co.,87 the English Court of Appeal held that a fraud carve-out in a settlement agreement that released all legal and equitable claims against a party, “save” for claims “in the case of fraud,” was not limited to claims arising from the common law tort of deceit.88 Instead, recognizing that “the concept of fraud is notoriously difficult to define,” and impossible to confine in equity, the court found that “the concept of ‘fraud’ is wider than the concept of the tort of deceit where a fraudulent misrepresentation (or equivalent) is required.”89 While not precedent in the United States, the opinion was thoughtfully written and traced the historical reluctance of the common law and equity to define fraud or limit its application to the strict legal proof of the tort of deceit based on a fraudulent representation. As a result, this case suggests that a generalized fraud carve-out can have a meaning beyond the common law tort of fraud.

But even if the fraud carve-out is limited to claims of common law fraud only, is that carve-out intended to allow claims to proceed based upon any extra-contractual misrepresentations or only misrepresentations based upon the actual contractual representations and warranties bargained-for in the written acquisition agreement? Recent Delaware cases, like the holding in the English case of Cavell USA, suggest that a generalized fraud carve-out carries with it a potentially broad meaning that could undermine the disclaimer of reliance provision that was otherwise negotiated with respect to all purported extra-contractual representations.

In Airborne Health, Inc. v. Squid Soap, LP,90 the Delaware Court of Chancery noted that “[w]hen drafters specifically preserve the right to assert fraud claims, they must say so if they intend to limit that right to claims based on written representations in the contract.”91 Similarly, in Anvil Holdings Corp. v. Iron Acquisition Co.,92 the Delaware Court of Chancery noted in dicta that the existence of a generalized fraud carve-out casts doubt upon the efficacy of an otherwise clear waiver of reliance clause.93 The waiver of reliance provision in Anvil was actually broadly written.94 But, based in part upon the existence of a generalized fraud carve-out, the court nevertheless noted that “it appears reasonably conceivable that the Purchase Agreement does not preclude the Buyer’s fraud claim to the extent that claim is based on misrepresentations or omissions by the Individual Defendants during meetings leading up to the closing of the Transaction.”95

Moreover, there are collateral effects to the generic exclusion of fraud, even if “fraud” means only common law fraud related to the express written representations and warranties as set forth in the acquisition agreement. In ENI Holdings, LLC v. KBR Group Holdings, LLC,96 the Delaware Court of Chancery held that an express fraud carve-out from the exclusive remedy provision of an acquisition agreement precluded the dismissal of a fraud-based claim arising from the agreement’s express contractual representations and warranties, even though that claim had been brought outside the contractual survival period.97 So a fraud carve-out may allow a buyer to make fraud claims based on the contractual representations and warranties after the expiration of the contractual survival periods set forth in the indemnification provisions of the acquisition agreement. Is that what the parties truly intended?

It would appear, therefore, that carving out undefined “fraud” from an exclusive remedy provision may be excluding more than just the conscious communication of deliberate lies by the seller to the buyer respecting the bargained-for factual predicates to the deal.98 Instead, a generalized fraud carve-out could permit assertion of common law fraud (with its potentially less than actually dishonest state of mind requirement), equitable fraud (which could involve any misstatements of fact regardless of fault), promissory fraud (which may allow a breach of contract claim to be converted into a fraud claim and, in some circumstances, to potentially allow the introduction of alleged extra-contractual promises of future performance that were not made part of the final negotiated agreement), and unfair dealings-based fraud (which potentially opens up second guessing about the overall fairness of the deal that was made). Are all these various forms of fraud what the parties intended to carve out through a clause that simply states: “except in the case of fraud”? And, even if the fraud carve-out is in fact limited to common law fraud, are the parties truly intending to extend the survival period for claims based on the contractually bargained-for representations and warranties if the buyer simply re-pleads its claim as one arising in tort rather than contract?

V. WHOSE FRAUD IS BEING CARVED OUT ANYWAY?

In ABRY Partners V, L.P. v. F & W Acquisition LLC,99 then Vice Chancellor Strine100 distinguished not only between the various types of misrepresentations that can give rise to a claim of fraud, but also between a fraud involving the “Seller itself ” and one involving members of the management team of the port-folio company that was the subject of the stock purchase agreement.101 According to then Vice Chancellor Strine, only a fraud involving the “conscious participation in the communication of lies” by the “Seller itself ” and with respect to the representations and warranties specifically set forth in the stock purchase agreement constituted the type of fraud which, as a matter of public policy, could not be excluded by virtue of an exclusive remedy provision.102 A fraud perpetrated by the seller itself includes, of course, contractual representations made by the company in the acquisition agreement that are known by the seller to have been false when made.103 But then Vice Chancellor Strine thought there was nothing immoral about allocating the risk of lies being told by the management of the target company, without the seller’s knowledge, in such a way that the seller was not exposed to an extra-contractual fraud claim based upon its management team’s misrepresentations.104

In the absence of such a contractual allocation of risk, the common law has long held that a principal is liable for the fraud of his or her agent committed in the scope of that agent’s actual or apparent authority.105 And the agent is always personally liable for any fraud in which he or she participates, even if the fraud was committed solely for the benefit of the principal.106 Of course, these common law concepts were developed before the creation of the various limited liability entities that the law deems to have separate personhood from the individuals who manage and own them.107

A corporation or other limited liability entity is a non-sentient legal person and must act through human agents.108 It is the human officers or managers of these entities who are deemed the agents and the entities themselves that are deemed the principals.109 Thus, a corporate officer who is deemed to have committed a fraud in negotiating an acquisition agreement on behalf of his or her corporate principal is not only personally liable for the resulting damage claim, but so too is the corporate principal. And the corporate principal can be liable for its agent’s fraud even if the fraud benefited the agent.110 If members of management of a company being sold are listed as “knowledge parties” for the purposes of the representations and warranties being given by the selling shareholders, and there is an undefined fraud carve-out in the stock purchase agreement, are the selling shareholders creating the possibility that the buyer will attempt to impute a fraud committed by any such members of management to the selling shareholders?111

VI. THE CURRENT MARKET RATIONALE FOR, AND PROPOSED SOLUTIONS TO, THE GENERALIZED FRAUD CARVE-OUT

A surprising number of agreements negotiated by the most sophisticated counsel in the transactional bar contain ambiguous terms simply because the use of such terms is considered market.112 Why it should be deemed market to have an undefined fraud carve-out to an exclusive remedy provision, when it is now also market to disclaim all extra-contractual representations made outside the four corners of the agreement, is a mystery, at least in the United States. But a comparison of the practice in England, with that of the United States, may shed some light on this phenomenon.

A. ENGLISH MARKET PRACTICE REGARDING FRAUD CARVE-OUTS

Like in the United States, undefined fraud carve-outs are also market in England.113 Unlike in the United States, where a fraud carve-out has developed as a market ask for a buyer (and sellers have apparently demonstrated a significant willingness to accede to that ask), in England, the absence of a generalized fraud carve-out has been viewed as potentially rendering ineffective, under the Unfair Contract Terms Act,114 a provision that otherwise validly disclaims liability for negligent or innocent misrepresentations.115 Thus, a fraud carve-out has generally been volunteered by sellers based upon a 1996 case, Thomas Witter Ltd. v. TBP Industries Ltd.116

In Thomas Witter, the court stated that a provision whereby the buyer disclaimed reliance upon any representation other than those contained in the written agreement would be invalid under the Unfair Contract Terms Act because the provision purported to exclude liability for any type of pre-contractual misrepresentation, including those that were fraudulently made.117 According to the court, it would be inappropriate to imply an exception for fraudulent misrepresentations from a disclaimer provision that did not explicitly provide for such exclusion.118 Therefore, it was suggested that a broad disclaimer provision without an express fraud exception would be invalid, even as to claims involving negligent or innocent misrepresentations, which could have otherwise been validly disclaimed.119 As stated by Mr. Justice Jacob: “It is not for the law to fudge a way for an exclusion clause to be valid. If a party wants to exclude liability for certain sorts of misrepresentations, it must spell those sorts out clearly.”120

English commentators have noted, however, that Thomas Witter has not sub-sequently been followed by the English courts and that an express carve-out for fraud is now not necessary.121 It appears that subsequent case law has effectively held that unless a disclaimer clause expressly includes fraudulent misrepresentations, it will not be deemed to do so simply by virtue of broad language concerning non-reliance upon all pre-contractual representations.122 In light of these subsequent case law developments, and the holding of Cavell USA suggesting that an express fraud carve-out includes more than just truly fraudulent misrepresentations, one would think that our English colleagues would begin to change market practice and cease the use of generalized fraud carve-outs. But old habits die hard. While some English commentators suggest that the practice of specifically carving out fraud should be discontinued,123 others have suggested continued caution.124 But the existence of a generalized fraud carve-out after Cavell USA can no longer be viewed as a meaningless concession in England because the term “fraud” has a meaning beyond mere fraudulent misrepresentation as an element of the tort of deceit.125 Market practice is nevertheless slow to change in both England and the United States.

B. U.S. MARKET PRACTICE REGARDING FRAUD CARVE-OUTS

In the United States, there is no general equivalent to the Unfair Contract Terms Act that would have potentially invalidated for all purposes (even as to innocent and negligent misrepresentations) a non-reliance clause that purported to disclaim all extra-contractual misrepresentations, even those that were determined to have been fraudulent.126 Like England, however, there are states where public policy does in fact override an effort by contracting parties to disclaim reliance upon fraudulent misrepresentations of fact that were alleged to have been made as an inducement to the counterparty to enter into the contract.127 Prior to the 2009 The Business Lawyer article, when this author would informally survey transactional lawyers as to the efficacy of disclaimers of reliance, even in states without such a strict public policy prohibition (Delaware, Texas, and New York primarily), the overwhelming sentiment was that “you can always bring a claim for fraud no matter what the contract says.” That assumption may have led many to agree to a fraud carve-out on an “it’s just sleeves off my vest” approach because of the belief that a fraud carve-out is read into the contract in any event.128 But practitioners should now know that, under many states’ law governing large corporate transactions in the United States, it is simply not the case that you can always bring a claim for fraudulent misrepresentation notwithstanding carefully crafted disclaimers of reliance and exclusive remedy provisions.129 Is the fraud carve-out, therefore, just an effort by some buyers to contractually get back to the place that was previously assumed, i.e., “you can always bring a claim for fraud no matter what the contract says”? If so, why are sellers agreeing to this? Why denominate the exact extent of the bargained-for representations and warranties in the first place if a party can instead claim reliance upon extra-contractual statements that were made in management presentations and discussions, but not incorporated into the carefully negotiated written representations and warranties that formed the basis of the parties’ written agreement? And even as to those representations and warranties that were incorporated into the written acquisition agreement, “why spend all of the time and effort negotiating detailed indemnification provisions if a buyer can avoid them based on the legal characterization it decides to place on the claim”?130 Is the explanation for this practice essentially the same as in England—i.e., old habits die hard?

A recent practice note illustrates, but does not necessarily explain the rationale for, the apparent disconnect between the purpose of the exclusive remedy provision and the ubiquitous, undefined fraud carve-out commonly associated with existing U.S. market practice.131 First, the authors note that, in U.S. acquisition agreements, the provisions governing indemnification “generally specify in detail the rights of the parties with respect to how claims are dealt with, including . . . timing, process, payment of claims, and limitations on liability.”132 And “[a]n [exclusive remedy] provision is intended to prevent a plaintiff from circumventing these carefully negotiated limitations by providing that the right of indemnification constitutes the only post-closing recourse available to either party and precludes the parties from seeking claims outside of the specifically negotiated indemnification terms.”133 But then the authors note that, based on a review of four years of ABA Private Target M&A Deal Points Studies, exclusive remedy provisions are also subject to “commonly negotiated carve-outs, usually fairly narrow in scope.”134 And what is the most common of these supposedly “narrow in scope” carve-outs? Undefined fraud, of course, is the most common carve-out.135 However, the authors do identify what they refer to as a “surprising” “trend to increasingly define the term ‘fraud.’”136 But the identified “definitions” of the term “fraud” were largely limited to the use of a descriptive adjective in front of the word fraud, such as “actual” or “intentional.”137

C. COMPARING U.S. VERSUS ENGLISH MARKET PRACTICE CONCERNING THE USE OF CONTRACTUAL REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES

It is always important when discussing fraud carve-outs in the U.S. market to keep in mind the distinction between fraud claims based upon extra-contractual representations and fraud claims based upon the representations and warranties set forth in the acquisition agreement itself. While it is against public policy to disclaim liability for fraudulent pre-contractual misrepresentations in England, a seller can apparently avoid incurring tort liability for any contractual statements regarding a purchased business made in an acquisition agreement if the seller carefully denominates those statements as warranties rather than representations. Indeed, a recent English case refused to allow carefully crafted contractual warranties in an acquisition agreement to be converted into tort-based representations that could circumvent the contractually limited remedies available for breach of those warranties.138 In contrast, at least in Delaware, liability for deliberate misrepresentations based on the contractual representations and warranties specifically set forth in a written agreement is the only type of misrepresentation-related liability that an exclusive remedy provision (and a related non-reliance provision) cannot avoid.139

The distinction between contractual warranties and contractual representations does not appear to mean much in the United States given that, unlike in England, “it is common market practice for a seller to make both representations and warranties” in an acquisition agreement.140 But a recent practice note comparing New York versus English practice on this subject suggests that the exclusive remedy provision of a standard New York acquisition agreement provides for the same result under a New York-style agreement that includes both representations and warranties as does an English-style agreement that only provides for warranties.141 The reason for this conclusion is that the exclusive remedy provisions of most New York acquisition agreements broadly exclude “all other rights, claims and causes of action that they might have against the other party, except pursuant to the indemnification provisions set forth in the indemnification article.”142 And this exclusion of other available remedies necessarily includes the remedy of rescission that is the primary benefit of bringing a claim as one based on a misrepresentation rather than merely a breach of warranty in both England and the United States.143 But then, to further illustrate, but still not explain the rationale for, the disconnect between the undefined fraud carve-out and the purpose of the exclusive remedy provision in the United States, the author simply notes that a generalized fraud carve-out could potentially moot the benefit of this exclusion of the remedy of rescission.144

So where does this leave us? While it is apparently “still a minority approach” in the U.S. market, there is a clear “trend to increasingly define fraud with some specificity when including it as an exception to an [exclusive remedy] provision.”145 And defining fraud by adding a descriptive adjective is certainly a step in the right direction, but it does not necessarily address all of the concerns previously noted in this article. So, if we are stuck with a market reality of a fraud carve-out to the exclusive remedy provision in the United States, how should the term “fraud” be defined so that it properly captures only the egregious form of fraudulent misrepresentation and then only with respect to the representations and warranties specifically bargained for in the written agreement?

D. ENCOURAGING A NEW APPROACH IN U.S. MARKET PRACTICE: SPECIFIC VERSUS GENERAL FRAUD CARVE-OUTS

A good start in crafting an appropriate definition of fraud that is specific rather than general is a provision from the acquisition agreement governing Miller Energy Resources, Inc.’s 2013 purchase of certain assets of Armstrong Cook Inlet, LLC.146

Section 11.3 of this acquisition agreement contains a fairly standard exclusive remedy provision mandating indemnification pursuant to Article 11 of the agreement as “the sole and exclusive remedy of each Party under, arising out of or relating to this Agreement, and the transactions contemplated hereby, whether based in contract, tort, strict liability, statute, common law or otherwise.”147 Like many acquisition agreements, however, this agreement also contains a fraud carve-out. But the difference in this agreement is that it is not a generalized fraud carve-out. Instead, the fraud carve-out in this agreement reads as follows:

Notwithstanding the foregoing, nothing in this ARTICLE 11 is intended to limit the rights of the Parties with respect [to] intentional or willful misrepresentation of material facts which constitute common law fraud under applicable laws.148

The benefit of this more specific language is that it specifies the scienter requirement (“intentional or willful misrepresentation”), specifies the requirement that the misrepresentation must be of “material facts,” and maintains the requirement that the resulting intentional or willful149 misrepresentation of material facts must still constitute “common law fraud,” which appears intended to preserve the requirement that the buyer still has to prove all the other elements of common law fraud, including the buyer’s justifiable reliance. But the clause does not limit this more specific common law fraud carve-out to the contractual rather than extra-contractual representations, nor does it specify whose intentional or willful misrepresentations can be charged to the seller.

A recent example of a more specific fraud carve-out that defines fraud so that it only captures deliberate lies made by a seller through the contractual representations is the one set forth in the exclusive remedy provision of the acquisition agreement governing Cementos Argos S.A.’s. acquisition of certain assets of Vulcan Materials Company.150 In that agreement the fraud carve-out reads as follows:

[N]othing herein shall operate to limit the common law liability of any Seller to Purchasers for fraud in the event such Seller is finally determined by a court of competent jurisdiction to have willfully and knowingly committed fraud against any Purchaser, with the specific intent to deceive and mislead any Purchaser, regarding the representations and warranties made herein or in any schedule, exhibit or certificate delivered pursuant hereto.151

Again, the scienter standard for fraud in this clause requires deliberate dishonesty, with intent to deceive. Moreover, the specifically defined fraud carve-out in this clause only relates to the representations and warranties made in the agreement or in a document delivered pursuant to the agreement, and each seller is only responsible for its own fraud.

Finally, the Stock Purchase Agreement governing Leonard Green & Partners, L.P.’s acquisition of the stock of Lucky Brand Dungarees, Inc. from Fifth & Pacific Companies, Inc. contains a defined term for “Fraud,” for the purposes of the fraud carve-out, as follows:

“Fraud” means, with respect to a Party, an actual and intentional fraud with respect to the making of the representations and warranties pursuant to Article IV or Article V (as applicable), provided, that such actual and intentional fraud of such Party shall only be deemed to exist if any of the individuals included on Section 1.1(vv) of the Seller Disclosure Letter (in the case of the Seller) or Buyer Disclosure Letter (in the case of the Buyer) had actual knowledge (as opposed to imputed or constructive knowledge) that the representations and warranties made by such Party pursuant to, in the case of the Seller, Article IV as qualified by the Seller Disclosure Letter, or, in the case of the Buyer, Article V as qualified by the Buyer Disclosure Letter, were actually breached when made, with the express intention that the other Party rely thereon to its detriment.152

This definition captures the intentional scienter requirement, the fact that the fraud has to relate only to the representations and warranties made in the agreement itself, the determination of whose fraud matters, the specific type of knowledge that constitutes fraud, and the requirement that there be a specific intention to harm the other party.

Of course, there are obvious other points that could be the subject of further negotiation respecting this definition of fraud. For example, this definition charges the seller with fraud committed by the named individuals rather than providing that the named individuals are liable for their own fraud only;153 and this definition still leaves open the possibility of bringing a claim of fraud outside the survival periods, without complying with the indemnification procedures and without the benefit of any limitations on recoverable losses that may have otherwise been bargained for as part of the indemnification provision.154 But given that only a claim of “Fraud” (as defined above) is carved out, rather than “any claim based on fraud,” then, depending on the deal dynamics, perhaps these potential deficiencies are something worth letting slide. The point is not that this definition of fraud is perfect, but that it begins to limit the many splendors of fraud to something concrete and understandable in the context of a sophisticated acquisition agreement.

There remains, of course, the argument that once you agree to eliminate all claims of extra-contractual fraud, why should you then agree to allow fraud claims to be premised on the contractually bargained-for representations and warranties that are subject to specifically bargained-for contractual remedies at all?155 But the market, at least in the United States, seems to be decidedly favoring those that persist in insisting upon some form of fraud carve-out.156

VII. CONCLUSION

What the term fraud denotes in the law is potentially more far reaching than that which it connotes. Fraud is an ancient term that comes to us shrouded in myth and legend. It is like that beast reported to be dwelling in the cave just on the other side of the swamp outside the village walls. It purportedly breaths fire, has wings, is massive, and is something to be feared and loathed, but until we go into the cave and drag him out (if he is actually there at all) we cannot “count his teeth and claws, and see just what is his strength.”157 And perhaps there is not just one creature that dwells in that cave, but several that have been mythically arranged into a composite, only one or more of which are actually to be feared, loathed, and perhaps killed, with the others being nothing more than harmless lizards whose collective “shadows” in the firelight only made them seem like a dragon.158

As noted in a 2008 The Business Lawyer article about the use of the term “consequential damages,” “many of the most sophisticated and ‘heavily counseled’ acquisition agreements contain ‘glaringly ambiguous terms that lead to avoidable litigation.’”159 “Fraud” is a term very much like the term “consequential damages.” Practitioners believe they know what both these terms mean, but they may, in fact, be basing that belief on those terms’ connotations, not their legal definitions. The term “fraud” carries with it a connotation that makes it extremely difficult for seller’s counsel to resist when buyer’s counsel insists on the inclusion of the seemingly straightforward phrase “except in the case of fraud” at the end of the exclusive remedy provision of an acquisition agreement. After all, who wants to be perceived as suggesting that his or her client would actually commit fraud, as that term is commonly, but not necessarily legally, understood? And clients rarely “get” this issue or have patience for it because they have no intention of acting other than honestly. But the purpose of this article has been to “get the dragon out of his cave on to the plain and in the daylight”160 and demonstrate why simply acting honestly will not necessarily preclude the possibility of certain types of fraud claims. If this article has succeeded in that purpose, then perhaps future discussions with clients and opposing counsel regarding the need for better definition as to exactly what is meant by the phrase “except in the case of fraud” will be easier.

To have set out to identify as problematic an apparently common market practice of including undefined fraud carve-outs to exclusive remedy provisions, this author is “not so naı¨ve as to believe that this [a]rticle will suddenly change existing deal practice and result in more deliberate and thoughtful negotiation regarding [fraud carve-outs].”161 That does not appear to have been the case for consequential damage waivers despite identifying the term “consequential damages” as being “shockingly ambiguous” in a 2008 The Business Lawyer article.162 But this author hopes that the previously identified “minority trend” to clearly define fraud for the purpose of an exclusive remedy provision will become a dominant market practice for negotiated fraud carve-outs because “[a] properly drafted contract should clearly and unequivocally define the limits of the parties’ obligations in words that are well understood.”163 Only time will tell if that hope will be realized.

_____________

* Glenn D. West is a Dallas-based partner with Weil, Gotshal & Manges LLP. The views expressed in this article are those of the author only, and are not necessarily shared or endorsed by Weil, Gotshal & Manges LLP or its partners. The author wishes to express appreciation to Dallas-based colleague, Jacqui Bogucki, for her research and cite-checking assistance in connection with making this article ready for publication, and Boston and New York-based colleagues, Kevin Sullivan and Irwin Warren, for their helpful editorial comments. The author is also grateful for the review of the English law aspects of this article by the author’s London-based colleagues, Hannah Field-Lowes, Simon Lyell, and Christopher Marks.

1. Transdigm Inc. v. Alcoa Global Fasteners, Inc., C.A. No. 7135-VCP, 2013 WL 2326881, at *1 (Del. Ch. May 29, 2013).

2. See Carol L. Newman, New California Supreme Court Decision May Undermine Enforceability of Contracts, VALLEY LAW. (San Fernando Valley Bar Ass’n, Tarzana, Cal.), Mar. 2013, at 18, 20, available at http://goo.gl/5b5OLs; see also Eurofins Panlabs, Inc. v. Ricerca Biosciences, LLC, C.A. No. 8431-VCN, 2014 WL 2457515, at *1 (Del. Ch. May 30, 2014) (“A combination of buyer’s remorse and ‘wishing makes it so’ may persuade a frustrated and disappointed buyer that only the seller’s misrepresentation could have placed the buyer in its unhappy predicament.”).

3. See infra Part III.

4. See Glenn D. West & W. Benton Lewis, Jr., Contractually Avoiding Extra-Contractual Liability— Can Your Contractual Deal Ever Really Be theEntire” Deal?, 64 BUS. LAW. 999 (2009).

5. See id.

6. See, e.g., Daniel Avery & Nicholas Perricone, Trends in M&A Provisions: Indemnification as an Exclusive Remedy, 16 MERGERS & ACQUISITIONS L. REP. (BNA) 1349 (Sept. 19, 2013), available at http://goo.gl/PGFZ6U; Wilson Chu & Jessica Pearlman, Disclaimers of Reliance in Private M&A Deals Chart, PRAC. L. CO., http://us.practicallaw.com/2-562-5859 (last updated July 7, 2014); Roxanne L. Houtman & Catherine A. Schmierer, Walking the Tightrope: Limiting Fraud Claims Based on Extra-Contractual Statements and Omissions, BUS. L. TODAY (Aug. 2013), http://www.americanbar.org/publications/blt/2013/08.html; George Bundy Smith & Thomas J. Hall, Exceptions to the Enforceability of Contractual Disclaimers of Reliance, N.Y. L.J. (June 18, 2010), http://goo.gl/1A1LWh;Linda R. Stahl, Beware the Boilerplate in Merger Clauses, LAW360 (June 28, 2013, 10:09 AM), http://www.law360.com/articles/453829/beware-the-boilerplate-in-merger-clauses; Andrew M. Zeitlin & Alison P. Baker, At Liberty to Lie? The Viability of Fraud Claims After Disclaiming Reliance, 20 BUS. TORTS J., Apr. 2013, at 2, available at http://goo.gl/TURsBD; see also Robert K. Wise, Andrew J. Szygenda & Thomas F. Lillard, Of Lies and Disclaimers—Contracting Around Fraud Under Texas Law, 41 ST. MARYS L.J. 119 (2009) (containing a thorough examination of Texas law on this subject).

7. See, e.g., TEK Stainless Piping Prods., Inc. v. Smith, C.A. No. N13C-03-0175 MMJ CCLD, 2013 WL 5755468, at *3, *4 (Del. Ch. Oct. 14, 2013) (permitting a claim for fraud and finding that language stating “[e]xcept as explicitly set forth herein, no representations, warranties or promises of any kind have been made by Buyer or any third party to induce Seller or Owner to execute this [A]greement” was not an anti-reliance clause that would bar a fraud claim because it “lack[ed] the specific anti-reliance language required” and was “not a clear and unambiguous agreement that the parties are not relying upon any representation or statement of fact not contained within the” agreement); All-trista Plastics, LLC v. Rockline Indus., Inc., C.A. No. N12C-09-094 JTV, 2013 WL 5210255, at *6 (Del. Ch. Sept. 4, 2013) (permitting a claim for fraud when a supply agreement’s standard “integration clause contain[ed] no explicit anti-reliance language”); Transdigm Inc. v. Alcoa Global Fasteners, Inc., C.A. No. 7135-VCP, 2013 WL 2326881, at *9 (Del. Ch. May 29, 2013) (permitting a fraud claim where the buyer only disclaimed reliance on extra-contractual representations that had been made, not reliance on extra-contractual omissions); Anvil Holding Corp. v. Iron Acquisition Co., C.A. Nos. 7975-VCP, N12C-11-053-DFP [CCLD], 2013 WL 229655, at *9 (Del. Ch. May 17, 2013) (permitting a fraud claim when the agreement “do[es] not clearly state that the parties disclaim reliance upon extra-contractual statements”); Italian Cowboy Partners, Ltd. v. Prudential Ins. Co. of Am., 341 S.W.3d 323, 336 (Tex. 2011) (finding that without a clear and unequivocal intent to disclaim reliance or waive claims for fraudulent inducement by having contract language that does not include the words “rely” or “reliance,” a standard merger clause does not preclude claims for fraudulent inducement); see also Practice Note, Disclaimers of Reliance in M&A Deals: Judicial Guidance and Market Practice, PRAC. L. CO. (Oct. 25, 2013), http://us.practicallaw.com/3-548-4147 (discussing many of these cases).

8. See West & Lewis, supra note 4, at 1037–38 (providing a model non-reliance provision that specifically disclaims reliance by the buyer on any extra-contractual representations, disclaims any representations as to the “accuracy or completeness” of any information provided to the buyer by the seller, and disclaims any obligation of the seller to make any disclosures of fact not required to be disclosed pursuant to the specific representations and warranties set forth in the agreement).

9. Id. at 1033. This warning was repeated by other practitioners in 2010, in even more alarming language: “The fraud exception to the ‘sole remedy’ provision . . . can result in a host of unintended (and potentially catastrophic) consequences.” Christopher D. Kratovil & D. Joseph Meister, Weighing the Fraud Exception in Indemnification Provisions, HEADNOTES (Dallas Bar Ass’n, Dallas, Tex.), Feb. 2010, at 3, available at http://www2.dallasbar.org/documents/HN0210_FINAL.pdf.

10. West & Lewis, supra note 4, at 1033.

11. “Ignored” is perhaps unfair. Deal dynamics can definitely require concessions on issues such as these that deal lawyers would prefer not to make. See infra note 112. And the conclusion as to how extensive is the use of generalized fraud carve-outs is based on surveys that exclude a significant number of private transactions that are not publicly available for review. See Lisa J. Hedrick, Finding the Market in Private-Company M&A, LAW360 (Mar. 3, 2014, 2:38 PM), http://www.law360.com/mergersacquisitions/articles/513619.

12. Practice Note, Disclaimers of Reliance in M&A Deals: Judicial Guidance and Market Practice, PRAC. L. CO. (Oct. 25, 2013), http://us.practicallaw.com/3-548-4147.

13. SUBCOMM. ON MKT. TRENDS OF THE BUS. LAW SECTION MERGERS & ACQUISITIONS COMM., 2013 PRIVATE TARGET MERGERS & ACQUISITIONS DEAL POINTS STUDY 104 (2013) (on file with The Business Lawyer).

14. See, e.g., Howard T. Spilko, Key Negotiating Points in Private Acquisition Agreements Comparison Chart, PRAC. L. CO., http://us.practicallaw.com/5-422-5017 (last updated July 7, 2014) (“[I]t is difficult for a seller to argue that fraud must be subject to any indemnification limitations.”); Avery & Perricone, supra note 6, at 3 (noting that “fraud was consistently a very common carve-out” from an exclusive remedy provision based on the authors’ review of several ABA studies).

15. Practice Note, What’s Market: Indemnification Provisions in Acquisition Agreements, PRAC. L. CO. (June 30, 2014), http://us.practicallaw.com/3-504-8533 (“Exclusive remedy provisions generally exclude claims based on fraud, criminal activity or willful misconduct and claims for equitable relief (such as specific performance).”). Of course, it must be again noted that the determination of market here is based solely upon publicly available sources, which necessarily exclude many private transactions. See supra note 11.

16. Merrill Lynch & Co. v. Allegheny Energy, Inc., No. 02 Civ. 7689 (HB), 2005 WL 832050, at *3 (S.D.N.Y. Apr. 12, 2005); see also Eurofins Panlabs, Inc. v. Ricerca Biosciences, LLC, C.A. No. 8431-VCN, 2014 WL 2457515, at *4 n.33 (Del. Ch. May 30, 2014) (“[T]he fraud exception appears to liberate the party asserting fraud from the entirety of the [agreement’s] indemnification provisions.”).

17. ABRY Partners V, L.P. v. F & W Acquisition LLC, 891 A.2d 1032, 1062 (Del. Ch. 2006); West & Lewis, supra note 4, at 1023, 1034–35.

18. Anvil Holding Corp. v. Iron Acquisition Co., C.A. Nos. 7975-VCP, N12C-11-053-DFP [CCLD], 2013 WL 2249655, at *7 n.29 (Del. Ch. May 17, 2013).

19. ENI Holdings, LLC v. KBR Group Holdings, LLC, C.A. No. 8075-VCG, 2013 WL 6186326 (Del. Ch. Nov. 27, 2013) (inapplicability of the contractual survival periods to misrepresentation claims premised on fraud, even though the claims were based upon contractual representations rather than extra-contractual representations); Wyle, Inc. v. ITT Corp., No. 653465/2011, 2013 WL 5754086 (N.Y. Sup. Ct. Oct. 21, 2013) (inapplicability of contractual notice requirements to misrepresentation claims premised on fraud, even though the claims were based upon contractual representations rather than extra-contractual representations).

20. Kinard v. Sims, 53 S.W.2d 803, 805 (Tex. Civ. App. 1932).

21. See James H. Wallenstein, Negotiating Non-Recourse Carve-Outs in Light of Recent Court Decisions, 35TH ANNUAL ADVANCED REAL ESTATE LAW COURSE (Dallas Bar Ass’n, Dallas, Tex.), Mar. 11, 2013, at 20 (on file with The Business Lawyer) (“The problem with the terms ‘fraud’ and ‘intentional misrepresentation’ is that they are not, as some may assume, limited to an evil act of gargantuan pro-portions . . . .”).

22. West & Lewis, supra note 4, at 1017, 1023, 1034–35.

23. MERRIAM-WEBSTERS COLLEGIATE DICTIONARY 498 (11th ed. 2008).

24. See, e.g., V. John Ella, Common Law Fraud Claims: A Critical Tool for Litigators, BENCH & B. MINN., Sept. 2006, at 18, 18 n.5, available at http://www2.mnbar.org/benchandbar/2006/sept06/fraud.htm. (“To add to the confusion, some courts use the term ‘fraud’ to denote a general category of misrepresentation claims.” (citing Williams v. Tweed, 520 N.W.2d 515, 517 (Minn. Ct. App. 1994) (“Three types of misrepresentations fall under [the] broad category of fraud: reckless misrepresentation, negligent misrepresentation, and deceit.”))).

25. A phrase repeatedly used by this author in a series of presentations made with Byron Egan and Patricia Vella.

26. See, e.g., McClellan v. Cantrell, 217 F.3d 890, 893 (7th Cir. 2000) (“Fraud is a generic term. . . . No definite and invariable rule can be laid down as a general proposition defining fraud . . . .”); Comment, Deceit and Negligent Misrepresentation in Maryland, 35 MD. L. REV. 651, 658 n.45 (1976) (“The common law not only gives no definition of fraud, but perhaps wisely asserts as a principle that there shall be no definition of it . . . .” (quoting McAleer v. Horlsey, 35 Md. 439, 452 (1872))); Stonemets v. Head, 154 S.W. 108, 114 (Mo. 1913) (“[D]efinitions of fraud are of set purpose left general and flexible, and thereto courts match their astuteness against the versatile inventions of frauddoers.”); see generally L.A. SHERIDAN, FRAUD IN EQUITY: A STUDY IN ENGLISH AND IRISH LAW (Sir Isaac Pittman & Sons Ltd. 1957) (asserting that fraud has never been defined by the courts); Samuel W. Buell, What Is Securities Fraud?, 61 DUKE L.J. 511, 520–40 (2011) (discussing the varied mental states that can constitute fraud, and concluding that “[a] complete understanding of fraud would require a book-length treatment”).

27. Reddaway v. Banham, [1896] A.C. 199 (H.L.) 221 (Eng.).

28. Stonemets, 154 S.W. at 114, discussed in SHERIDAN, supra note 26, at 1.

29. Id.; see also Jeremy W. Dickens, Note, Equitable Subordination and Analogous Theories of Lender Liability: Toward a New Model ofControl,” 65 TEX. L. REV. 801, 815–16 (1987) (“A word of broad import, fraud implies a type of conduct capable of ‘kaleidoscopic variations’ and consequently not readily translated into definable categories.”).

30. Melanie F.F. Gibbs, How Kaleidoscopes Work, HOW STUFF WORKS (Jan. 19, 2012), http://science.howstuffworks.com/kaleidoscope.htm. The term “judicial kaleidoscope” is used in at least one reported decision. See Crosswhite v. United States, 369 F.2d 989, 992 (Ct. Cl. 1966) (“[A]ll of the circumstances must be blended together to form a judicial kaleidoscope upon which a decision may be patterned.”).

31. This section of necessity may be re-plowing a little old ground from the 2009 The Business Lawyer article, but where that is necessary this author is hopeful that the furrows are deeper and straighter. Moreover, this particular area of the law “is a complex object of study, and light dawns only gradually over the whole.” Gregory Klass, Meaning, Purpose, and Cause in the Law of Deception, 100 GEO. L.J. 449, 452 (2012).

32. See SHERIDAN, supra note 26, at 5; Ella, supra note 24, at 18 (“[F]raud has ancient roots as the independent tort of deceit . . . .”); Charles E. Fowler, Jr., The Economic Loss Rule and Its Application to the Tort of Negligent Misrepresentation in Texas, 18 TEX. WESLEYAN L. REV. 893, 918 (2012) (“The modern actions for fraud and negligent misrepresentation ‘have a common ancestor in the old writ of deceit.’”). There really never was a common law tort called “fraud.” See Armitage v. Nurse, [1997] EWCA 1279, [1998] Ch. 241, 250 (Eng.) (“The common law knows no generalised tort of fraud.”).

33. West & Lewis, supra note 4, at 1013.

34. See O. W. HOLMES, JR., THE COMMON LAW 130 (Boston, Little, Brown & Co. 1881).

35. (1889) 14 A.C. 337, 376.

36. See, e.g., Tex. Tunneling Co. v. City of Chattanooga, Tenn., 329 F.2d 402 (6th Cir. 1964); Hindman v. First Nat’l Bank, 112 F. 931 (6th Cir. 1902); Watson v. Jones, 25 So. 678 (Fla. 1899); Donnelly v. Balt. Trust & Guar. Co., 61 A. 301 (Md. 1905); Nash v. Minn. Title Ins. & Trust Co., 40 N.E. 1039 (Mass. 1895); Ray Cnty. Sav. Bank v. Hutton, 123 S.W. 47 (Mo. 1909); Shackett v. Bickford, 65 A. 252 (N.H. 1906); Kountze v. Kennedy, 41 N.E. 414 (N.Y. 1895); Tarault v. Seip, 74 S.E. 3 (N.C. 1912); Tartera v. Palumbo, 453 S.W.2d 780 (Tenn. 1970); Shwab v. Walters, 251 S.W. 42 (Tenn. 1923). However, some U.S. courts diluted Derry’s scienter requirement or simply deferred to prior existing American law with lesser scienter requirements. See infra note 41.

37. Derry, 14 A.C. at 374.

38. Id.

39. RESTATEMENT (SECOND) OF TORTS § 526 (1977).

40. Id. § 526 cmt. e.

41. JAY M. FEINMAN, PROFESSIONAL LIABILITY TO THIRD PARTIES 63 (2000) (“Derry v. Peek was not accepted as wholeheartedly in the United States as it was in the Commonwealth, however; some American courts rejected it outright, while others significantly watered down the requirement of intent to allow actions in which there was little more than negligence.”); see also Robert W. Miller, Scienter in Deceit and Estoppel, 6 IND. L.J. 152, 158 (1930); Everett B. Morris, Liability for Innocent Misrepresentation, 64 U.S. L. REV. 121, 126 (1930); see generally Fowler V. Harper & Mary Coate McNeely, A Synthesis of the Law of Misrepresentation, 22 MINN. L. REV. 939 (1938).

42. See West & Lewis, supra note 4, at 1007, 1011–12; see also Francis H. Bohlen, Misrepresentation as Deceit, Negligence, or Warranty, 42 HARV. L. REV. 733, 734–35 (1929); Miller, supra note 41, at 156–58; Glenn D. West & Kim M. Shah, Debunking the Myth of the Sandbagging Buyer: When Sellers Ask Buyers to Agree to Anti-Sandbagging Clauses, Who Is Sandbagging Whom?, M&A LAW. (Thompson/ West, New York, N.Y.), Jan. 2007, at 3.

43. See Bohlen, supra note 42, at 733–34.

44. Id. at 744 (quoting Chatham Furnace Co. v. Moffatt, 18 N.E. 168, 169 (Mass. 1888)).

45. Swanson v. Domning, 86 N.W.2d 716, 720 (Minn. 1957).

46. Id.

47. This author does not necessarily intend to reopen the debate about whether there is a difference between representations and warranties in the United States, having previously expressed a preference for replacing the entire concept of representations and warranties with the concept of “indemnifiable matters.” See West & Lewis, supra note 4, at 1037 n.233. But a recent English case suggests that this debate could be reopened. See Sycamore Bidco Ltd. v. Breslin, [2012] EWHC (Ch) 3443, [203], [210]–[211] (Eng.) (holding that contractual warranties clearly designated as such and made part of the negotiated contract were “‘warranties’ only, and not ‘representations,’” and were therefore subject only to the limited contractual remedies set forth in the written agreement, not rescission); see also Neil Mirchandani & Rebecca Huntsman, Can an Express Warranty Also Be a Representation?, HOGAN LOVELLS (Jan. 2013), http://goo.gl/LTfbBj (noting that the court found that “[i]t would be ‘a strange and uncommercial state of affairs’ for a party to negotiate detailed limitations on liability in relation to Warranties, but for such limitations not to apply to the same statements, were they to be construed as representations”); Claude Serfilippi, A New York Lawyer in London: Representations and Warranties in Acquisition Agreements—What’s the Big Deal?, CORP. PRAC. NEWSWIRE (Chadbourne & Parke LLP, New York, N.Y.), Dec. 2012, at 1, 2, available at http://goo.gl/dOHzsK(“What most U.S. lawyers might not appreciate, however, is that the distinction in remedies that forms the basis for the solicitor’s objection to include both representations and warranties in an acquisition agreement, is also present under the laws of most U.S. states. Yet, U.S. lawyers routinely include both representations and warranties in an acquisition agreement.”). A nod to Tina Stark and apologies to Ken Adams, who was “gnawing [his] hind leg” the last time this author noted an English case making this distinction. See Ken Adams, Glenn West Reopens theRepresents and Warrants” Can of Worms, ADAMS ON CONTRACT DRAFTING (Dec. 30, 2009), http://www.adamsdrafting.com/glenn-west-reopens-can-of-worms/. See generally West & Lewis, supra note 4, at 1008 n.48 (noting the dispute as to the difference, vel non, between representations and warranties in the United States).

48. HOLMES, supra note 34, at 134–35.

49. Nielsen v. Adams, 388 N.W.2d 840, 846 (Neb. 1986); see also Page Keeton, Fraud: The Necessity for an Intent to Deceive, 5 UCLA L. REV. 583, 584 (1958). In apparent recognition of this fact, some practitioners add language to the fraud carve-out to make a “specific intent to deceive” a required element of the fraud being carved out. See, e.g., Stock Purchase Agreement, dated March 2, 2014, by and between CNO Financial Group, Inc. and Wilton Reassurance Company, PRAC. L. CO. § 7.7, at 61 (Mar. 2, 2014), http://us.practicallaw.com/9-559-8848 (“[N]othing contained in this Article VII (Indemnification) or in Article VIII (Taxes) shall alter or limit the rights and remedies of the parties to pursue a common law claim for fraud with specific intent to deceive.”).

50. West & Lewis, supra note 4, at 1034; see also ABRY Partners V, L.P. v. F & W Acquisition LLC, 891 A.2d 1032, 1062 (Del. Ch. 2006) (“Permitting a party to sue for relief that it has contractually promised not to pursue creates the possibility that [sellers] will face erroneous liability (when judges or juries make mistakes) . . . .”).

51. Jewish Ctr. of Sussex Cnty. v. Whale, 432 A.2d 521, 524 (N.J. 1981) (citations omitted). And, because the remedy for equitable fraud is rescission not damages, the misrepresentation upon which a claim of equitable fraud is based need not even be “material.” See Emily Sherwin, Nonmaterial Misrepresentation: Damages, Rescission, and the Possibility of Efficient Fraud, 36 LOY. L.A. L. REV. 1017, 1018–19 (2003).

52. Edmund Finnane, Rescission (Wentworth Selborne Chambers, Sydney, N.S.W., Austl.), Mar. 13, 2008, at 6–7, available at http://www.13wentworthselbornechambers.com.au/cle/rescission.pdf;West & Lewis, supra note 4, at 1011.

53. Enright v. Lubow, 493 A.2d 1288, 1296 (N.J. Super. Ct. App. Div. 1985).

54. See, e.g., Eurofins Panlabs, Inc. v. Ricerca Biosciences, LLC, C.A. No. 8431-VCN, 2014 WL 2457515 (Del. Ch. May 30, 2014); Osram Sylvania, Inc. v. Townsend Ventures, LLC, C.A. No. 8123-VCP, 2013 WL 6199554 (Del. Ch. Nov. 19, 2013); Grzybowski v. Tracy, No. 3888-VCG, 2013 WL 4053515 (Del. Ch. Aug. 9, 2013); In re Wayport, Inc. Litig., 76 A.3d 296 (Del. Ch. 2013).

55. Eurofins, 2014 WL 2457515, at *18; Osram Sylvania, 2013 WL 6199554, at *15; Grzybowski, 2013 WL 4053515, at *6.

56. 891 A.2d 1032 (Del. Ch. 2006); see West & Lewis, supra note 4, at 999–1002 (discussing the ABRY decision).

57. ABRY, 891 A.2d at 1064; West & Lewis, supra note 4, at 1002.

58. ABRY, 891 A.2d at 1063–64; West & Lewis, supra note 4, at 1000–01.

59. West & Lewis, supra note 4, at 1016 n.103 (noting that both “innocent or negligent misrepresentations” suffice under Delaware law to constitute “equitable fraud”).

60. Curtis Bridgeman & Karen Sandrick, Bullshit Promises, 76 TENN. L. REV. 379, 383 (2009) (“Promissory fraud is currently recognized in some form or other in all fifty states and the District of Co-lumbia.”). However, New York’s “recognition” of promissory fraud as a cause of action independent of the breach of contract itself is less than clear. See Matthew D. Ingber & Christopher J. Houpt, Navigating the Shadowy Borderland Between Contract and Tort, N.Y. L.J., Sept. 13, 2010, at 1, 3, available at http://goo.gl/s9bZe2 (noting that promissory fraud claims are governed by “a very long and very puzzling line of New York cases. On at least four occasions, New York’s Court of Appeals has expressly held that ‘a contractual promise made with the undisclosed intention not to perform it constitutes fraud.’ At the same time, however, there are numerous Appellate Division cases that state precisely the opposite rule. Notably, federal courts in New York usually follow the Appellate Division rule, not that of the Court of Appeals, and do not recognize promissory fraud.”); see also infra note 144. The differing approaches to these issues by the Appellate Division and the Court of Appeals “has been explained by the fact that there are fact-specific exceptions to the general principle [that promissory fraud is not a recognized cause of action in New York] and that the New York Court of Appeals has recognized four factual circumstances where the exception applies.” Tobin v. Gluck, Nos. 07-CV-1605 (MKB), 11-CV-3985 (MKB), 2014 WL 1310347, at *9 (E.D.N.Y. Mar. 28, 2014).

61. Oliver Wendell Holmes, Jr., The Path of the Law, 10 HARV. L. REV. 457, 462 (1897), quoted in E.I. DuPont de Nemours & Co. v. Pressman, 679 A.2d 436, 445 n.18 (Del. 1996). It has been noted, however, that Oliver Wendell Holmes, Jr., acting in his capacity as a judge, rather than an academic, did in fact support the concept of promissory fraud. See IAN AYRES & GREGORY KLASS, INSINCERE PROMISES: THE LAW OF MISREPRESENTED INTENT 5 (Yale Univ. Press 2005).

62. E. Allan Farnsworth, Legal Remedies for Breach of Contract, 70 COLUM. L. REV. 1145, 1147 (1970), quoted in E.I. DuPont de Nemours, 679 A.2d at 445 n.18.

63. See Ian Ayres & Gregory Klass, New Rules for Promissory Fraud, 48 ARIZ. L. REV. 957, 962 (2006).

64. See, e.g., Haase v. Glazner, 62 S.W.3d 795, 798 (Tex. 2001) (“Fraudulent inducement, however, is a particular species of fraud that arises only in the context of a contract and requires the existence of a contract as part of its proof.”).

65. See generally Justin Sweet, Promissory Fraud and the Parol Evidence Rule, 49 CALIF. L. REV. 877 (1961) (examining the applicability of the parol evidence rule to a claim of promissory fraud); Eric A. Posner, Essay, The Parol Evidence Rule, the Plain Meaning Rule, and the Principles of Contractual Interpretation, 146 U. PA. L. REV. 533 (1998) (examining the rules of contractual interpretation, particularly the parol evidence rule).

66. See Sweet, supra note 65, at 900.

67. West & Lewis, supra note 4, at 1014.

68. AYRES & KLASS, supra note 61, at 55.

69. See, e.g., H. Enters. Int’l v. Gen. Elec. Capital Corp., 833 F. Supp. 1405, 1422 (D. Minn. 1993) (allowing a plaintiff-borrower’s claim for promissory fraud to be submitted to the jury where evidence existed that the defendant-lender did not intend to perform based on its interpretation of an ambiguous loan provision), discussed in AYRES & KLASS, supra note 61, at 55.

70. Harrison v. Gardner, (1817) 56 Eng. Rep. 308, 2 Madd. 198 (Eng.), discussed in SHERIDAN, supra note 26, at 45.

71. A term borrowed from the title of the book by Ayres and Klass.

72. See, e.g., AYRES & KLASS supra note 61, at 53–54; Bridgeman & Sandrick, supra note 60, at 387– 94; see also Oren Bar-Gill & Kevin Davis, Empty Promises, 84 S. CAL. L. REV. 1 (2010).

73. Earl of Chesterfield v. Janssen, (1751) 28 Eng. Rep. 82, 101, (1750) 2 Ves. Sen. 125, 157 (Eng.).

74. Id. at 100.

75. 273 S.W.3d 905 (Tex. App. 2008); see also Glenn D. West & Stacie L. Cargill, Corporations, 62 SMU L. REV. 1057, 1066–73 (2009) (criticizing the Dick’s case).

76. Dick’s, 273 S.W.3d at 908.

77. TEX. BUS. ORGS. CODE ANN. § 21.223(b) (West, Westlaw through Third Called Sess. of the 83d Legis.).

78. Dick’s, 273 S.W.3d at 911; West & Cargill, supra note 75, at 1066, 1069.

79. Dick’s, 273 S.W.3d at 911.

80. Id. at 911–12; West & Cargill, supra note 75, at 1067, 1069. There was also a claim that the tenant had breached a subleasing prohibition that obligated the tenant to pay a fee for any subleasing. See id. at 1069 n.72.

81. Dick’s, 273 S.W.3d at 909–10.

82. Id. at 909.

83. Id. at 912–13; West & Cargill, supra note 75, at 1070.

84. See generally Russell Korobkin, The Borat Problem in Negotiation: Fraud, Assent, and the Behavioral Law and Economics of Standard Form Contracts, 101 CALIF. L. REV. 51 (2013); West & Lewis, supra note 4, at 1034.

85. See West & Lewis, supra note 4, at 1034.

86. See, e.g., Kratovil & Meister, supra note 9, at 3.

87. [2009] EWCA (Civ) 1363 (Eng.).

88. Id. at [29].

89. Id. at [15], [29]; see Jessica Schuehle-Lewis, Crispin Daly & Mark Griffiths, Cavell USA Inc. and Another v. Seaton Insurance Company and Another: Interpretation of the TermFraud” Within an Agreement by the Court of Appeal, 7 INTL CORP. RESCUE 419 (2010), available at http://www.chasecambria.com/site/journal/icr.php?vol=8&issue=6.

90. 984 A.2d 126 (Del. Ch. 2009).

91. Id. at 141.

92. C.A. Nos. 7975-VCP, N12C-11-053-DFP [CCLD], 2013 WL 2249655 (Del. Ch. May 17, 2013).

93. Id. at *7 n.29.

94. Id. Notwithstanding the broad language in the provision, the court declined to consider whether it precluded the buyer’s fraud claim because the defendant-seller failed to plead the applicability of the disclaimer of reliance clause during briefing on the motion to dismiss. Id. at *7. Hence the court deemed the argument waived for the pending motion to dismiss and simply noted the argument in a footnote. Id. at *7 n.29.

95. Id. at *7 n.29. This author believes that a generalized fraud carve-out from an exclusive remedy provision should not, in fact, lessen the value and effect of a properly drafted disclaimer of reliance provision. If the parties have permitted fraud claims notwithstanding the exclusive remedy provision, the disclaimer of reliance should still have its intended effect of negating the element of reliance with respect to those representations as to which reliance was disclaimed. But the Anvil dictum raises some concern.

96. C.A. No. 8075-VCG, 2013 WL 6186326 (Del. Ch. Nov. 27, 2013).

97. Id. at *17; see also Wyle, Inc. v. ITT Corp., No. 653465/2011, 2013 WL 5754086, at *5, *6 (N.Y. Sup. Ct. Oct. 21, 2013) (permitting a buyer to assert fraud claims based on the express contractual representations and warranties even though those same claims were not sustainable under the contract because the time period for asserting such claims had expired).

98. ABRY Partners V, L.P. v. F & W Acquisition LLC, 891 A.2d 1032, 1064 (Del. Ch. 2006).

99. Id.

100. Leo E. Strine, Jr. is now the Chief Justice of the Delaware Supreme Court.

101. ABRY, 891 A.2d at 1063–64; West & Lewis, supra note 4, at 1002.

102. ABRY, 891 A.2d at 1064; West & Lewis, supra note 4, at 1001–02.

103. ABRY, 891 A.2d at 1063; West & Lewis, supra note 4, at 1001–02; see also DDJ Mgmt., LLC v. Rhone Grp. L.L.C., 931 N.E.2d 87 (N.Y. 2010); Glenn D. West & Natalie A. Smeltzer, Protecting the Integrity of the Entity-Specific Contract: TheNo Recourse Against Others” Clause—Missing or Ineffective Boilerplate?, 67 BUS. LAW. 39, 53–54 (2011) (discussing DDJ).

104. ABRY, 891 A.2d at 1063; West & Lewis, supra note 4, at 1001–02. In the English case of HIH Casualty & General Insurance Ltd. v. Chase Manhattan Bank, [2003] UKHL 6, [2003] 1 All E.R. 349 (appeal taken from Eng.), Lord Bingham suggested that the same distinction may apply in England. According to Lord Bingham, while one could not disclaim liability for one’s own fraud, one could disclaim liability for the fraud of one’s agents as long as such disclaimer was done in the clearest of language in the contract. Id. at [16]; see also Kevin Davis, Licensing Lies: Merger Clauses, the Parol Evidence Rule and Pre-Contractual Misrepresentations, 33 VAL. U. L. REV. 485, 508 (1999) (“From a moral perspective it is critical to distinguish between the primary responsibility of an agent who has made a false or negligent misrepresentation and the vicarious responsibility of the en-terprise on whose behalf he acted.”); West & Lewis, supra note 4, at 1022 n.149 (noting the distinction in the treatment of contract clauses disclaiming liability for one’s own fraud and those clauses that disclaim liability for an agent’s fraud).

105. E.g., Citibank, N.A. v. Nyland (CF8) Ltd., 878 F.2d 620, 624 (2d Cir. 1989) (finding that it is an “established rule that a principal is liable to third parties for the acts of an agent operating within the scope of his real or apparent authority”); Johnson v. Schultz, 691 S.E.2d 701, 704 (N.C. 2010) (finding a principal liable for damages “resulting from the fraud of his agent committed during the existence of the agency and within the scope of the agent’s actual or apparent authority from the principal”); see, e.g., Fidelity & Guar. Ins. Underwriters, Inc. v. Jasam Realty Corp., 540 F.3d 133, 140 (2d Cir. 2008) (finding it is a “well-established principle that an agent’s frauds or misrepresentations are imputed to the principal if made within the scope of the agent’s authority”); see also Kolbe & Kolbe Millwork Co. v. Manson Ins. Agency, Inc., 983 F. Supp. 2d 1035 (W.D. Wis. 2013); see generally Steven N. Bulloch, Fraud Liability Under Agency Principles: A New Approach, 27 WM. & MARY L. REV. 301 (1986); Paula J. Dalley, A Theory of Agency Law, 72 U. PITT. L. REV. 495 (2011); Deborah A. DeMott, When Is a Principal Charged with an Agent’s Knowledge?, 13 DUKE J. COMP. & INTL L. 291 (2003); Note, Liability of Principal for the Unauthorized Fraud of His Agent, 3 NEWARK L. REV. 75 (1938); James C. Porter, Liability of Principal for Fraud of Agent Committed for the Agent’s Benefit, 8 WASH. U. L. REV. 180 (1923).

106. West & Lewis, supra note 4, at 1017; Glenn D. West, Protecting the Deal Professional from Personal Liability for Contract-Related Claims, PRIVATE EQUITY ALERT (Weil, Gotshal & Manges, LLP, New York, N.Y.), Mar. 2006, at 5–7, available at http://goo.gl/nQzQGS; see, e.g., Miller v. Keyser, 90 S.W.3d 712, 717 (Tex. 2002) (noting the “longstanding rule that a corporate agent is personally liable for his own fraudulent or tortious acts”); see also Jonathan Bellamy, Commercial Fraud: Civil Liability (39 Essex Street, London, Eng., U.K.), July 2008, at 7, available at http://goo.gl/HQbqKS (“No one can escape liability for his fraud by saying ‘I wish to make it clear that I am committing this fraud on behalf of someone else and I am not to be personally liable.’” (quoting Standard Chartered Bank v. Pak. Nat’l Shipping Corp., [2002] UKHL 43, [22], [2003] 1 A.C. 959 (on appeal from Eng.))).

107. See West & Smeltzer, supra note 103, at 41–44 (discussing the history of limited liability entities).

108. See Yeary v. State, 711 S.E.2d 694, 697 (Ga. 2011); In re Merrill Lynch Trust Co. FSB, 235 S.W.3d 185, 189 (Tex. 2007); see also Standard Oil Co. of Tex. v. United States, 307 F.2d 120, 127 (5th Cir. 1962) (“[W]hile it was perhaps long in coming, it is now almost ancient law that despite these conceptual, logical difficulties, a corporation acting through human agents has the legal capacity to do wrong as well as right.”).

109. See Diederich v. Wis. Wood Prods., Inc., 19 N.W.2d 268, 270–71 (Wis. 1945).

110. See Annotation, Liability of Corporation for Fraud of Officer for His Own Benefit but Within His Apparent Authority, 45 A.L.R. 615 (1926); Porter, supra note 105, at 188–89.

111. In the case of the management of a company being sold by selling shareholders, it is important to note that the management of the company being sold are agents of that company, not of the selling stockholders. But avoiding these arguments being made is always better if possible.

112. See Glenn D. West & Sara G. Duran, Reassessing the “Consequences” of Consequential Damage Waivers in Acquisition Agreements, 63 BUS. LAW. 777, 780 n.10, 805, 807 (2008). This is not necessarily because deal lawyers do not understand that they are doing this; many times deal dynamics simply do not permit the correction of these ambiguities. See supra note 11. But there are other less appealing theories explaining the “herd” mentality of many within the transactional bar, as well as the resulting tendency of many transactional lawyers to become document processors rather than contract draftspersons. See MITU GULATI & ROBERT E. SCOTT, THE THREE AND A HALF MINUTE TRANSACTION: BOILERPLATE AND THE LIMITS OF CONTRACT DESIGN 39–40, 93–96, 149–50 (2013).

113. See infra notes 123–25 and accompanying text.

114. 1977, c. 50, § 8 (U.K.).

115. See Abbie Goldstone, Effective Exclusion Clauses: Ensuring They Work—Excluding and Limiting Liability, MONDAQ (Sept. 14, 2009), http://goo.gl/MdLjBk.

116. [1996] 2 All E.R. 575 (Ch.) (Eng.).

117. Id. at 598.

118. Id.

119. Id.

120. Id.

121. See Practice Note, Contracts: Entire Agreement Clauses, PRAC. L. CO., http://goo.gl/AYbOE3(last updated July 7, 2014); Goldstone, supra note 115; Entire Agreement Clauses: Ensure Careful Drafting, LEWIS SILKIN (May 6, 2011), http://goo.gl/HZjZ5r; JOHN CARTWRIGHT, MISREPRESENTATION, MISTAKE AND NON-DISCLOSURE 491–92 (3d ed. 2012).

122. See HIH Cas. & Gen. Ins. Ltd. v. Chase Manhattan Bank, [2003] UKHL 6, [16] (appeal taken from Eng.); Foodco UK LLP v. Henry Boots Devs. Ltd., [2010] EWHC (Ch) 358, [166]–[167] (Eng.); Matheson, Pre-contract Misrepresentations: AreEntire Agreement” Clauses Effective? LEXOLOGY (Dec. 8, 2010), http://goo.gl/Ezfdcb.

123. See, e.g., Practice Note, Contracts: Entire Agreement Clauses, PRAC. L. CO., http://goo.gl/oWJrz7(last updated July 7, 2014) (“However, by the time HIH Casualty was heard, the habit of inserting an express carve-out for fraud and fraudulent misrepresentation had taken hold and entire agreement clauses now normally contain one. We suggest the clause is omitted.”).

124. See, e.g., Christopher Luck, Practice Note, Asset Purchase Agreement: Commentary, PRAC. L. CO., http://goo.gl/guKm9T (last updated July 7, 2014) (“Nonetheless, it remains prudent for an entire agreement clause . . . to be drafted on the basis that liability for fraud is not excluded.”).

125. See CARTWRIGHT, supra note 121, at 493 (discussing the use of fraud carve-outs in England and noting that “[t]he precise scope of such a clause depends on the language used, but if it refers generally to ‘fraud’ it is unlikely to leave intact only claims in the tort of deceit, but may well also allow other claims where fraud has been established, such as rescission of the contract on the basis of a fraudulent misrepresentation, or claims in equity for a party’s dishonest abuse of his fiduciary position”).

126. But see CAL. CIV. CODE § 1668 (West, Westlaw current with urgency legislation through Ch. 25, also including Chs. 27, 39, 41, and 47 of 2014 Reg. Sess., Res. Ch. 1 of 2013–2014 2d Exec. Sess., and all propositions on the 6/3/2014 ballot).

127. West & Lewis, supra note 4, at 1024–25; Chu & Pearlman, supra note 6.

128. See Gregory V. Gooding, Yes, Virginia, You Really Can Waive Fraud Claims, PRIVATE EQUITY REP. (Debevoise & Plimpton LLP, New York, N.Y.), Spring 2012, at 17, available at http://goo.gl/7AGXGB.

129. See West & Lewis, supra note 4, at 1023–28. But this is not true in all states. See id. at 1024– 25; Chu & Pearlman, supra note 6.

130. Avery & Perricone, supra note 6, at 2.

131. Id.

132. Id. at 2.

133. Id.

134. Id.

135. Id. at 3.

136. Id. at 4.

137. Id. at 3.

138. Sycamore Bidco Ltd. v. Breslin, [2012] EWHC (Ch) 3443, [203], [209]–[211] (Eng.).

139. See supra notes 57–58 and accompanying text.

140. Serfilippi, supra note 47, at 1; see supra note 47 for a discussion of the need to potentially reopen the debate as to whether U.S. lawyers should reconsider whether there is in fact a difference in the United States between only “warranting” and “representing and warranting” certain information regarding a business being purchased by a buyer. Without a representation having been made at all, a common law fraud claim would appear to lack an essential element of the cause of action. But recognizing the difficulties of changing the existing market practice of including both representations and warranties in U.S. acquisition agreements, the 2009 The Business Lawyer article attacked this issue by suggesting the inclusion of a provision to make clear that the representations and warranties are not actually intended to assert truth, but only to provide risk allocation. See West & Lewis, supra note 4, at 1037; see also Ken Adams, My Exchange with Glenn West on UsingStates” Instead ofRepresents and Warrants,” ADAMS ON CONTRACT DRAFTING (June 6, 2012), http://www.adamsdrafting.com/my-exchange-with-glenn-west-on-using-states-instead-of-r-and-w/.

141. Serfilippi, supra note 47.

142. Id. at 3; see also Jonathan B. Stone, Differences Between English and US M&A Risk Allocation, LAW360 (Mar. 6, 2014, 3:38 PM), http://goo.gl/1B5Xs8 (“Most sellers under English law share purchase agreements will intentionally refrain from using the term ‘representation’ to limit the buyer’s ability to bring tortious, rather than contractual, claims, in particular, to rescind the contract. New York law generally does not recognize such a distinction and, in any event, most New York law-governed sale and purchase agreements will expressly exclude tortious remedies.”).

143. See Serfilippi, supra note 47, at 3; Stone, supra note 142.

144. See Serfilippi, supra note 47, at 4. Still another practice note suggests that New York is more like England than Delaware when it comes to premising fraud claims on contractually bargained-for representations and warranties rather than extra-contractual representations. See Daniel E. Wolf & Matthew Solum, Delaware vs. New York Governing Law—Six of One, Half Dozen of Other?, KIRKLAND M&A UPDATE (Kirkland & Ellis LLP, New York, N.Y.), Dec. 17, 2013, at 2, available at http://www.kirkland.com/siteFiles/Publications/MAUpdate_121713.pdf (“There are cases in New York, however, that suggest that fraud claims can only be based on conduct and statements outside of the contract, and not on contractual representations. Therefore, even with the fraud exception, a buyer’s recovery may be limited by the contractual cap even when the contractual representation was knowingly false (i.e., fraudulent).”). This author believes that the New York cases on this subject are confusing at best and suggest a failure at times to distinguish between the various types of fraud claims. See West & Lewis, supra note 4, at 1014 n.97. While it is true that there are New York cases that state that a fraud claim must be premised on misrepresentations that are “collateral or extraneous to the contract,” Bridgestone/Firestone, Inc. v. Recovery Credit Servs., Inc., 98 F.3d 13, 20 (2d Cir. 1996), this requirement has been interpreted by some cases to simply mean that New York does not recognize a claim based on mere promissory fraud. See, e.g., Merrill Lynch & Co. v. Allegheny Energy, Inc., 500 F.3d 171, 184 (2d Cir. 2007) (“New York distinguishes between a promissory statement of what will be done in the future that gives rise only to a breach of contract cause of action and a misrepresentation of a present fact that gives rise to a separate cause of action for fraudulent inducement. . . . That the alleged misrepresentations would represent, if proven, a breach of the contractual warranties as well does not alter the result. A plaintiff may elect to sue in fraud on the basis of misrepresentations that breach express warranties. Such cause of action enjoys a longstanding pedigree in New York.”); Koch Indus., Inc. v. Aktiengesellschaft, 727 F. Supp. 2d 199, 214 (S.D.N.Y. 2010) (“[U]nder New York law, alleged misrepresentations are collateral or extraneous to the contract if they ‘involve misstatements and omissions of present facts,’ rather than ‘contractual promises regarding prospective performance.’”). Still others suggest that you in fact cannot premise a fraud claim simply based on the warranties set forth in the contract unless you can allege that the warranties merely restate previous representations made outside the contract. See, e.g., MBIA Ins. Corp. v. Credit Suisse Sec. (USA) LLC, 927 N.Y.S.2d 517, 531 (Sup. Ct. 2011) (“Nonetheless, to the extent that MBIA alleges that it relied on contractual representations and warranties in the Insurance Agreement and PSA, the fraud claim duplicates the breach of contract claims and must be dismissed. To sustain a claim for fraudulently inducing a party to contract, the plaintiff must allege a representation that is collateral to the contract, not simply a breach of a contractual warranty, and damages that are not recoverable in an action for breach of contract.”); Gotham Boxing, Inc. v. Finkel, No. 601479-2007, 2008 WL 104155, at *10 (N.Y. Sup. Ct. Jan. 8, 2008) (“To be sure, the distinction is a fine one. It seems to turn on whether the complaint alleges a particular statement, omission, or other conduct by the defendant, in addition to the text or statements that form the basis of the alleged contract. . . . [I]t does not seem to matter that the alleged fraudulent representation is virtually identical to the promise contained in the contract as long as it is made at a different time and place.”). But see First Bank of Ams. v. Motor Car Funding, Inc., 690 N.Y.S.2d 17, 21 (App. Div. 1999) (“A warranty is not a promise of performance, but a statement of present fact. Accordingly, a fraud claim can be based on a breach of contractual warranties notwithstanding the existence of a breach of contract claim.”). Re-conciling these cases is difficult and appears to constitute an area that would require an article all of its own. See Leo K. Barnes, Jr., Simultaneously Viable Causes of Action for Breach of Contract and Fraud, SUFFOLK LAW. (Suffolk Cnty. Bar Ass’n, Suffolk, N.Y.), Mar. 2009, at 8, 27, available at http://scba.org/suffolk_lawyer/tsl309.pdf (discussing many of these cases).

145. Avery & Perricone, supra note 6, at 3.

146. Purchase and Sale Agreement, dated November 22, 2013, among Cook Inlet Energy, LLC and Armstrong Cook Inlet, LLC, GMT Exploration Company, LLC, Dale Resources Alaska, LLC, Jonah Gas Company, LLC, and Nerd Gas Company LLC, PRAC. L. CO. (Nov. 22, 2013), http://us.practicallaw.com/8-550-8947.

147. Id. § 11.3, at 44.

148. Id. Still another approach is to mitigate the risk of fraud claims being based on any form of scienter less than actual dishonesty by excluding fraud based on any form of negligence. See, e.g., Membership Interest Purchase Agreement, dated May 1, 2014, by and among William C. Cocke, Jr., et al., as Sellers, J. Cody Bates as a Sable II Member, and Ferrellgas, L.P., as Purchaser, PRAC. L. CO. annex A, at 43 (May 1, 2014), http://us.practicallaw.com/8-567-5106 (“‘Fraud’ means actual fraud and does not include constructive fraud or negligent misrepresentation or omission.”); Agreement and Plan of Merger, dated May 27, 2014, by and among The Spectranetics Corporation, SAA Merger Sub, Inc., Angioscore Inc., and the Securityholders’ Representative, PRAC. L. CO. § 8.1(e)(ii), at 65 (May 27, 2014), http://us.practicallaw.com/4-570-1145 (“For purposes of this Article VIII, references to the term ‘fraud’ do not include negligent misrepresentation.”).

149. The term “willful” is somewhat ambiguous itself. See Johnson & Johnson v. Guidant Corp., 525 F. Supp. 2d 336, 349–53 (S.D.N.Y. 2007). Expressing frustration with “willful’s” ambiguous definition, distinguished jurist Judge Learned Hand stated: “It’s an awful word! It is one of the most troublesome words in a statute that I know. If I were to have the index purged, ‘wilful’ would lead all the rest in spite of its being at the end of the alphabet.” Id. at 349 n.9; see also Don Bivens, Comments on Proposed Civil Rule Amendments, REGULATIONS.GOV (Feb. 3, 2014), http://goo.gl/TGH3hC.Another approach is to define fraud as only including intentional and knowing misrepresentations by a person. See, e.g., Membership Interest Purchase Agreement, dated June 10, 2014, by and among Stamps.com Inc., Auctane LLC and the Members of Auctane LLC, PRAC. L. CO. §§ 1.1(nn), 7.2(g), at 5, 52 (June 10, 2014), http://us.practicallaw.com/4-572-5189.

150. Asset Purchase Agreement, dated January 23, 2014, by and among Florida Rock Industries, Inc., Florida Cement, Inc., Argos Cement LLC, Argos Ready Mix LLC, and, solely for purposes of Section 12.18, Vulcan Materials Company and Cementos Argos S.A., PRAC. L. CO. (Jan. 23, 2014), http://us.practicallaw.com/7-555-7066.

151. Id. § 8.6, at 55; see also Stock Purchase Agreement, dated April 5, 2014, by and among The Laclede Group, Inc., Energen Corp., and Alabama Gas Corp., PRAC. L. CO. §§ 9.06(a)(v), 9.07(a)(v), at 54, 56 (Apr. 5, 2014), http://us.practicallaw.com/1-565-5885 (providing a fraud carve-out “with respect to circumstances in which Seller is finally determined by a court of competent jurisdiction to have willfully and knowingly committed fraud against Purchaser with specific intent to deceive and mislead Purchaser regarding the representations and warranties expressly set forth in Article II and Article III of this Agreement”); Agreement and Plan of Merger, dated May 9, 2014, by and among Akorn, Inc., Akorn Enters. II, Inc., VPI Holdings Corp. and Tailwind Mgmt. LP, PRAC. L. CO. § 9.13, at 74–75 (May 9, 2014), http://us.practicallaw.com/0-568-3228 (limiting the fraud carve-out to “intentional fraud with respect to any representation and warranty of the Company set forth in Article IV,” capping the liability of any shareholder for such intentional fraud to the actual proceeds received from the transaction by such shareholder, and specifically waiving all other forms of fraud “whether intentional, reckless, negligent, constructive or otherwise”).

152. Stock Purchase Agreement, dated December 10, 2013, by and between LBD Acquisition Company, LLC (“Buyer”) and Fifth & Pacific Companies, Inc. (“Seller”), regarding the purchase and sale of the capital stock of Lucky Brand Dungarees, Inc., PRAC. L. CO. § 1.1(ll), at 5 (Dec. 10, 2013), http://us.practicallaw.com/4-552-0885; See Summary, Leonard Green & Partners, L.P. Acquisition of Stock of Lucky Brand Dungarees, Inc., PRAC. L. CO. (Dec. 10, 2013), http://goo.gl/exJTss.

153. An example of an agreement limiting the fraud carve-out to the individuals actually committing the fraud rather than the seller parties generally can be found in Agreement and Plan of Merger, dated February 12, 2014, by and among Victory Electronic Cigarettes Corporation, VCIG LLC, FIN Electronic Cigarette Corporation, Inc., and Elliot B. Maisel, as Representative, PRAC. L. CO. § 7.1(d)(iv), at 31 (Feb. 12, 2014), http://us.practicallaw.com/1-558-8985 (“For purposes of clarity, the commission of actual fraud by a Shareholder shall not affect the application of the limitations set forth in this Article VII to any other Shareholder that has not also committed actual fraud with respect to the claim in question . . . .”); see also Stock Purchase Agreement, dated April 28, 2014, by and among Clarcor Inc., Clean Seller, LLC, Stanadyne Holdings, Inc. and Stanadyne Corp., PRAC. L. CO. § 8.06, at 51 (Apr. 28, 2014), http://us.practicallaw.com/4-567-1025 (fraud carve-out limited to “any claim of intentional fraud asserted against the Person who committed such fraud”); Amended and Restated Agreement and Plan of Merger, dated February 2, 2014, by and among Myriad Genetics, Inc., Myriad Crescendo, Inc., Crescendo Bioscience, Inc., and MDV IX, L.P., as Representative, PRAC. L. CO. § 10.2(b)(ii), at 92 (Feb. 2, 2014), http://us.practicallaw.com/5-557-1935 (fraud carve-out limited to “Claims against a Person for such Person’s own actual fraud with intent to deceive or intentional misrepresentation”). Obviously the issue regarding whose fraud is chargeable to the sellers is even more critical if the subject matter of the fraud is not limited to the representations and warranties set forth in the agreement but also includes extra-contractual representations. After all, the company’s officers included in the knowledge parties list may well end up working for the buyer. And it may be that the knowledge party list for the purpose of the contractual remedies may need to be different than the knowledge party list for whose knowledge counts for the purpose of a defined fraud finding chargeable to the seller.

154. The suggested fraud carve-out to the model exclusive remedy provision in the 2009 The Business Lawyer article, however, did make an effort to preserve indemnification as the sole remedy even in the event of a defined fraud, but with a cap equal to the purchase price. See West & Lewis, supra note 4, at 1038. This is certainly preferable, as it maintains the contract as the source of all applicable remedies. See also Stock Purchase Agreement, dated February 6, 2014, by and among Illinois Tool Works Inc., ITW IPG Investments LLC, ITW Alpha S.A.R.L., ITW LLC & Co. KG, ITW Signode Holding GmbH, and Vault Bermuda Holding Co. Ltd., PRAC. L. CO. § 9.06, at 108 (Feb. 6, 2014), http://us.practicallaw.com/3-558-4665 (“After the Closing, other than as set forth in Section 2.06 or Section 11.09, the sole and exclusive remedy for any and all claims, Damages or other matters arising under, out of, or related to this Agreement or the transactions contemplated hereby, including in the case of fraud, shall be the rights of indemnification set forth in Section 6.05 and this Article IX only, and no Person will have any other entitlement, remedy or recourse, whether in contract, tort, strict liability, equitable remedy or otherwise, it being agreed that all of such other remedies, entitlements and recourse are expressly waived and released by the Parties to the fullest extent permitted by Law.” (emphasis added)). Another means of achieving this result is to make the defined fraud carve-out an exception to the indemnification caps, but not an exception to the exclusive remedy provision that declares contractual indemnification to be the sole and exclusive remedy for any claim (and specifically waives any right of rescission). See, e.g., Asset Sale Agreement, dated April 2, 2014, between StoneMor Operating LLC, et al., as Buyer, and S.E. Funeral Homes of Florida, LLC, et al., as Seller, PRAC. L. CO. §§ 8.3(b)(i)(B), 8.11, at 55, 61 (Apr. 2, 2014), http://us.practicallaw.com/2-565-8765.

155. See supra note 130 and accompanying text.

156. A buyer, of course, will view a deliberate and knowing failure to disclose information that is required to make the bargained-for representations and warranties in the agreement accurate at signing as fundamentally different than a breach occurring in any other circumstance. While the purchased business will be just as impacted by the non-disclosed information regardless of the state of mind of the seller, the buyer will argue that the risk allocation that resulted in the capped liability presupposes that the seller has not deliberately concealed information that was part of the bargained-for representation and warranty package, because that withheld information may have impacted the negotiation of the caps and deductibles in the first instance. Hence, a specific, rather than general, fraud carve-out should meet the justifiable expectations of both the seller and the buyer. And, it is worth mentioning that if a buyer is insisting upon any kind of fraud carve-out, the buyer should then agree to an anti-sandbagging provision in favor of the seller (limited to the same extent as the defined fraud carve-out in favor of the buyer) for the same reasons that the buyer is arguing for a fraud carve-out—i.e., the seller would not have agreed to the bargained-for representation and warranty package if it had known that the buyer knew information that the seller did not concerning certain of those representations and warranties. See West & Lewis, supra note 4, at 1032; West & Shah, supra note 42, at 3–4.

157. Holmes, supra note 61, at 469. The Holmesian “dragon” is a metaphor for the common law and the need to carefully examine and adapt its precepts to changing conditions, rather than blindly follow it for “no better reason . . . than that so it was laid down in the time of Henry IV.” Id.; see Sanford Levinson & J.M. Balkin, Law, Music, and Other Performing Arts, 139 U. PA. L. REV. 1597, 1647–51 (1991).

158. See Ker Than, Top Ten Beasts and Dragons: How Reality Made Myth, LIVE SCI. (Mar. 1, 2011, 3:30 AM), http://www.livescience.com/11320-top-10-beasts-dragons-reality-myth.html. The use of the term “shadows” is a reference to Plato’s “Allegory of the Cave.” Plato, Allegory of the Cave, in THE REPUBLIC OF PLATO 193 (Allan Bloom ed. & trans., Basic Books 1991) (c. 360 B.C.E.).

159. West & Duran, supra note 112, at 780 n.10 (citing Johnson & Johnson v. Guidant Corp., 525 F. Supp. 2d 336, 353 (S.D.N.Y. 2007)). See supra note 112 for possible explanations for this phenomenon.

160. Holmes, supra note 61, at 469. As Holmes noted, moreover, “to get [the dragon] out is only the first step. The next is either to kill him, or to tame him and make him a useful animal.” Id.

161. West & Duran, supra note 112, at 805.

162. Id. at 780.

163. Id. at 807.

 

When to Contract for Remedies

Contracting parties often include in their written agreement provisions on remedies for breach. Occasionally, these provisions simply restate what the law already provides. For example, it is not unusual for a security agreement to authorize the secured party to repossess and sell the collateral after default, rights that Article 9 expressly grants. While superfluity alone might not justify omitting or excising such a provision from a written agreement – after all, careful transactional lawyers seek comfort in the safety blanket of redundancy – there are reasons to avoid this practice. Expressly providing for remedies obviously available under the law lengthens the written agreement. More important, unless the agreement mentions every remedy that the law makes available, the clause might create a negative implication that the parties are not entitled to any of the unreferenced remedies. 

So, when should an agreement expressly provide for a remedy? When any one of the following six reasons applies. 

1. To Comply with the Law

Some transactions, particularly those involving a consumer, might require that a remedy be expressly stated to be available or for the transaction to be valid and unavoidable. If so, then obviously the agreement should expressly provide for the remedy. 

2. To Create or Expand a Remedy

Some statutory remedies are expressly made available only in limited situations, but the law allows parties to make those remedies available in other situations. U.C.C. § 9-601(a), for example, provides for certain basic remedies after default, but permits the parties to provide for additional remedies. As a result, a well-drafted security agreement will, depending on the type of collateral involved, cover the following: 

Disabling Non-equipment

U.C.C. § 9-609(a)(2) authorizes a secured party after default to disable equipment. The agreement should expand this authorization to cover non-equipment collateral, such as inventory, consumer goods, and software. Of course, the secured party should be aware that some state and federal laws might limit a secured party’s rights in this regard. For example, Connecticut requires 15-day’s advance notification of any electronic self-help, prohibits electronic self-help entirely if the secured party has reason to know it will result in grave harm to the public interest, and provides for nonwaivable consequential damages for its wrongful use. Conn. Gen. Stat. § 42a-9-609(d)

Voting Collateral

Authorize the secured party to exercise the voting rights of the debtor with respect to collateralized stock, partnership interests, and LLC interests. Bear in mind, however, it remains unclear whether such a clause will in fact work, particularly with respect to LLC membership interests. Colorado law, for example, apparently requires a secured party to enforce the security agreement and become admitted as a member before the secured party may exercise voting rights associated with a membership interest pledged as collateral. In re Crossover Fin. I, LLC, 477 B.R. 196 (Bankr. D. Colo. 2012). Moreover, concerns about liability might impel a secured party to either omit such a clause from the security agreement or refrain from exercises the authority such a clause grants. 

Entering Premises 

Expressly authorize the secured party and its representatives to enter the debtor’s property after default to repossess collateral. U.C.C. § 9-609 grants a secured party the right to take possession of collateral after default, provided it acts without a breach of the peace. One factor relevant to whether a breach of the peace occurs is the existence and extent of a trespass. While a secured party probably has a license to enter the debtor’s driveway or carport even without express authorization, entering a garage or other structure is more problematic. If the security agreement authorizes the secured party to enter the debtor’s premises, it may help avoid any trespass claim. This authorization will not, by itself, be sufficient to prevent a breach of the peace and will be irrelevant if the debtor does not own or rent the premises where the collateral is located, but might nevertheless be helpful. 

Taking Non-collateral

Authorize the secured party, when repossessing the collateral, to repossess things in or attached to the collateral. For example, a consumer who has granted a security interest in a motor vehicle will typically keep in the vehicle items of personal property that are not and by law cannot be encumbered by the security interest. While a secured party might not need express authorization to temporarily take such property during a repossession, see Terra Partners v. Rabo Agrifinance, Inc., 2010 WL 3270225 (N.D. Tex. 2010), such authorization should help insulate the secured party from conversion and trespass claims with respect to such property. 

Retaining Surplus to Cover Unliquidated and Contingent Secured Obligations 

Indicate what the secured party may do with the proceeds of a collection or disposition if there are non-monetary or contingent obligations that remain outstanding. For example, the secured party should, after satisfying the non­-contingent monetary secured obligations, be permitted to hold onto additional proceeds until such time as the debtor’s non-monetary and contingent obligations are satisfied or discharged. While a secured party has nonwaivable duties to account for surplus proceeds of collateral and to remit them to either a junior lienor or the debtor, the security agreement would presumably be relevant to determining whether a surplus exists and should be able to specify – at least with respect to the debtor – how quickly the secured party must act in remitting any surplus. 

3. To Enhance Availability of a Discretionary Remedy

Some remedies, particularly equitable remedies, are within the court’s discretion. For example, the appointment of a receiver to manage collateral before final judgment is subject to a variety of factors, the most critical of which are whether the creditor is undersecured and whether the debtor is insolvent. To enhance the likelihood that a court will appoint a receiver, the mortgage or security agreement might provide for such an appointment upon the lender’s application therefor after the borrower’s default. Courts will not be bound by such a contractual provision, but the provision may help. It may also permit such an appointment to occur on an ex parte basis. 

Similarly, an award of specific performance is subject to court discretion and will not be ordered if, among other reasons, an award of damages would be adequate or the remedy would be unfair. See Restatement (Second) of Contracts §§ 357(a), 359(1), 364(1). Because courts regularly regard equitable relief as jurisdictional and beyond the competence of private contracting parties, they are unlikely to treat a clause expressly declaring damages to be inadequate or expressly authorizing specific performance as binding or even as relevant. This certainly appears to be the approach taken by federal courts. Nevertheless, a contractual clause declaring damages in certain instances to be inadequate – such as for breach of a covenant not to compete – might enhance the prospect that a court would conclude similarly. Moreover, in some states – Delaware, for example – courts regard a clause stipulating to the existence of irreparable harm in the event of breach as binding. See Martin Marietta Materials, Inc. v. Vulcan Materials Co., 2012 WL 2783101 (Del. 2012). A clause declaring goods to be sold as “unique” or indicating that the buyer will not be able to cover quickly enough to avoid irreparable injury might also be helpful because the U.C.C. authorizes specific performance when the goods are unique or in other proper circumstances. See U.C.C. § 2-716(1). 

Another set of remedies is available only following a material breach. Under modern contract law, the contracting parties’ main promises to each other are regarded as dependent – rather than independent – covenants. As a result, one condition to a party’s duty to perform is that there be no “uncured material failure” by the other party to perform. See Restatement (Second) of Contracts § 237. In short, any breach gives rise to a claim for damages but only a material breach excuses the non-breaching party from the duty to perform. 

Unfortunately, it is not always clear what constitutes a material breach. As a result, when a dispute arises, a game of chicken may ensue. For example, a contractor renovating a home might, in violation of its agreement with the owners, leave them without running water for several days. The owners might respond by withholding the next installment payment. The contractor might then walk off the job. Who wins in the resulting lawsuit will depend on who was the first to materially breach. If the contractor’s initial breach was material, the owners were permitted to withhold payment. If not, the owners had a duty to pay. If their failure to pay was a material breach, then the contractor was justified in refusing to complete the work. If their failure to pay was not material, then the contractor’s refusal to finish was a further breach, and no doubt a material one. Needless to say, it is difficult to predict in advance how a court or jury will rule. 

To clarify the parties’ rights, the agreement might expressly provide under what circumstances a breach by one party will excuse the other. Such a clause need not – and probably should not – be exhaustive. That is, it should not purport to identify all the breaches that suspend the other party’s duty to perform, unless the drafter is confident that nothing else should so qualify. 

One caveat is in order. Some written agreements purport to do this by simply declaring a particular type of breach to be “material.” For example, one standard purchase agreement for the sale of grapes from a vineyard to a winery provides “[b]uyer’s failure to make payment within sixty (60) days of due dates constitutes material breach of this agreement.” There are at least two problems with this clause. First, outside Louisiana, the contract would be governed by U.C.C. Article 2, which does not use the phrase “material breach.” Thus, it is not clear what purpose such a declaration would serve in an agreement governed by that law. Second, payment by the buyer was the last act called for under the agreement; the seller would necessarily have shipped the grapes months before and have no duties remaining. As a result, the seller would have no performance to suspend if the buyer failed to pay, and the declaration of materiality would be meaningless. 

4. To Negate or Limit a Remedy

Contracting parties occasionally wish to make unavailable a remedy to which one or both of them would otherwise be entitled or to limit the extent or duration of a remedy that is to remain available. Common examples of this are disclaimers of consequential damages, liquidated damages clauses, limits on the time or grounds for rejecting tendered goods, clauses shortening the applicable limitations period, and terms conditioning a right to recovery on prompt notice of the claim. Secured lending on a nonrecourse basis can also be viewed as a negation of personal liability for any deficiency. Any intention to negate or limit a remedy must be stated in the parties’ agreement. 

Of course, parties must be very careful when negating remedies. If they limit one party to a single remedy, and the law makes that remedy unavailable, the party might find itself without any recourse for breach. 

5. To Set Standards

Some remedies are subject to vague standards that the parties cannot waive or disclaim but which they can help clarify. For example, Article 9 requires that every aspect of a disposition of collateral be commercially reasonable. U.C.C. § 9-610(b). The parties cannot by agreement alter this requirement, § 9-602(7), but they can set the standards for what is reasonable, as long as those standards are not themselves “manifestly” unreasonable. See §§ 1-302(b), 9-603(a). 

Accordingly, the security agreement should contain a clause on how the secured party may dispose of the collateral. Such a clause is particularly important when the parties anticipate no ready market for the collateral, such as closely-held stock. When dealing with such collateral, the agreement should, at a minimum, disclaim any obligation by the secured party to engage in a public offering of privately held securities. For collateral consisting of goods, particularly equipment, the security agreement should provide either that the secured party has no responsibility to clean, prepare, or repair the collateral before sale or limit any such duty to a specified dollar amount. Cf. § 9-610 cmt. 4. If there is a reasonable chance that the secured party will receive non­cash proceeds of a collateral disposition, the security agreement should provide standards on whether or when the secured party must apply noncash proceeds to the secured obligation. Cf. §§ 9-608(a)(4), 9-615(c). 

6. To Preserve a Remedy the Law Might Eliminate

A cautious lawyer might be concerned that the law will change to make unavailable a remedy for which the law currently provides. To such a lawyer, it is desirable to expressly provide for all remedies in every agreement. Yet consider all the assumptions underlying this rationale: (1) that the law will or might change so as to eliminate a remedy currently available, (2) the change will apply to contracts already entered into, and (3) parties will be permitted to contract around that change by agreement. This combination seems a remarkably unlikely and would probably be restricted to consumer transactions for which a legislature may wish to require that the remedy be expressly stated as a form of notice. In general, this is not a sufficient justification for expressly stating remedies that the law currently makes available.

 

Dealing with Unauthorized Online Dealers: Sales of “Genuine” Products

The growth of the Internet as an online marketplace has created not only many new opportunities for companies to sell their goods or services, but also poses many new challenges to companies seeking to protect their intellectual property rights. As many companies know far too well, online sellers (some authorized by the manufacturer; many more not authorized) now have low-cost, direct access to consumers through their own websites and through online market places such as alibaba.com, eBay, and amazon.com. This has led to a tsunami of online dealers infringing intellectual property rights. 

While many products sold by unauthorized online retailers are counterfeits, some sell products actually manufactured by and for the trademark owner. The sale by unauthorized dealers of “genuine” goods poses the greatest legal challenge to makers of well-known brands. It may or may not be a bigger business challenge, but counterfeits do not pose serious legal issues; “genuine” goods, on the other hand, are another matter. Further, the unauthorized sale of “genuine” goods is exploding on the Internet. Just look at a typical page on Amazon and hit the link to other offerings of “new” versions of the product on the Amazon Marketplace. 

Unauthorized dealers obtain the products they sell as “new” and “genuine” in a variety of ways. The dealers may purchase their goods from overseas markets where prices are lower than in the United States, then import them into the United States as “gray market” goods. They may buy the products cheaply in clearance sales or returns from authorized dealers in the United States. The goods may also have been transshipped by an authorized dealer to another for resale, in contravention of the distribution contract. The goods may simply have been stolen from the brand owner’s normal distribution channels. 

Such unauthorized dealers compete unfairly in a sense. They are essentially “free riders.” They have minimal overhead and do not invest significantly in customer service, showrooms, quality, or advertising. Nevertheless, unauthorized dealers reap the benefits of such efforts. They trade off the brand owner’s hard-earned reputation for quality and customer service. Not having the same overhead, they can undercut authorized dealers on price, driving prices down with their unfair advantage and making it difficult for authorized dealers (and ultimately the brand owner itself) to make a profit. Additionally, the product may differ in some way, such as lacking warranty protection. It is this differential in service and quality of promotion and quality inherent in a system of authorized dealerships which needs to be protected. 

Brand owners are not without legal recourse against unauthorized dealers, however. First, some simple, self-help measures need to be considered. 

Self-Help: Warranty Policy and the Unauthorized Dealer Page

As will be discussed in depth below, warranties are a key element to your armor against unauthorized dealers. Company warranties should expressly warn consumers that purchases from unauthorized dealers, even of otherwise “new” products from the company, void warranty protection. Aside from giving a benefit to customers who buy from preferred dealers, it provides an important trademark/copyright infringement weapon noted below. 

So, adopt a firm warranty policy. Next, publish it on the company website, listing authorized dealers for self-verification purposes. Examples are common with any company struggling with unauthorized dealers (see, e.g., www.monsterproducts.com/warranty/; www.klipsch.com/unauthorized; http://hoover.com/authorized-dealer/). Other steps to mark genuine products may be considered, such as covert or overt markers on the products for tracking them through the distribution chain. 

Self-Help: Take Downs of Unauthorized Dealer Offerings

eBay and similar online auction sites have takedown procedures which may be useful against unauthorized dealers. The key word here is “may.” Inspired by federal legislation called the Digital Millenium Copyright Act (DMCA), eBay has adopted an even broader means to take down postings offering infringing products beyond those infringing the owner’s copyright.           

Called the Verified Rights Owner (VeRO) program, eBay permits intellectual property owners to request the removal of listings it claims in good faith are infringing the owner’s patent, copyright, or trademark rights, through the filing of a simple form called a Notice of Claimed Infringement (see http://pages.ebay.com/help/tp/vero-rights-owner.html). Similar to procedures set up in the DMCA, the listing party is notified and has a limited time to file a counter notice to reinstate the listing. If it does so, the owner may have to file suit to enforce its rights in order to keep the listing off, but the listing party will have consented to jurisdiction in the federal court sitting in the Northern District of California. 

Outside eBay and websites with similar protections, all auction/sales online sites are subject to the DMCA, which provide similar protections for claims of copyright infringement only. 

While simple, the takedown procedures have a glaring weakness. Sophisticated, unscrupulous, unauthorized dealers simply repost the listing using a different name. Hence, the DMCA and VeRO programs are sometimes referred to as a “whack a mole” game, having little real effect.

Going to Court: Legal Weapons

If self-help measures are not adequate, using the courts may be necessary. Assuming you can identify the offender and it is subject to jurisdiction in the United States, the following approaches give you weapons to assert against unauthorized, online dealers.

Trademark Infringement

Trademark infringement is the principal weapon brand owners have in combating unauthorized dealers. Without more, however, there is nothing improper about selling genuine product by an unauthorized dealer, insofar as trademark or other law is concerned. The first sale doctrine in both trademark and copyright law bars the brand owner from controlling the downstream sales. But trademark infringement can still arise regardless of the first sale doctrine. 

The first sale doctrine provides that one who purchases a branded item generally has a right to resell that item in an unchanged state. The trademark rights of a brand owner are “exhausted” once the particular item has been sold in the market. But there is an exception to that which often applies in the context of unauthorized online dealers: the “material difference” exception.

The first sale doctrine does not protect alleged infringers who sell trademarked goods that are “materially different” from those sold by the trademark owner or its authorized dealers. A material difference from authorized goods creates confusion over the source of the product and results in loss of the trademark owner’s good will. In other words, materially different goods sold by an unauthorized seller are not considered “genuine,” because they are confusingly different. 

Courts define “material difference” broadly: it is virtually any difference that exists between the authorized goods and unauthorized goods that a consumer would likely consider relevant when purchasing the product. Even subtle differences apply. As one court put it, “it is by subtle differences that consumers are most easily confused.” 

Material differences may include differences in battery life between authorized and unauthorized batteries; differences in the variety, presentation, and composition of product; differences in the formulation, content, and blends of product; alterations to packages such as removal, grinding off, or cutting away reference numbers, SKUs, bar codes, and batch codes; differences in package shape and labels and lack of required warning labels. 

Of a non-physical nature, material differences include changes in operator manuals and service plans, and differences in available services for authorized versus unauthorized goods. Perhaps most commonly, differences in warranty protection coverage between authorized and unauthorized sales often lead to trademark infringement. 

In some jurisdictions, notably in Second Circuit law, a difference in quality control measures also constitutes trademark infringement of otherwise “genuine” goods under the owner’s mark.

Copyright Infringement 

Copyright infringement is the unauthorized copying of a work protected by a copyright registration. In the digital age, it is now simple for unauthorized dealers to blatantly copy images of products taken by the manufacturer or large blocks of text (product descriptions, specification, etc.) written by the manufacturer. Look for unauthorized copying by the dealer on their website or eBay/Amazon listing of images, block text, and logo use. Logos of the manufacturer used in a manner which falsely implies authorization may be copyright infringement and not fair use. 

Recently, the Supreme Court made a major pronouncement that mere unauthorized resale of a particular copyrighted item that is imported into the United States is not infringement. In Kirtsaeng v. John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 133 S.Ct. 1357 (2013), the Court held that the first sale doctrine applies to copies of a copyrighted work (like textbooks) which were lawfully made abroad, sold there, and then imported into the United States for resale as a “new” book. This second sale was held to be beyond the scope of copyright protection. This was a major victory for Costco, eBay, and Walmart, which regularly import gray market goods for resale in the United States. However, that does not bar copyright protection against unauthorized dealers in other respects. The unauthorized copying of images and text does not involve the question of selling the product itself; it instead involves using the copyrighted works on the product. 

Recent cases reflect that these principles play out with subtle standards of the quantity of proof required by the manufacturer to trigger copyright and trademark infringement or other liability, even when material differences may exist. See, e.g., L’Oreal USA, Inc. v. Trend Beauty, 2013 U.S. Dist. Lexis 115795 (SD NY 2013) (pretextual vs. non-pretextual standards). Even a slight difference may suffice to establish infringement, the court noted. The effect of removing the seal vector and coding that would be visible to a consumer was open to factual interpretation, however, causing denial of summary judgment.

As is obvious, expertise is needed to appreciate the scope of unauthorized dealership law. Not all jurisdictions have the same standards. Further, as noted below, the issue reaches across a variety of bodies of law and can take place in a forum quite different from federal court.

Other Theories, Other Arenas for Combat 

Customs and ITC Proceedings. Combating unauthorized dealers is possible beyond simply DMCA takedowns and federal court actions. If the offender is overseas and exports products into the United States, options exist against U.S.-based distributors. Further, working with the Customs Service and bringing an action before the International Trade Commission (ITC) are also options. Samples of the valid trademark to compare against a trademark infringer can stop goods at the border, where the difference is readily discernible. However, Customs will generally have a hard time barring “genuine,” validly marked goods that originated from the trademark owner. As for the ITC, Section 337 of the Tariff Act declares “unlawful” the importation, sale for importation, or sale after importation of any article that infringes a valid patent or registered copyright or registered trademark. For the above restrictions to apply, an industry relating to the protected articles must exist within the United States or be in the process of being established. 

Unfair Competition, False Advertising, and Other Theories. Many unauthorized online dealers use false and/or misleading statements in their online advertisements. For example, some online dealers falsely represent that they are “authorized dealers” or that they are “authorized by leading manufacturers.” Many dealers also represent that the products they sell are covered by the manufacturers’ warranty, while the truth is that many warranties are void when products are sold by unauthorized dealers. These subject the dealer to liability under both the federal Lanham Act and various state “unfair competition” statutes. 

Additionally, under certain facts one may allege the common law tort of interference with prospective business advantage or inducement to breach contract. Also, state statutes (as in New York and California) may specifically deal with gray market goods, although those two statutes are markedly different in their purpose. 

Service providers, such as eBay, may be liable for contributory infringement with proof that the provider had sufficient notice of the infringing conduct by the direct infringer. Cases brought by Louis Vuitton and Tiffany point out the need for proving clear appreciation on the service provider’s part of the specific activity in question. Generalized notice is not sufficient. 

Yet another avenue of attack is to go against one’s own authorized dealers. They may be breaching the terms of their contract with the trademark owner, in selling new product out the back door to unauthorized dealers. This is somewhat cannibalistic, but it can effectively cut off an illicit channel and keep other dealers in line. 

Conclusion

The sale by unauthorized dealers of “genuine” goods poses the greatest legal challenge to makers of well-known brands. Manufacturers should implement self-help measures such as instituting an effective warranty policy, or covert tracking measures. Take-down measures through the DMCA and programs like eBay’s VeRO can remove a particular unauthorized sale listed online, at least in its present form. 

There is nothing per se illegal about an “unauthorized” sale of “genuine” goods. The first sale doctrine under both trademark and copyright law prohibits brand owners from controlling downstream sales in the first instance. However, such sales can constitute trademark or copyright infringement if material differences exist in the product. One of the more common avenues is to attack such sellers on the grounds that their “genuine” products are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and thus are materially different from authorized goods. Additional remedies can be available under business tort theories such as interference with contractual relations. Further, outside the courts one can approach the Customs Service or seek administrative relief through the International Trade Commission if imported goods are involved.

Termination-on-Bankruptcy Provisions: Some Proposed Language

A fixture of many different kinds of business contracts is the termination-on-bankruptcy (or “ToB”) provision. It states that if the party in question experiences bankruptcy or any of a series of related circumstances, then depending on the contract, either the other party may terminate the contract or the contract will terminate automatically.

Such a provision is usually referred to as an “ipso facto clause,” ipso facto meaning “by the very nature of the situation.” The fewer obscure Latinisms in the practice of law, the better, hence our more straightforward label.

In the United States, bankruptcy law restricts enforceability of ToB provisions. Nevertheless, in certain circumstances they are enforceable; the purpose of this article is to propose model language for such circumstances, with the language following the guidelines in Kenneth A. Adams, A Manual of Style for Contract Drafting (3d ed. 2013). It also offers generic model language for contracts governed by a law other than the law of one of the U.S. states.

Context

As the name suggests, ToB provisions can provide for termination, but drafters also use them to specify that any of the stated circumstances will constitute an event of default having specified consequences that might or might not include termination.

Furthermore, ToB provisions occur in contracts either as a stand-alone provision or as part of a broader provision stating other circumstances that can lead to termination or an event of default.

As regards whether a ToB provision gives rise to a right to terminate or causes the contract to terminate automatically, that depends on whether the party having the benefit of the provision prefers to retain control or whether it is sufficiently concerned at the prospect of any of the specified events occurring that it wishes to have occurrence act as an automatic trigger.

Enforceability

Due to operation of three provisions of the Bankruptcy Code, ToB provisions conditioned on insolvency of the debtor or its financial condition, or commencement of a bankruptcy case of the debtor, are generally unenforceable in bankruptcy.

First, section 541(c) of the Bankruptcy Code strikes down ToB provisions that in effect enable the nondebtor party to forfeit property of the bankruptcy estate.

Second, section 363(l) of the Bankruptcy Code overrides ToB provisions that prevent the debtor from using, selling, or leasing its property.

And third, section 365(e)(1) of the Bankruptcy Code states that a ToB provision in an executory contract – a contract with performance remaining due on both sides – is unenforceable in bankruptcy.

But section 365(e)(2) of the Bankruptcy Code, in conjunction with section 365(c)(1), provides that a ToB provision is not invalid if the debtor or trustee is not permitted by applicable law to assume or assign the executory contract. So if by law an executory contract cannot be assumed by the debtor or trustee without the other party’s consent, then the nondebtor party can use the ToB provision to force rejection of the contract. See Kenneth A. Adams, The Bankruptcy Code’s Effect on a Drafter’s Ability to Restrict Assignment and Provide for Termination on Bankruptcy, Adams on Contract Drafting (Aug. 7, 2006).

This basis for enforcing a ToB provision is commonly referred to by bankruptcy lawyers as the “personal services” exception. The relevant caselaw is complex and beyond the scope of this article, but an example of a context where this exception would apply is when the promised performance by the debtor is so distinctive that it wouldn’t be reasonable to expect that another could render it. That might be the case if, for example, the debtor were a noted opera singer.

Furthermore, the Bankruptcy Code would render a ToB provision unenforceable only if a bankruptcy is actually filed. If a contract party is insolvent and no bankruptcy case is ever filed, it’s possible that the other party could use an appropriately worded ToB provision to terminate the contract. See Robert L. Eisenbach III, Are “Termination on Bankruptcy” Contract Clauses Enforceable?, In the (Red): The Business Bankruptcy Blog (Sept.16, 2007).

Finally, safe harbors in sections 555, 556, 559, 560, and 561 of the Bankruptcy Code permit enforcement of ToB provisions in specified securities and financial market transactions.

Given that in certain contexts ToB provisions are enforceable, it would be best that they be clear and concise. That’s the focus of the remainder of this article.

Proposed U.S. Language

The language proposed in this article doesn’t include language addressing any of the contexts discussed above. Instead, it considers only the circumstances that trigger the provision. Also, it refers only to the party in question – referred to for our purposes by the defined term “the Company” – instead of also encompassing subsidiaries or affiliates of that party.

Here’s our proposed language for use in contracts governed by the laws of one of the U.S. states. The four elements are linked by “and,” as the provision would be triggered by occurrence of one or more of the four circumstances.

  1. the Company commences a voluntary case under title 11 of the United States Code or the corresponding provisions of any successor laws;
  2. anyone commences an involuntary case against the Company under title 11 of the United States Code or the corresponding provisions of any successor laws and either (A) the case is not dismissed by midnight at the end of the 60th day after commencement or (B) the court before which the case is pending issues an order for relief or similar order approving the case;
  3. a court of competent jurisdiction appoints, or the Company makes an assignment of all or substantially all of its assets to, a custodian (as that term is defined in title 11 of the United States Code or the corresponding provisions of any successor laws) for the Company or all or substantially all of its assets; and
  4. the Company fails generally to pay its debts as they become due (unless those debts are subject to a good-faith dispute as to liability or amount) or acknowledges in writing that it is unable to do so. 

Drafting Points

Clause (1)

  • The bankruptcy clause in the U.S. Constitution gives Congress the right to make bankruptcy laws for the United States. It follows that title 11 of the United States Code – generally referred to as the Bankruptcy Code – is capable of preempting state law insofar as state law allocation of rights has a bankruptcy effect. For purposes of a ToB provision that applies to a company incorporated in a U.S. jurisdiction, it’s more economical to refer to title 11 instead of referring generically to the kind of proceeding involved.
  • The reference to “successor laws” simply provides for the possibility of title 11 being replaced by another statute.

Clause (2)

  • It makes sense that having someone commence an involuntary case against a company shouldn’t by itself trigger a ToB provision – that case could be groundless. But it wouldn’t be realistic to expect a party that has the benefit of a ToB provision to have to wait in every instance until the court issues an order approving the case – proceedings that drag on can harm business by creating uncertainty. So it’s reasonable to allow a party to invoke the provision if the case hasn’t been dismissed within some grace period. The proposed language uses a 60-day limit, but a different period could be used if circumstances warrant it.

Clause (3)

  • Title 11’s definition of “custodian” covers a number of circumstances that routinely are spelled out in ToB provisions. It also incorporates different terms that usually feature in the strings of nouns one routinely sees in ToB provisions – “receiver,” “trustee,” “assignee,” and “agent.” So invoking in a ToB provision the definition of “custodian” allows you to be more economical. The downside is that it requires the reader to consult something outside the contract and it results in omission of the familiar assignment-for-the-benefit-of-creditors language, but that problem passes with familiarity. For reference purposes, here’s the title 11 definition:

The term “custodian” means—

(A)      receiver or trustee of any of the property of the debtor, appointed in a case or proceeding not under this title;
(B)      assignee under a general assignment for the benefit of the debtor’s creditors; or
(C)      trustee, receiver, or agent under applicable law, or under a contract, that is appointed or authorized to take charge of property of the debtor for the purpose of enforcing a lien against such property, or for the purpose of general administration of such property for the benefit of the debtor’s creditors.

Clause (4)

  • How many bills have to go unpaid, and for how long, before you can say that a company has failed to pay its bills? It’s not clear – referring to a company’s failure to pay its debts is a vague standard, as you have to take into account the context. But an absolute standard wouldn’t work, so one has to live with a vague standard. By including the concept of “generally” not paying debts as they become due, and excluding debts subject to a good-faith dispute as to liability or amount, the standard is similar to that in section 303 of title 11 governing involuntary bankruptcy filings, which gives this language some judicial gloss. (We’ve permitted ourselves to eliminate two unhelpful legalisms by using “that” instead of “such” and “good-faith” instead of the Latinism “bona fide.”)
  • Many ToB provisions differentiate between a debtor’s inability to pay its debts and a debtor’s actually not paying its debts. Referring to a debtor’s inability to pay its debts is both unhelpfully overinclusive and underinclusive. Overinclusive, in that it would encompass circumstances in which the debtor is unable to pay its debts but doesn’t yet need to – that’s a nuance that would be hard to police. And underinclusive, in that one could get into an unhelpful discussion of whether a debtor is in fact able to pay its debts but simply elects not to.
  • Some ToB provisions use as a trigger balance-sheet insolvency (debts exceeding assets). But a debtor can be balance-sheet solvent but have a liquidity problem. Or a debtor can be balance-sheet insolvent but still have enough cash on hand to stay current on its debts. Furthermore, unless you have access to the accounts it might well be difficult to prove that a debtor is balance-sheet insolvent. So using a standard based on cashflow insolvency – failure to pay one’s debts as they become due – seems more in keeping with business considerations. 

Clauses Omitted

  • Another common ToB trigger refers to the debtor’s seeking an informal financial accommodation with its creditors, as opposed to filing for bankruptcy or engaging in a formal procedure under state law for resolving its debts, such as an assignment for the benefit of creditors. Clauses of this type usually stipulate that the contract may be terminated if the debtor arranges, or takes steps to arrange, a composition, workout, adjustment, or restructuring of its debts. Including such a clause would allow the contract to be terminated short of any formal proceeding or outright insolvency, but it might be perceived as overreaching if none of the other triggers occurs independently.
  • Some ToB provisions include as a trigger failure to comply with financial covenants. But if the nondebtor party is a bank or financial institution, the contract would invariably specify that breach of financial covenants constitute an event of default, so it would be redundant to add it as a ToB trigger. If the nondebtor party is not a bank or financial institution, presumably the nondebtor would not be in a good position to assess compliance with financial covenants imposed in some other contract.

Proposed International Language

Here is our proposed language for use in contracts governed by the laws of a jurisdiction other than one of the U.S. states:

  1. the Company commences a judicial or administrative proceeding under a law relating to insolvency for the purpose of reorganizing or liquidating the debtor or restructuring its debt;
  2. anyone commences any such proceeding against the Company and either (A) the proceeding is not dismissed by midnight at the end of the 60th day after commencement or (B) any court before which the proceeding is pending issues an order approving the case;
  3. a receiver, trustee, administrator, or liquidator (however each is referred to) is appointed or authorized, by law or under a contract, to take charge of property of the Company for the purpose of enforcing a lien against that property, or for the purpose of general administration of that property for the benefit of the Company’s creditors;
  4. the Company makes a general assignment for the benefit of creditors; and
  5. the Company generally fails to pay its debts as they become due (unless those debts are subject to a good-faith dispute as to liability or amount) or acknowledges in writing that it is unable to do so. 

Drafting Points

Clause (1)

  • This clause draws to some extent on the definition of “foreign proceeding” in article 2 of the UNCITRAL Model Law on Cross-Border Insolvency, incorporated as chapter 15 of title 11. The recurring pattern in the vast majority of jurisdictions is that insolvency laws offer a winding-up (or liquidation) option that is equivalent to chapter 7 of title 11 and many also offer a rescue or reorganization alternative that is equivalent to chapter 11 of title 11.
  • In some jurisdictions, the insolvency proceeding is controlled or supervised by an official body other than the court. That is why this clause uses the phrase “judicial or administrative proceeding.”

Clause (2)

  • This serves the same purpose as clause (2) of the proposed U.S. language.

Clause (3)

  • This clause reflects that in many jurisdictions outside the United States, lienholders are permitted to appoint a practitioner, commonly referred to as a “receiver,” to administer or sell some or all of the debtor’s property. In those jurisdictions, receivership is a mechanism for private enforcement by lenders of their security interests, rather than a collective bankruptcy proceeding, so it’s important to distinguish “receivership” procedures from bankruptcy procedures and to ensure that both types are covered in an international ToB provision.
  • The terms “trustee,” “administrator,” and “liquidator” are widely understood to refer to a practitioner appointed to preside over a collective bankruptcy proceeding and so are useful in distinguishing that function from receivership.

Clause (4)

  • General assignment for the benefit of creditors is a uniquely U.S. concept. If a ToB provision will not apply to U.S. debtors, this clause could be omitted.

Clause (5)

  • Clause (5) serves the same purpose as clause (4) of the proposed U.S. language.

Using the Proposed Language

The authors of this article believe that the proposed language is an improvement, in terms of substance and clarity, over the ToB provisions one usually sees. The world of contract drafting is drastically slow to change, but lawyers might be relatively quick to accept the language proposed in this article, whether or not they are aware of its merits.

For one thing, instead of novelty, the proposed language offers a refined and explicated version of ToB provisions currently in use, so it shouldn’t trigger alarm bells in those resistant to change.

Furthermore, the many transactional lawyers with little knowledge of bankruptcy practice might be willing to use the proposed language without worrying about nuances. We’ll take any kind of progress, even if it’s inadvertent.

 

2014 Amendments to the Delaware General Corporation Law

The Delaware State Bar Association has proposed amendments to the Delaware General Corporation Law (DGCL) and certain other provisions of the Delaware Code, which address a number of different topics, including the streamlined back-end merger process under Section 251(h) of the DGCL, springing director and stockholder consents, certain charter amendments without stockholder approval, and the statute of limitations for breach of contract claims. If approved by the Delaware General Assembly and signed into law by the governor, the proposed amendments are expected to become effective on August 1, 2014.

Amendments to Section 251(h)

In 2013, the DGCL was amended to add Section 251(h), which eliminates the need for a stockholder vote on a back-end merger in a two-step transaction involving a front-end tender or exchange offer when certain conditions are met. Since Section 251(h) became effective, more than 25 Section 251(h) deals have been announced. The statute’s use in practice and the manner in which practitioners have been structuring Section 251(h) deals in certain circumstances have raised questions with respect to the statute’s application and utility. The 2014 proposed amendments seek to address certain interpretation issues and other questions with respect to Section 251(h) by clarifying or eliminating certain requirements in the statute. 

First, the proposed amendments clarify that Section 251(h) applies to merger agreements that permit or require the merger to be effectuated under Section 251(h), thereby permitting merger agreements to provide that a merger under Section 251(h), may be abandoned and consummated under a different statutory provision without running afoul of Section 251(h). In that regard, the proposed amendments also clarify that the requirement to consummate the merger as soon as practicable after the completion of the offer only applies when the merger is effected under Section 251(h). 

Second, the proposed amendments eliminate the prohibition against using Section 251(h) if a party to the merger agreement is an interested stockholder (as defined in Section 203 of the DGCL – i.e., the owner of 15 percent or more of the corporation’s voting stock). The proposed amendments, therefore, would allow a stockholder who owns 15 percent or more of the voting stock of a corporation to effect a merger with the corporation pursuant to Section 251(h), which currently is impermissible. The proposed amendments also abate the uncertainty surrounding the permissibility of Section 251(h) deals where the offeror enters into tender or support agreements with stockholders that own 15 percent or more of the target’s voting stock. Accordingly, the proposed amendments diminish the need to provide for backstops in the merger agreement (e.g., a top-up option or a covenant to hold a stockholders meeting) because there will be much less risk, if any at all, that it will be determined post-signing that the requirements to consummate the merger under Section 251(h) cannot be met. 

Finally, the proposed amendments to Section 251(h) address certain questions regarding the front-end offer, timing, and ownership requirements that have arisen in connection with Section 251(h) deals. In particular, the requirement that the front-end offer be for any and all of the outstanding stock of the target corporation would, if the amendments are adopted, exclude target stock owned at the commencement of the offer by (1) the target corporation, (2) the offeror, (3) any person that owns, directly or indirectly, all of the outstanding stock of the offeror, and (4) any direct or indirect wholly owned subsidiary of any of the foregoing, and such shares would not need to be tendered into the offer or converted into the same consideration as shares accepted in the offer in the back-end merger. Also, the shares of stock that would count when determining if an acquiror has sufficient shares to effect the back-end merger under Section 251(h) would include (a) all target corporation stock irrevocably accepted for purchase or exchange and “received” by the depository before the offer’s expiration, and (b) all stock otherwise owned by the acquiror. Stock would be deemed “received” by the depository when stock certificates have been physically received or, for uncertificated stock, when such stock is transferred into the depository’s account, or an agent’s message has been received by the depository. Stock would not be deemed “received” by the depository if it is tendered by guaranteed delivery without being actually delivered to the depository. 

The proposed amendments, however, do not alter directors’ fiduciary duties in mergers effected pursuant to Section 251(h) or the level of judicial scrutiny applicable to the decision to enter into a merger agreement under Section 251(h). 

If adopted, the proposed amendments to Section 251(h) will apply to merger agreements signed on or after August 1, 2014. 

Written Consent Amendments

In AGR Halifax Fund, Inc. v. Fiscina, the Delaware Court of Chancery raised concerns over the effectiveness and validity of written consents executed by individuals who had not yet become directors. In particular, the court in AGR Halifax found that individuals who were not yet directors could not execute consents prior to the time they became directors, even though the consents would be held in escrow and would not be delivered until after the individuals joined the board. That decision created practical issues for practitioners in certain transactions where it was deemed expedient to collect signatures from individuals at a time when they were not yet directors. 

The proposed amendments to Sections 141(f) of the DGCL seek to address this issue by allowing for springing director consents. In particular, the proposed amendments would clarify that any person, whether or not a director at the time, may provide, whether through instruction to an agent or otherwise, that a written consent be effective at a future time, including a time dependent upon the occurrence of an event. This springing consent is, of course, predicated upon the consenting person being a director at such future effective time. Notably, the future effective time can be no later than 60 days after such instruction is given or such provision is made, and such consent is revocable prior to becoming effective. 

Similar amendments have also been proposed to Section 228(c) of the DGCL with respect to stockholder action by written consent that substantively mirror the proposed amendments to Section 141(f) discussed above. The proposed amendments to Section 228(c), however, would not affect the requirement that the consent must bear the actual date of signature, and to the extent the consent provides for a later effective time, such later effective time would serve as the date of signature. 

If adopted, the proposed amendments to Section 141(f) and Section 228(c) would become effective on August 1, 2014. 

Charter Amendments Without Stockholder Approval

The proposed amendments, if adopted, would grant boards of directors of Delaware corporations flexibility with respect to certain ministerial amendments to the corporation’s certificate of incorporation without having to expend the time and expense of obtaining stockholder approval. The proposed amendments provide that, if a corporation has not opted-out in its certificate of incorporation, boards of directors may, without obtaining stockholder approval, amend the certificate of incorporation to change the corporation’s name and delete historical references to the initial incorporator, initial directors, and initial subscribers for stock, and provisions relating to previously effected changes to stock. 

Additionally, the proposed amendments would eliminate the requirement in Section 242 of the DGCL that the notice of a stockholders meeting at which an amendment is to be voted on contain a copy of the amendment or brief summary thereof if, but only if, the notice constitutes a notice of internet availability of proxy materials under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934.

Extending the Statute of Limitations for Breach of Contract Claims

Under Delaware law, the statute of limitations for a breach of contract claim cannot be extended beyond the statute of limitations period, which is typically three or four years. There is a statute in Delaware, however, that permits “specialty contracts” to be placed under seal and, for such contracts, the statute of limitations period would extend to 20 years. It has become relatively common for contracts to be placed under seal in an attempt to take advantage of that statutory provision, but it remains unclear whether the “under seal” statute is intended to extend to all types of agreements, thus raising enforceability concerns in practice. 

In light of this issue, legislation has been proposed to amend Title 10 of the Delaware Code through the addition of new Section 8106(c) to permit contracting parties to agree to an extension of the statute of limitations for up to 20 years without having to use a sealed instrument as long as the written contract involves at least $100,000. 

If adopted, new Section 8106(c) would become effective on August 1, 2014. 

Other Proposed Amendments

Section 218 of the DGCL currently requires that a voting trust agreement, or any related amendment, be filed with the corporation’s registered office in the State of Delaware. The proposed amendments to Section 218 would permit voting trust agreements and related amendments to be delivered to the corporation’s principal place of business rather than its registered office.

The proposed amendments also address incorporator unavailability issues. Section 103(a)(1) of the DGCL currently provides that if an incorporator is unavailable due to death, incapacity, unknown address, or refusal or neglect to act, a person for whom the incorporator was acting may, subject to certain conditions, execute any certificate with the same effect as if it was executed by the incorporator. The proposed amendments would eliminate any limitations arising from the reason for the incorporator’s unavailability in Section 103(a)(1) and add a new Section 108(d), which would allow any person for whom or on whose behalf an unavailable incorporator was acting to, subject to certain conditions, take any action that the unavailable incorporator would be entitled to take under Sections 107 and 108 of the DGCL. 

If adopted, the proposed amendments to Section 218 and Section 103(a)(1) would become effective on August 1, 2014. 

Recently Effective Amendments to the DGCL

As a final note, on April 1, 2014, new Sections 204 and 205 of the DGCL went into effect authorizing the ratification of certain defective corporate acts and stock issuances and bestowing jurisdiction upon the Delaware Court of Chancery to hear matters related to such ratifications, as well as other matters relating to curing defective or potentially defective corporate acts.

Taking Care of Business: Use of a For-Profit Subsidiary by a Nonprofit Organization

Revenue generation continues to draw significant attention in the nonprofit sector. Rather than rely exclusively on donations, many nonprofits seek to become self-sustaining through earned income. While in some cases revenue may be generated by activities that clearly further the nonprofit’s mission, other activities may be desirable primarily for the revenue they produce or involve other aspects that do not fit neatly within a nonprofit (or tax-exempt) framework. In these situations, legal and business factors may favor the creation of a for-profit entity to carry on the activity.

While any nonprofit organization might consider launching a subsidiary, this article focuses on public charities that are tax-exempt under Internal Revenue Code Section 501(c)(3). Private foundations and nonprofit organizations that fall under other categories of tax exemption, like trade associations or social welfare organizations, will encounter compliance requirements specific to their tax-exempt status.

Why Would a Charity Want to Create a For-Profit Subsidiary?

Expanding Activities Beyond Those That Are Clearly Charitable 

Although charities and other nonprofit organizations generally are exempt from income tax, they can incur tax on their unrelated business income. The unrelated business income tax, or “UBIT,” applies to income derived from a regularly carried on trade or businesses that is unrelated to the performance of the organization’s tax-exempt (e.g., charitable) functions. This tax was introduced in 1950 as a means to prevent tax-exempt organizations from having an unfair advantage by virtue of their tax-exempt status over for-profit, taxable competitors when they engaged in commercial business activities. 

An organization potentially can derive significant income from unrelated business activity and pay any UBIT incurred. At some point, however, the activity may become so substantial that it could threaten the tax-exempt status of the organization. In that case, the entity may be well-advised to move the activity into a separate legal entity, such as a subsidiary corporation. There is no bright-line for how much unrelated business activity is too much for a nonprofit to conduct; housing the activity in a corporate subsidiary can avoid concern about when this line has been crossed. 

In addition, it is not always clear under federal tax law when an activity might be considered unrelated to the charity’s tax-exempt purpose. For instance, operating a training program or publishing books, while educational, may too closely resemble a for-profit business to qualify as substantially related to a charitable purpose. An organization may focus on serving low-income or other underserved communities, or selling its product at a lower price only to other charities, in order to be comfortable that the activity is substantially related. However, a nonprofit organization with a successful business model may not want to limit the scope of its activities in this way. Instead, it may wish to increase revenue by offering its product or service at fair market value to the broadest audience possible. A for-profit subsidiary maximizes flexibility to pursue a wide range of profit-making activities and to take advantage of future opportunities as they arise. 

Shielding the Parent from Liability 

A nonprofit organization, especially one with a large endowment or other significant assets, may not want to risk those assets by operating a business with potential liabilities. In these circumstances, it may be prudent for the nonprofit parent to protect its other assets and activities by isolating the business in a limited-liability subsidiary. No social service organization, for instance, would want to see its programs for at-risk youth jeopardized if the day-care center that it also owns is sued. 

Attracting Outside Investors 

A for-profit entity can raise money for its business by offering equity to outside investors. The nonprofit organization is limited to relying primarily on contributions, loans, investment income, or earned revenue to finance its activities, but it cannot offer ownership interests in itself. When contributions and other sources of revenue are insufficient to sustain or grow an activity, additional capital may be necessary. The for-profit vehicle expands access to capital by attracting investors who are motivated by receiving a return, in addition to funders who are willing to donate to the nonprofit parent. 

Attracting and Compensating Employees 

A for-profit entity can offer equity compensation to employees and other profit-sharing opportunities that a nonprofit organization cannot. This flexibility may be important for attracting talent, especially when competing with for-profit employers. A for-profit subsidiary also may be able to compensate individuals without concern about providing excess compensation under state and federal laws that govern the nonprofit parent. 

Spinning Off the Business 

If the nonprofit organization ultimately may sell the business, it may be easier to segregate the activity in a subsidiary, where the business can be valued separate from the parent organization. The parent’s equity interest in the subsidiary also could be transferred, avoiding a potentially complicated process of identifying and assigning individual assets and liabilities from the nonprofit in order to transfer the business activity. 

Public Disclosure and Perception 

While the existence of a controlled subsidiary and certain transactions with that subsidiary will be disclosed on the nonprofit organization’s publicly available annual Form 990, the subsidiary’s activities will not be subject to the same level of disclosure as it would if the activity was conducted directly by the nonprofit organization (for instance, with respect to the subsidiary’s income and expenditures and possibly the compensation it pays individuals, depending on what other roles the recipients have with respect to the nonprofit organization.) The nonprofit also may prefer a clear separation between its charitable activities and any for-profit endeavors, to avoid mission drift or a perception that its charitable work has been tainted or overshadowed by profit-making objectives. 

Other

Other reasons also may exist for forming a separate legal entity (e.g., administrative convenience, availability of certain government funding, or requirements for operating in a foreign country).

What Are Some Disadvantages to Establishing a For-Profit Subsidiary?

Administrative Cost and Complexity 

Two entities in general are more complicated to operate than one. The costs to form a subsidiary and maintain two separate entities therefore will be higher. 

Corporate formalities must be observed to protect the separation of the entities. Each organization must have a separate governing body and should conduct separate board and committee meetings, with separate minutes taken. The entities also should avoid commingling assets by using separate bank accounts and should maintain an arm’s length relationship. If the subsidiary and the parent will share any resources such as office space or employees, or if one entity is going to provide goods or services to the other, or a license of any intellectual property, the entities should enter into a written resource-sharing, services, or licensing arrangement. A charity must receive at least fair market value for whatever it provides to the for-profit entity. 

While the nonprofit parent will be the only (or at least the controlling) equity holder of the for-profit subsidiary and therefore will control the for-profit’s governing body, there are reasons to avoid complete overlap in the directors and officers of the two entities. Having some different directors and officers helps clarify when individuals are acting on behalf of the for-profit subsidiary versus the nonprofit parent; these lines can get blurred more easily if the directors and officers of both are identical. In addition, for transactions between the two entities, it may be desirable, or even required, for the nonprofit to have some board members who are not affiliated with the for-profit entity to approve the transaction. 

A failure to segregate the subsidiary’s operations from the parent can result in the subsidiary’s separate status being disregarded by a regulator or a court and the activities being attributed to the parent for tax, liability, or other purposes. The time and expense involved in properly maintaining two separate entities therefore should be considered. 

Prudent Investment Considerations 

If the subsidiary’s activities are not related to the parent’s charitable purposes, investment in the new entity should be a reasonable use of the organization’s resources and may need to satisfy a “prudent investment” standard. (See “Capitalizing the New Entity” below.) 

Compliance with Securities Laws 

Depending on the number, residence, and sophistication of any other investors involved other than the nonprofit organization, securities laws may apply; this can involve compliance costs and delays. However, if participation is limited to the nonprofit, or to a small number of outside investors in addition to the nonprofit, securities-law compliance costs may not be significant. 

Winding Down the New Entity 

In order to wind-down a subsidiary, a dissolution process may be required. In addition, when a for-profit corporate subsidiary is dissolved, the subsidiary’s assets are deemed to be sold, potentially resulting in adverse tax consequences. This may make it difficult to liquidate an existing corporation. The nonprofit parent should consider its exit strategy before establishing a new entity.

Entity Selection for the Nonprofit Organization Subsidiary

For any or all of the advantages described above, the nonprofit organization may have decided in favor of creating a for-profit subsidiary. Additional questions remain. 

Corporation or LLC? 

While there are many types of for-profit entities, the two most useful vehicles for a nonprofit organization to consider when creating a subsidiary are the Subchapter C corporation and the limited liability company (LLC). Some considerations for the nonprofit parent will be the same as for any organization forming a subsidiary. For instance, the parent may be focused on limiting liability or establishing an appropriate management structure. Below are some considerations specific to nonprofit organizations. 

Federal tax law considerations. For federal income tax purposes, a corporation is recognized as a separate taxpaying entity. The corporation will realize net income or loss, pay taxes, and distribute profits to shareholders. The profit is taxed to the corporation when earned and is taxed, with certain exceptions, to the shareholders when distributed as dividends, resulting in a double tax. For a tax-exempt nonprofit parent, the dividends it receives may not be taxable, because they qualify as passive income. However, the income of the subsidiary will be taxed at the subsidiary level. 

Certain payments typically are deductible to the subsidiary as a business expense, such as the cost of borrowing money, renting space, or licensing intellectual property. However, in the case of a corporate subsidiary where the parent owns more than 50 percent of the stock (or, if the subsidiary is an LLC, more than 50 percent of the profit or capital interests), the interest, rents, and royalties paid by the subsidiary to the parent will be subject to UBIT. 

In contrast to a corporation, LLCs are typically “pass-through” entities. Multiple-member LLCs are treated like partnerships and are not subject to income tax at the entity level (although an LLC can elect to be taxed separately from its members, in which case it would be taxable as a corporation). Instead, the LLC allocates to each member its share of the LLC’s income and expense, and each member pays its own tax on this net income (regardless of whether the LLC actually makes any distribution to its members). The Internal Revenue Service will attribute activities carried on by an LLC to its tax-exempt members when evaluating whether the nonprofit members are operated exclusively for exempt purposes. 

An LLC may have only one member, in which case it is generally disregarded for federal income tax purposes. Its income and expenses are reflected on the tax return of its sole member, and the IRS will regard the nonexempt activities carried on by the LLC to be the activities of its sole member. 

An LLC may work well when the nonprofit’s goal in setting up the subsidiary is to limit liability or to attract additional investors, and the LLC’s activities are still substantially related to the parent’s charitable mission. A tax-exempt parent may not wish to hold a membership interest in an LLC where the subsidiary will conduct an unrelated business activity. In that situation, the member may be required to file a Form 990-T and pay unrelated business income tax on its share of net income from the LLC. The revenue-generating activities also potentially could jeopardize the charity’s tax exemption. A nonprofit organization therefore may opt for a taxable corporation to house activities that are unrelated to its mission in order to avoid this attribution. 

State law considerations. A subsidiary will be subject to registration and reporting requirements in its state of formation (e.g., with the secretary of state). If the entity establishes certain minimum contacts with another state through its operations, the entity also will be subject to the jurisdiction of that state. 

Some states impose taxes or annual fees on LLCs, notwithstanding the fact that a single-member LLC is disregarded for federal income tax purposes or that a multiple-member LLC has only tax-exempt organizations as its members. A lack of uniformity across states means that an LLC subsidiary could owe taxes or fees in one or more states while operating in other states free of any entity-level payment. 

Should the Subsidiary Be a Benefit Corporation? 

For-profit corporations traditionally are organized to pursue maximum financial return for their shareholders. An increasing number of states have introduced a new form of legal entity that serves both a business and a social or charitable purpose. The benefit corporation is probably the best known of these options and has been adopted in more than half the states. Another alternative, the flexible purpose corporation, can be formed in California. Washington state has the social purpose corporation, and Delaware last summer introduced the Delaware public benefit corporation (not to be confused with the California nonprofit public benefit corporation). An LLC variation also exists in a number of states, called the low-profit limited liability company or “L3C.” These entities allow (and in some cases require) directors to take into account a social purpose and certain non-economic factors when making decisions, in addition to financial return. 

There are similarities and significant differences among these new options that are beyond the scope of this article. A nonprofit parent forming a wholly-owned subsidiary may not find it worthwhile to consider any of them, as the nonprofit will have complete control over the subsidiary; with no other shareholders, there is little risk to the for-profit directors if they pursue a social purpose at the expense of maximizing profit. For a subsidiary with other investors, a social purpose entity may provide some measure of protection to directors as well as anchor the social mission by articulating it in the organizing documents and making it harder to change (as state laws typically require a supermajority vote). Use of one of these entities also may convey both to investors and to the public the intended social purpose of the subsidiary, which may be perceived as “more aligned” with the parent nonprofit’s mission.

Capitalizing the New Entity

Is the Investment an Appropriate Use of Nonprofit Funds? 

The nonprofit parent must capitalize its subsidiary. A contribution in return for an equity interest is an investment. The parent must determine whether the investment is either (1) a prudent investment that will not violate any state fiduciary requirements or prudent investor laws, or (2) a “program-related” investment that is being made primarily to further a charitable purpose rather than an investment purpose. If a subsidiary is formed to house business activities that are unrelated to the parent’s tax-exempt purpose, only the first option may be available. The nonprofit therefore should be aware of any prudent investment standards that govern how the organization may invest its funds, for instance the standard set forth in the state’s version of the Uniform Prudent Management of Institutional Funds Act (UPMIFA). In addition, a tax-exempt parent may have UBIT issues, if it uses debt to finance an unrelated investment. 

Private foundations face additional restrictions. They generally may not own more than 20 percent of a business entity such as corporation or an LLC, unless the corporation or LLC is operating a business that is functionally related to the foundation’s mission. A private foundation also can be taxed on investments that jeopardize its tax-exempt purposes. A “program-related investment” – one that is made primarily to accomplish a charitable purpose and with no significant investment purpose (see Internal Revenue Code Section 4944) – is not subject to either of these restrictions. 

Will the Subsidiary Have Other Investors? 

Initial funding of a new subsidiary could come from a combination of capital contributions and loans from the nonprofit organization and possibly from other investors. If other investors will be involved, the arrangement becomes more complicated. A charity must make sure that it receives adequate value in return for its contribution, and it must avoid using charitable assets to subsidize for-profit investors. The charity therefore should receive an equity interest that reflects the fair market value of whatever it has contributed. It may need to have an appraisal conducted to confirm the value of its contribution or that of other investors, such that each investor receives a proportionate interest. 

In addition, and as mentioned earlier, any transactions between the parent and its for-profit subsidiary, including licenses, leases, and loans, need to be at fair market value or better for the parent. The organization needs to be especially wary of any benefit, whether direct or indirect, to charity insiders who own some percentage of, or will be compensated by, the subsidiary entity. If charity insiders are involved, certain federal and state laws governing interested party transactions may apply (e.g., the excess benefit transaction rules under Internal Revenue Code Section 4958).

Conclusion

Use of a for-profit subsidiary can be an effective strategy for a variety of reasons, from shielding a nonprofit organization from liability or the tax consequences of conducting an unrelated business activity, to attracting outside investment and scaling a business beyond what might be possible if conducted inside the nonprofit parent. When a revenue-generating activity or a significant asset is involved, the directors of a nonprofit organization and legal counsel should consider whether a subsidiary would make sense.

 

 

E-mail Voting: A Practical Approach to a Difficult Trap

E-mail, Facebook, Twitter, Tumblr, Skype, WebEx . . . these and other diverse modes of electronic communication have exploded in recent years. We are now able to communicate faster, cheaper, and with more people simultaneously than ever before. At the same time, busy schedules make face-to-face board meetings a luxury directors don’t think they can afford.

 

A Tempting Shortcut

Responding to the difficulty of wrangling geographically diverse and busy volunteers, many nonprofit organizations are allowing directors to vote by e-mail. This seems like the perfect solution. An issue or opportunity arises that calls for a quick response before the next regular board meeting. Scheduling a special meeting seems impossible. Why not circulate an e-mail, ascertain that there is general agreement, and take action right away? 

E-mail voting is seductively simple and fast, but that ease and speed is a trap: in many jurisdictions a board that relies on e-mail voting fails to comply with statutory and common law requirements for a valid meeting, thereby exposing its decisions to attack. 

Most state statutes provide that board action may be taken either at a meeting (including a meeting by electronic communication) or by unanimous written consent. In theory, a court could consider an e-mail vote, which may not fit either category, nothing more than informal board action and invalidate the vote. Of course, there is almost no risk that informal action by a board of directors will be later overturned if no one objects. But, this type of dispute does tend to arise in the context of a split board of directors or a terminated employee. While neither of the following cases were ultimately decided on the issue of e-mail, or even proxy, voting, they do illustrate that courts may be asked to decide which group of warring directors is the legitimately elected board, Clemmons v. Crenshaw, 511 S.W.2d 449 (Mo. App. 1974), or whether an executive director’s contract was properly terminated, Wayne v. Capital Area Legal Services Corporation, 108 So.3d 103 (La. App. 2012), writ denied, 110 So.3d 1072 (La. 2013), appeal after remand, 2014 WL 1757587 (La. App. 2014). 

Even more likely, without a vote that meets statutory requirements, an attorney representing a nonprofit organization in a loan transaction may be unwilling to issue the opinion of counsel required by the lender, thereby delaying or derailing an entire transaction.

A Hypothetical . . .

Let’s take an example.  

Playball (PB) runs a youth baseball program. A local business owner offers to donate land for playing fields, and arranges for a mortgage loan to cover construction costs. As interest rates are rising, PB must lock in the rate quickly. PB’s president tries to schedule a special meeting of the board to approve the loan, but can’t find a time when a quorum of four of the seven directors can meet. 

So, she sends an e-mail: “Hey do you think it is a good idea to take a loan from Local Friendly Bank to pay for the construction costs for our new ball fields.” Five directors respond, “OK by me,” while two object. With a majority vote in hand, PB’s president signs the commitment letter and pays a commitment fee. 

The closing approaches. PB’s attorney prepares the opinion of counsel required by the lender, which must state, “All corporate proceedings required by law or the provisions of PB’s Certificate of Incorporation or bylaws to be taken by PB in connection with the transaction have been duly and validly taken.” 

“Let me see the minutes of the meeting approving the loan,” says PB’s attorney. 

“We couldn’t call a meeting, so we voted by e-mail,” responds PB’s president. 

“OK,” says the attorney. “You need a unanimous written consent, or ratify the vote at a meeting. You can hold the meeting by teleconference or Skype.” 

Unanimous consent is unattainable because two directors object. Meanwhile, one of the five original consenting directors has changed his vote to “No.” Of the remaining four consenting directors, two are traveling in Asia and cannot meet even by teleconference. With five of seven directors available – but only two who will vote in favor of the loan – PB’s attorney can’t deliver the opinion, the bank won’t make the loan, there is no deal, and PB forfeits its commitment fee. 

While far-fetched, this scenario illustrates the danger of relying on informal board action.

The Prohibition on Voting by Proxy

In most states, the directors of nonprofit organizations may not vote by proxy, although generally members can. The theory behind this prohibition is that the robust discussion and interchange of ideas that occurs at board meetings is essential to the informed exercise of directors’ fiduciary duty to the corporation. 

An e-mail vote – that is, a proposal circulated and responded to by e-mail – is essentially a proxy vote delivered electronically. 

The common law regarding proper action by a board of directors, including the prohibition on proxy voting by directors, developed in the business (or stock) corporation arena. State statutes governing business corporations and nonprofit (or nonstock) corporations both reflect the codification of this common law. While some courts have recognized the validity of informal action by directors of closely held corporations (Model Bus. Corp. Act Annotated § 8.20 cmt. (4th Edition, 2013 Revision)), particularly where the directors and stockholders are identical, the directors of a nonprofit corporation should not rely on the availability of this exception. The directors of a nonstock corporation don’t hold an economic interest in that corporation. Rather, they are stewards of charitable funds charged with managing the organization and its assets for a charitable or public purpose, and must respond to a diverse constituency, which may consist of members, donors, clients, and even the general public. Yet directors of nonprofit organizations, usually unpaid volunteers, may be particularly prone to seek governance short-cuts.

Model Nonprofit Corporation Act

Approximately half the states have adopted a version of the Model Nonprofit Corporation Act (MNCA). Because the Model Nonprofit Corporation Act (3rd Edition, 2008) sets a uniform national standard, it is the focus of this article. Notable states that have not adopted the MNCA are California, Delaware, Massachusetts, and New York. But, even states that have not adopted the MNCA, such as Massachusetts and New York, have retained the same common law and statutory principles governing proper board action. 

The relevant provisions of the MNCA were patterned after the Model Business Corporation Act (MBCA), and the law is substantially the same under both model statutes. 

According to the Official Comments to the MBCA (Model Bus. Corp. Act Annotated § 8.20 cmt. (2013)): 

A well-established principle of corporate common law accepted by implication in the Model Act is that directors may act only at a meeting unless otherwise expressly authorized by statute. The underlying theory is that the consultation and exchange of views is an integral part of the functioning of the board. A corollary to this principle, also accepted by implication in the Model Act, is that directors may not generally vote by proxy. 

Statutory Alternatives

The law does provide some flexibility, giving the executive director or president of a nonprofit organization frantically trying to schedule a meeting of busy, far-flung directors some options. PB’s attorney tried to implement both of the statutory exceptions to the common law “in-person” meeting rule. These exceptions respond to modern technology, can be easily adapted as technology evolves, and should be incorporated into an organization’s bylaws.

Electronic Communication

The MNCA allows meetings to be conducted “through the use of, any means of communication by which all directors participating may simultaneously hear each other during the meeting,” unless the articles of incorporation or bylaws provide otherwise. Model Nonprofit Corporation Act Annotated § 8.20 (2008). This provision allows teleconferences and web-based conferencing that combines voice and video communication. 

As explained in the Official Comments to the MNCA (Model Nonprofit Corporation Act Annotated § 8.20 cmt. (2008)): 

With the development of modern electronic technology, it is possible that the advantages of the traditional meeting, at which all members are present at a single place, may be obtained even though the participants are physically dispersed and no two directors are present at the same place. The advantage of the traditional meeting is the opportunity for interchange that is permitted by a meeting in a single room at which participants are physically present. If this opportunity for interchange is thought to be available by the board of directors, a meeting may be conducted by electronic means although no two directors are physically present at the same place and no specific place for the meeting is designated. 

Note, however, the continued preference for in-person meetings as the best way to insure thorough debate and discussion. According to the commentary, a meeting may be conducted by electronic means only if the same opportunity for interchange is available.

Unanimous Consent

A board of directors may also act by unanimous written consent, a methodology easily adapted to e-mail. 

Section 8.21 of the MNCA permits a board of directors to act by unanimous written consent, if each director signs “a consent in the form of a record describing the action to be taken and delivers it to the nonprofit corporation.” Model Nonprofit Corporation Act Annotated § 8.21 cmt. (2008). 

The power of the board of directors to act unanimously without a meeting is based on the pragmatic consideration that in many situations a formal meeting is not needed. . . 

. . . the requirement of unanimous consent precludes the possibility of stifling or ignoring opposing argument. A director opposed to an action that is proposed to be taken by unanimous consent, or uncertain about the desirability of that action, may compel the holding of a directors’ meeting to discuss the matter simply by withholding consent. 

Thus, unanimous written consent provides the vehicle through which a nonprofit corporation can take advantage of the convenience of e-mail, but comply with statutory requirements. The difficulty is in striking the appropriate balance between risk and convenience. 

The most prudent and careful course of action is to circulate a formal consent as an attachment to an e-mail. The organization’s leaders must then collect all of the directors’ signatures. While issues such as the security, accuracy retention and accessibility of electronic signatures and records are beyond the scope of this article, electronic signatures are now widely accepted under state and federal laws such as the Uniform Electronic Transactions Act (UETA) and the Electronic Signatures in Global and National Commerce Act, 15 U.S.C. §§ 7001–7031. 

For example, under Section 1.40(53) of the MNCA: 

“Sign” means, with present intent to authenticate or adopt a record:

(i)     to execute or adopt a tangible symbol; or
(ii)   to attach to or logically associate with the record an electronic sound, symbol, or process. 

According to the Official Comments to the MNCA, the definition of “sign” is patterned after the definition of that term in the UETA and other uniform statutes. (Model Nonprofit Corporation Act Annotated § 1.40.16cmt. (2008).) 

Those definitions, in turn, were based on the definition of “electronic signature” in section 106(5) of the Electronic Signatures in Global and National Commerce Act, 15 U.S.C. § 7006(5). The term includes manual, facsimile, conformed or electronic signatures. In this regard, it is intended that any manifestation of an intention to execute or authenticate a record will be accepted. Electronic signatures are expected to encompass any methodology approved by the secretary of state for purposes of verification of the authenticity of the record. This could include a typewritten conformed signature or other electronic entry in the form of a computer data compilation of any characters or series of characters comprising a name intended to evidence authorization and execution of a record. 

There is also a growing consensus among practitioners that a proposal or resolution circulated by e-mail that is unanimously approved, constitutes a valid unanimous written consent, even if it lacks the formality of a written consent attached to an e-mail. 

This is true under the MNCA, which defines a “record” as “information that is inscribed on a tangible medium or that is stored in an electronic or other medium and is retrievable in perceivable form.” MNCA § 1.40(43). 

According to the commentary (Model Nonprofit Corporation Act Annotated § 1.40.14 cmt. (2008)), 

The term includes both communication systems that in the normal course produce paper, such as telegrams and facsimiles, as well as communication systems that transmit and permit the retention of data that is then subject to subsequent retrieval and reproduction in perceivable form. The term is intended to be broadly construed and include the evolving methods of electronic delivery, such as email, the Internet and electronic transmissions between computers.           

Therefore, under the MNCA a resolution circulated, signed, and returned electronically constitutes “a consent in the form of a record describing the action to be taken.” MNCA, § 8.21.

Some Warnings

Even if valid under local law, this type of board action can cause a host of practical problems. First, in most jurisdictions, all of the directors must respond affirmatively. Obtaining unanimous consent from even the most responsive directors of very small board can take weeks of communication. Without the discipline of a written consent with signature lines, the busy staff member responsible for “chasing” signatures might overlook a missing name. 

Second, e-mail is an informal means of communication. Informality leads to ambiguity. Sometimes it’s hard to know when “yes” means “yes,” or if a director has “signed” the electronic record. Consider the e-mail exchange that might have followed the initial e-mail missive from PB’s president: 

Director:          “OK by me”
President:        “Is that a ‘yes’ vote?”
Director:          “I guess?”
President:        “I hate to be a pain, but could you please just e-mail me saying ‘yes’ and sign your name electronically?” 

Furthermore, the e-mail “record” must be properly retained with the organization’s minutes. 

Finally, the most likely problem in the context of informal communication is confusion over content. Even if the PB vote had been unanimous, it is hard to know exactly what the directors approved. The president’s e-mail leaves a lot of questions unanswered. What are the terms of the loan? When and how must it be repaid? What is the interest rate? Is it secured by a mortgage on the property? Would all the directors have voted in favor of the loan if they knew the terms? Perhaps some directors would have preferred to raise the funds to cover construction costs, rather than mortgage the newly acquired property. 

Clearly, a practitioner advising a nonprofit organization must insist on the discipline of a formal resolution, even if the resolution is communicated in an e-mail. If the e-mail sent by PB’s president had included the complete text of a properly drafted borrowing resolution describing the terms of the transaction in detail, the other directors and PB’s attorney would have known exactly what action the board approved. 

Of course, it is critical to verify the law in the organization’s state of incorporation – as many variations exist. For example, in Texas directors may vote by proxy if authorized by the certificate of formation or bylaws, Texas Business Organizations Code §§ 22.214; 22.215. Colorado, Georgia, Minnesota, Texas, Utah, and Wisconsin all permit board action by less than unanimous written consent, although the specific statutory requirements differ. Colo. Rev. Stat. § 7-128-202; Ga. Code. Ann. § 14-3-821; Minn. Stat. § 317A.239; Texas Business Organizations Code § 22.220; Utah Code Ann. § 16-6a-813; Wis. Stat. § 181.0821.

Regardless of the form of board action, e-mail is undoubtedly a useful tool for taking the pulse of a board of directors. An organization may informally poll its directors and then ratify the decision at an in-person or electronic meeting, or by unanimous written consent. 

 

 

 

Mergers, Acquisitions, and Affiliations Involving Nonprofits: Not Typical M&A Transactions

In recent years, there has been an increase in mergers, asset transfers, and affiliations involving nonprofit organizations. These “business combinations” have been necessary in an environment that has become more challenging for nonprofits to obtain financial support in the form of public and private funding and contributions. The process for pursuing a nonprofit business combination, including use of letters of intent or term sheets, due diligence, and the negotiation and execution of documents to effectuate the combination, is very similar to the process used with for-profit entities. Nevertheless, business combinations involving nonprofits have important differences from their for-profit counterparts because of the unique nature of nonprofits. This article provides an overview of common forms of nonprofit corporation business combinations and highlights some aspects of these transactions that differentiate them from for-profit transactions.

 

Considerations for Moving Forward with Business Combinations

An initial step in any business combination is determining whether such combination makes sense to the nonprofit. The factors that a nonprofit board needs to take into consideration in such evaluation are very similar to those factors a for-profit board considers, including synergies, cost savings and other efficiencies to be obtained through the combination, work force issues, and the composition of the surviving entity’s board and the make-up of its officers. Moreover, the fiduciary duties imposed on nonprofit directors in acting on business combinations are very similar to the fiduciary duties imposed on for-profit directors. Still, there are some important differences between for-profit and nonprofit business combinations. For instance, a for-profit board needs to consider the financial impact a business combination will have on the entity’s owners (such as shareholders in a business corporation). In the context of a charitable nonprofit corporation, the interests of members may be relevant in a board’s consideration of a merger, but such interests are distinguishable because members do not have an ownership interest in the nonprofit. The differences between for-profits and nonprofits lead to other unique factors that need to be considered by a nonprofit board when evaluating a possible business combination. 

If the proposed combination involves a nonprofit being merged out of existence, selling substantially all of its assets or becoming a “subsidiary” of another entity, a main focus of the nonprofit board likely relates to whether the mission of the entity will be carried on by the surviving entity in some respect with adequate resources dedicated to such mission. This may result in a requirement by the nonprofit that the mission of the surviving entity incorporate in some respect the nonprofit’s mission. 

Other unique considerations include what will happen to any members of the nonprofit, as well as the proposed use of any institutional funds with donor restrictions (including endowment funds) of the nonprofit. 

Similar to the situation involving a for-profit business combination, as the nonprofit commences discussions with another entity regarding a possible business combination, a letter of intent or term sheet (that is often non-binding) helps structure the proposed transaction and process for the combination. In order to protect the nonprofit, it is important to have a binding confidentiality agreement in place prior to any significant discussions between the parties. 

Mergers

The Model Nonprofit Corporation Act, Third Edition (MNCA), and most state nonprofit corporation acts, permit a nonprofit corporation to merge with another nonprofit corporation pursuant to a process that is very similar to the process required for for-profit entities. State nonprofit corporation acts also may allow a nonprofit to merge with a for-profit entity, such as a business corporation, limited liability company, or limited partnership. In addition, state nonprofit corporation acts may allow a nonprofit to merge with an unincorporated nonprofit association as well as with an entity that is domesticated in another state. For any merger, it is important to confirm that it is permitted under both the applicable nonprofit corporation statute and the enabling statute for the other entity involved in the merger. 

The process for a merger involving a nonprofit corporation is very similar to a merger involving a for-profit entity. It typically includes a plan of merger or merger agreement containing the terms of the merger and any appropriate representations and warranties of the merging parties. It also involves the filing of articles or certificate of merger with the state’s secretary of state. Regardless of whether the nonprofit is the surviving entity, it is generally necessary to obtain board of director approval as well as member approval if the nonprofit has members. 

Depending on the type of entity that will be the surviving entity in the merger, there may be unique state law requirements, as well as requirements imposed on the nonprofit because of its tax-exempt status. A merger involving a charitable nonprofit can be subject to additional requirements if the charitable nonprofit is being merged out of existence and the surviving entity is not a charitable nonprofit. Some states impose requirements that steps be taken to ensure that the charitable assets or the fair value of such assets of a merged out entity continue to be used for a charitable purpose. A similar requirement is imposed on entities that have tax-exempt status under Section 501(c)(3) of the Internal Revenue Code (IRC). Additional requirements under the IRC are imposed on nonprofits that are private foundations. In addition, some states require a merger be approved by a governmental body, such as the state attorney general, or a court. Where there needs to be action taken to ensure the fair value of the charitable assets is preserved, a valuation by an independent appraiser is likely necessary. 

There are significant benefits with regard to proceeding with a merger as the form of business combination. Similar to state for-profit entity acts, state nonprofit corporation acts provide that all assets and rights and liabilities of the merged out entity are automatically transferred/assumed by the surviving entity. There also is no need to dissolve the merged out entity because it no longer exists as a legal entity. In addition, state nonprofit corporation acts often will provide that any bequest, devise, gift, grant, or promise contained in a will or other instrument of donation inures to the surviving entity unless it is made pursuant to an instrument that specifically provides otherwise. 

A main disadvantage to a merger is that the surviving entity inherits all of the liabilities of the merged out entity and it is not easily possible to unwind the arrangement if it is later determined that the combination has not resulted in the benefits the parties expected. As a result, it is extremely important as part of the due diligence process to determine what assets and liabilities might be assumed by the surviving entity. 

Some state nonprofit corporation acts also permit the consolidation of nonprofits, which is very similar to a merger of a nonprofit with another nonprofit. The main distinction between a merger and consolidation is that a consolidation results in both nonprofits effectively being merged out of existence with the creation of a new entity. A main disadvantage with proceeding with a consolidation as opposed to a merger is that in a consolidation it is necessary to make an application to the IRS if the new entity seeks to have tax-exempt status under Section 501(c)(3) of the IRC. Given the similar treatment of mergers and consolidations of nonprofits, more recent state nonprofit corporation acts have dropped the concept of consolidation. 

Asset Acquisitions/Sales

Another form of business combination involves the acquisition or sale of assets of an entity. This might be in the form of a nonprofit acquiring the assets of another nonprofit or a for-profit. Alternatively, the transaction might involve a for-profit acquiring the assets of a nonprofit. The structure of such a transaction is very similar to the structure of an acquisition of assets involving for-profit entities. In particular, the selling entity transfers certain identified assets and liabilities to the acquiring entity. 

Similar to a merger, the process for the sale of all or substantially all of the assets of a nonprofit is governed by the state nonprofit corporation acts. The MNCA and most nonprofit corporation statutes provide that a sale by a nonprofit of all or substantially all of its assets generally requires approval by the nonprofit corporation’s board of directors as well as the members if the nonprofit has members. 

Often, the form of asset purchase agreement used is very similar to the form used in for-profit transactions and will include a description of the assets being transferred, the liabilities being assumed, and appropriate representations and warranties regarding such assets and liabilities and the parties. Still, such agreement likely will need to include provisions that are unique to a nonprofit. For instance, in the situation where a non-charitable entity is acquiring the assets of a charitable entity, the buyer may require that, as a condition of closing, the seller deliver any approvals necessary from state governmental authorities for the sale of the seller’s charitable assets.

A significant difference between an acquisition of the assets and liabilities of a nonprofit versus a for-profit can relate to the purchase price. If the acquisition involves two nonprofit entities, it may not be necessary for the acquiring nonprofit to pay fair market value (or anything) for the assets. Instead, the transaction can be structured as a gift of assets from the selling nonprofit to the acquiring nonprofit. Such gift should be permissible as long as the “selling” nonprofit corporation’s creditors are paid in full upon liquidation of the nonprofit.

A gift structure is not possible in the event the nonprofit is acquiring assets from a for-profit entity, or a for-profit entity is acquiring assets from a nonprofit entity. To the extent a charitable nonprofit is selling its assets to a non-charitable entity, such as a business corporation, similar to the situation in mergers, state nonprofit corporation acts often require that there be fair value paid for the assets. In addition, many states impose requirements that the nonprofit obtain approval from a governmental body (such as the attorney general) or a court in order to proceed with the transaction. In such situation, it would be important to obtain an independent valuation of the assets as part of the transaction. 

A main advantage of an asset transaction is that the acquiring nonprofit is able to be selective in terms of the assets and liabilities it acquires. As a result, it can avoid being burdened with liabilities of the other entity. A main disadvantage is that additional steps may need to be taken in order to complete the transaction. These include obtaining assignments of any relevant revenue generating agreements including consents from the other parties to such agreements. In addition, the selling entity remains in existence and its board will need to take steps to either wind down its activities and dissolve or continue its existence. 

Parent-Subsidiary Type Arrangements

Nonprofit corporations differ from for-profit entities in that nonprofits have no owners, whereas for-profits have shareholders or other owners. Still, a parent-subsidiary structure can be structured with nonprofits. The main difference is that the “parent” nonprofit does not own any shares or other interest in the nonprofit. Instead, it is treated as the parent because of the control it has over the other nonprofit. This might be as a result of the “parent” nonprofit becoming the sole voting member of the “subsidiary” nonprofit. It also could be accomplished by the parent nonprofit having the right to determine the directors of the subsidiary nonprofit. Another important difference between a nonprofit and for-profit parent-subsidiary structure is that nonprofits are unable to file consolidated tax returns with the IRS. 

The arrangement, which is sometimes referred to as an “affiliation” of nonprofits, can be accomplished by amendments to the articles of incorporation and bylaws of the “subsidiary” nonprofit. These documents would be amended to reflect that the “parent” organization either as the sole member (with sole voting rights) of the “subsidiary” or having a right to determine the board of directors of the subsidiary. 

Because this type of combination or affiliation is similar to a merger or acquisition of assets, parties often enter into some type of affiliation agreement that covers similar topics addressed in other business combination agreements. For instance, an affiliation agreement might address any change in activities of the subsidiary nonprofit as well as the composition of the parent’s board of directors as well as certain representations and warranties about the parties and their operations. 

One of the main advantages of a parent-subsidiary type structure is that the parent does not assume the liabilities of the subsidiary entity. In addition, the affiliation often can be easily accomplished by amending the governance documents of the “subsidiary” entity. This type of structure is also attractive to entities that are not certain about the “permanency” of the arrangement and would like the ability to “unwind” the business combination if it is subsequently determined that the combination is not working out. The unwinding of the business combination can be accomplished through amendments to the governing documents to take the “parent” organization out of the control position of the “subsidiary.” 

A disadvantage to this type of business combination is that the parties may not achieve the efficiencies that can be obtained through a merger. In particular, there will still be two separate entities that need to file their own Form 990s with the IRS. There also will be a need to keep in place two separate boards of directors (although the subsidiary board can be quite small and meet infrequently, assuming that the parent board is addressing issues relevant to the subsidiary). Some organizations that choose to use this type of structure will – through a merger – collapse the “subsidiary” into the “parent” at some later point in time when it is determined that the combination should be permanent. 

A variation of this structure is the incorporation of a third nonprofit corporation that becomes the sole member (or parent) of the existing nonprofit corporations. This may be attractive to nonprofits that see themselves as “equals” to each other. The advantages to such a structure are similar to the advantages of the “parent/subsidiary” structure. One disadvantage is that a new nonprofit corporation needs to be incorporated and likely needs to obtain tax-exempt status. In addition, the IRS has shown some disfavor to granting tax-exempt status to entities that are merely holding companies with no operations. As a result, it may be necessary to have some activities of the combined nonprofits occurring at the “parent” level. 

Forms of Less Integrated Affiliations

Although beyond the scope of this article, it is noted that nonprofits can be involved in other types of arrangements that result in organizations combining their resources to a lesser extent. For instance, two nonprofits may enter into arrangements for joint funding, joint programming, combined services, or other type of joint venture. These types of arrangements allow the involved nonprofits to maintain their autonomy while achieving some efficiencies. It is also possible for nonprofits to enter into joint venture arrangements with for-profit entities. Such arrangements raise tax issues that can impact the structure of any joint venture. 

Unique Due Diligence Considerations Involving Nonprofit Business Combinations

Similar to business combinations involving for-profits, due diligence activities are important for business combinations involving nonprofit corporations. Many of the considerations for a for-profit business combination are important in due diligence reviews involving a nonprofit business combination. These include reviewing various information and documents relating to the other entity, including its governance documents (such as articles of incorporation, bylaws, and board policies), financial information (including audited financial statements and any audit reports), contractual arrangements, real and personal property, litigation, insurance coverages, and workforce/employees (and employee benefits). 

Still, given the unique nature of nonprofits, there are other factors important to business combinations involving nonprofits that should be considered as part of the due diligence process. Below is a description of some of these considerations.

  • The tax-exempt status of any nonprofit involved in a business combination is important and should be confirmed through a review of the determination letter issued by the IRS. In addition, there should be a review of recent Form 990 federal tax filings for the nonprofit.
  • Many nonprofits are exempt from paying property taxes on their real estate as a result of being a nonprofit. This can mean significant savings to the nonprofit. Because exemption for property tax is not automatically determined on the basis of whether an entity is tax-exempt under the IRC, the parties to a business combination need to consider whether the resulting transaction will jeopardize any existing property tax exemptions.
  • Many nonprofits depend on public and private funding as well as bond financing. The terms of such funding and financings should be reviewed to determine whether the particular form of business combination will impact the continued existence of such arrangements. In addition, many nonprofits have institutional funds that have restrictions imposed on them by their donors. As noted above, in the context of a merger, any such funds presumptively are transferred to the surviving entity unless there are restrictions that prohibit such transfer. It is important that the restrictions be considered as part of the due diligence process to ensure that a transfer is possible and that the surviving entity is able to honor such restrictions.
  • As described above, a business combination involving a nonprofit corporation may require approval by the nonprofit’s members if it has any. For nonprofits with members, it is important to determine whether such “members” meet the state nonprofit corporation act’s definition of members. Typically, such definition focuses on individuals or entities that elect part or all of the board of directors. It is possible that a nonprofit may have a group of individuals designated as “members” who do not have such rights. In such circumstances, it may not be necessary to obtain their approval of the merger (or other business combination) unless the articles or bylaws of the organization mandate such approval.
  • As also described above, to the extent the business combination will result in an entity, other than a charitable nonprofit, as the surviving entity, it may be necessary to obtain state attorney general or court approval. Such determination should be made as part of the due diligence process. 

Conclusion

A merger, asset transaction, or other business combination involving a nonprofit corporation has many characteristics that are similar to those of a business combination involving for-profit entities. Nevertheless, a business combination involving a nonprofit is not a typical M&A transaction and, due to the unique nature of a nonprofit, there are important differences that need to be addressed when considering such a business combination.

 

 

 

 

 

Cross-Border Closing Opinions of U.S. Counsel

FOREWORD

This Report addresses a subject that has never before been the sole focus of a bar association report: third-party legal opinions given by U.S. lawyers in cross-border transactions. It embodies years of work by lawyers experienced in the field.

As international transactions have become more common, requests to U.S. lawyers for cross-border opinions have increased. These opinions often raise issues that differ from those presented in purely domestic U.S. transactions, particularly when the agreement entered into by the parties chooses the law of a jurisdiction outside the United States as its governing law. These issues and other factors, such as language barriers and differences in legal systems, customs, and expectations, often make giving opinions in cross-border transactions more difficult and costly than in domestic U.S. transactions.

The recipients of cross-border opinions often are located in countries whose opinion practices are very different from those followed by U.S. lawyers. The linchpin of this Report is that the customary practice of the jurisdiction whose law is covered by an opinion letter should govern the meaning of standard language used in it and the work opinion preparers are expected to perform in preparing it.

This Report points out that some opinions that are standard in domestic U.S. transactions present challenges in a cross-border setting, and offers practical ways to address those challenges. It also analyzes special issues raised by opinions that are normally given only in cross-border transactions and suggests how they could be worded. The Report notes that sometimes legal uncertainties exist for which the parties to a cross-border transaction cannot look to a third-party legal opinion as the solution; instead those uncertainties must be dealt with by the parties in other ways with advice from their own counsel.

The purpose of this Report is to promote a better understanding of opinion practice in cross-border transactions. We hope that U.S. lawyers who give cross-border opinions and lawyers, both U.S. and non-U.S., who advise the recipients of those opinions will find this Report helpful.

Timothy G. Hoxie,

Chair, Legal Opinions Committee, ABA Business Law Section

Ettore Santucci, Reporter,

Vice Chair, Legal Opinions Committee, ABA Business Law Section

 

As a condition to closing financial transactions in the United States, legal counsel for one party often delivers to the other party a letter expressing counsel’s opinion on various legal issues relating to its client and the transaction. That opinion letter is commonly referred to as a “third-party closing opinion” or simply a “closing opinion.” U.S. lawyers sometimes are asked to deliver closing opinions to non-U.S. parties in similar transactions that involve both U.S. and non-U.S. parties (cross-border transactions).2 Those closing opinions, which this Report refers to as “outbound opinions” because they are given by U.S. lawyers to non-U.S. recipients on matters of U.S. law, are the subject of this Report.

I. INTRODUCTION

In the United States opinion givers and opinion recipients share a common conceptual framework for preparing and interpreting closing opinions. U.S. customary practice3 is well established with regard to many standard opinions, and guidance on what specific opinions mean, and the work required to support them, is available in bar association reports and other materials. Applying this guidance in cross-border transactions, however, is not always straightforward, and in some cases what is appropriate in a domestic U.S. transaction is not appropriate in a similar cross-border transaction. Moreover, on many issues that arise in cross-border transactions little, if any, guidance is available.

The dearth of authoritative sources on cross-border opinion practice and the absence of a shared conceptual framework between U.S. opinion givers, on the one hand, and non-U.S. opinion recipients and their counsel, on the other, create the potential for misunderstanding over such matters as: (1) what opinions U.S. lawyers are in a position to give, (2) the meaning of opinions commonly given, and (3) the work U.S. lawyers are expected to perform to support the opinions they give. The risk of misunderstanding can be compounded by differences in legal systems, legal education, opinion practice, and languages (even when documents are in English or are translated into English), and a general lack of familiarity on the part of many non-U.S. recipients and their counsel with U.S. closing opinion practice.4 The potential for misunderstanding has grown as the number and type of participants in, and the complexity of, cross-border transactions have increased.

The goals of this Report are: (1) to describe what the parties in a cross-border transaction should consider when deciding whether to request a closing opinion from U.S. counsel and, if requested, which opinions are appropriate for U.S. counsel to give; (2) to clarify the application of U.S. customary practice to outbound opinions; (3) to provide guidance on the special considerations that apply to opinions commonly given in domestic U.S. transactions when those opinions are requested in cross-border transactions; (4) to identify opinions U.S. lawyers should not be asked to give in cross-border transactions and to explain why; (5) to provide guidance on both the meaning of, and the work expected to be performed to support, opinions frequently given by U.S. lawyers in cross-border transactions but not in domestic U.S. transactions; and (6) to suggest guidelines for U.S. opinion givers and counsel for non-U.S. opinion recipients to facilitate cross-border opinion practice.

II. APPLICATION OF GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF U.S. OPINION PRACTICE IN CROSS-BORDER TRANSACTIONS

II-1 THE THRESHOLD QUESTION

As stated in section 1.2 of the ABA Guidelines for the Preparation of Closing Opinions,5 opinions to third parties “should be limited to reasonably specific and determinable matters” and the benefit of an opinion to the third-party recipient “should warrant the time and expense required to prepare it.” The opinions expressed in a closing opinion are not guarantees but rather expressions of professional judgment, and the costs of preparing them can be substantial. At the outset of a transaction the opinion giver and the opinion recipient and its legal counsel should work together to weigh the benefit the recipient seeks from each opinion it is requesting against the difficulty and expense of preparing it, as well as the difficulty of understanding its meaning and what it covers and does not cover.6 In domestic U.S. transactions this cost/benefit analysis has led to requests for fewer and narrower opinions. Indeed, in some types of domestic U.S. transactions in which closing opinions were once routinely requested, closing opinions now are requested infrequently, if at all. In the cross-border setting a cost/benefit analysis is at least as important.

Many of the opinions U.S. lawyers are asked to give in cross-border transactions appear on their surface to be the same as in domestic U.S. transactions. Appearances, however, can be deceiving. For the reasons discussed in this Report, in cross-border transactions giving opinions commonly given in domestic U.S. transactions often is more difficult and costly; in some cases special assumptions, exceptions, or qualifications must be added to the opinion letter, and in other cases the opinion cannot be given at all.

Opinions given by U.S. lawyers also can be problematic from the standpoint of non-U.S. recipients. This is because U.S. opinions often cannot be understood without reference to U.S. customary practice, and for a non-U.S. recipient to understand what particular opinions do and do not cover under U.S. customary practice can be burdensome and costly.

In light of the difficulties in both preparing and interpreting outbound opinions, and of the potential for their being misunderstood by non-U.S. recipients, this Committee recommends that early in a cross-border transaction7 the U.S. opinion preparers and the non-U.S. recipient (and its counsel) discuss: (1) the cost of preparing each of the opinions the recipient is considering requesting; (2) the benefit the recipient is seeking from each opinion and whether, if given, the opinion would provide that benefit; and (3) if the recipient is not familiar with U.S. customary practice, the additional cost to it in time and resources (possibly including the cost of retaining U.S. counsel) of understanding what each opinion means.

Closing opinions seldom are given in transactions that have no U.S. nexus. In cross-border transactions in which U.S. lawyers are involved, however, they sometimes are the only lawyers who are asked to deliver a closing opinion even though no good reason exists for treating the U.S. lawyers differently from the non-U.S. lawyers involved in the transaction.8 This Committee recommends that, rather than automatically expecting U.S. lawyers to give opinions in cross-border transactions, non-U.S. parties and their counsel consider whether they can obtain the benefit they are seeking from a closing opinion in other or better ways (for example, by obtaining the advice of their own counsel).

II-2 U.S. CUSTOMARY PRACTICE

U.S. customary practice covers the meaning of words and phrases commonly used in closing opinions. Thus, it amplifies the meaning of standard language, supplies customarily understood limitations, and permits the opinion preparers to rely on many generally understood assumptions, exceptions, and qualifications without stating them expressly.9 U.S. customary practice also establishes the scope and nature of the work the opinion preparers are expected to perform in preparing specific opinions.10 Important sources of guidance on U.S. customary practice can be accessed through the Legal Opinion Resource Center maintained by the ABA Legal Opinions Committee.11

U.S. customary practice governs the preparation and interpretation of closing opinions of U.S. lawyers, whether delivered in domestic U.S. or cross-border transactions. In cross-border transactions, when giving opinions to non-U.S. recipients on matters of U.S. law, U.S. lawyers are not expected to ascertain opinion practices in the recipient’s country or any other countries connected with the transaction, much less to conform their opinion letters to those practices.12 They also are not expected to determine how the opinions they are giving are being interpreted by the non-U.S. recipient or its legal counsel.

When U.S. lawyers deliver closing opinions in cross-border transactions, they necessarily rely on U.S. customary practice for the meaning and scope of the opinions they give and the work they are expected to perform to support each opinion—just as they do when giving opinions in domestic U.S. transactions. If that were not the case, opinions in cross-border transactions could not take the same abbreviated form as domestic U.S. closing opinions and instead would need to spell out—in what is probably impossible detail—all of the assumptions, exceptions, and qualifications that as a matter of U.S. customary practice are understood to be implicit.13

When a non-U.S. opinion recipient is not represented by U.S. counsel and neither the recipient nor its counsel is familiar with U.S. customary practice, the recipient runs a serious risk of misunderstanding an outbound opinion that is based on U.S. customary practice.14 That risk increases when the opinion request prepared by the recipient’s non-U.S counsel uses terms not commonly used in U.S. opinions and the U.S. opinion givers respond with an opinion letter that uses standard U.S. terminology.

To help reduce the risk of misunderstanding, this Committee recommends that opinion givers include in their third-party closing opinions an express statement that the opinions they are giving are intended to be interpreted in accordance with U.S. customary practice.15 That statement would: (1) alert non-U.S. recipients to the need for them to obtain informed advice regarding the meaning and scope of the opinions they are receiving; and (2) make clear, if a suit later is brought against the U.S. opinion giver in a court outside the United States, that the opinions are intended to be read, and supported by work done by the U.S. lawyers who give them, in accordance with U.S. customary practice.

Whether or not such a statement is included in an outbound opinion, U.S. customary practice necessarily governs the preparation and interpretation of closing opinions delivered by U.S. lawyers in cross-border transactions, just as it does for those delivered in domestic U.S. transactions. Not including such a statement (even if included in a draft but omitted from the final opinion letter) should not be taken to imply that U.S. customary practice does not apply. An opinion giver has no responsibility to advise an opinion recipient that U.S. customary practice applies or of its significance or to confirm that a non-U.S. recipient understands the meaning of and limitations on the opinions it is receiving. Non-U.S. opinion recipients are responsible for deciding what they need to do to understand the opinions they receive from U.S. lawyers, including, to the extent that they deem appropriate, consulting their own counsel on the application of U.S. customary practice.16 A U.S. opinion giver has no responsibility to counsel the opinion recipient because the opinion recipient is not the opinion giver’s client.

II-3 OMNIBUS CROSS-BORDER ASSUMPTION

In many cross-border transactions the agreement between the parties chooses the law of a jurisdiction other than the United States as its governing law (the Chosen Law). Opinions given by U.S. counsel cover the law of a specified U.S. state (or states) and often federal U.S. law (the Covered Law). Because U.S. counsel’s opinions do not cover the non-U.S. Chosen Law, the opinion preparers necessarily must assume that each provision of the agreement (including its governing law clause) is valid, binding, and enforceable under the Chosen Law. The assumption covers the choice of law rules of the jurisdiction of the Chosen Law (the Chosen Law Country), the substantive and procedural law of the Chosen Law Country, and the procedural rules governing matters such as the jurisdiction of courts, venue, and service of process that a court in the Chosen Law Country or in another non-U.S. jurisdiction would apply if an action regarding the enforceability of the agreement were brought in that court. This Report refers to the foregoing assumption as the “Omnibus Cross-Border Assumption.” This Committee recommends that the Omnibus Cross-Border Assumption be stated expressly in outbound opinion letters.17 Even if the assumption is not stated, however, this Committee believes that it should be understood to apply because non-U.S. recipients cannot expect U.S. lawyers to give opinions without assuming matters covered by the assumption (or to confirm matters under foreign laws that their opinions do not cover).

III. OPINIONS FREQUENTLY REQUESTED IN CROSS-BORDER TRANSACTIONS AND THEIR RELATIONSHIP TO OPINIONS FREQUENTLY GIVEN IN DOMESTIC U.S. TRANSACTIONS

Some opinions frequently requested in cross-border transactions are the same as, or very similar to, opinions U.S. lawyers frequently give in domestic U.S. transactions (these opinions are discussed in Parts III-1, -2, -6, -7, and -9). In the cross-border context, however, these opinions can raise issues not presented in the domestic U.S. context that make them difficult or impossible to give, necessitate additional qualifications, or require other changes in their wording.18 Other opinions frequently requested in cross-border transactions are not usually requested or given in domestic U.S. transactions (these opinions are discussed in Parts III-2, -3, and -4).

III-1 AVOIDANCE OF ENFORCEABILITY OPINIONS GIVEN “AS IF” THE AGREEMENT WERE GOVERNED BY THE LAW OF A U.S. JURISDICTION RATHER THAN THE CHOSEN NON-U.S. LAW

In domestic U.S. transactions the state whose law is covered by the closing opinion (the Covered Law State) may not be the state whose law is the Chosen Law. In that event, U.S. lawyers sometimes give an opinion on the enforceability of the agreement as if the Covered Law were the Chosen Law.19 In cross-border transactions, however, when the Chosen Law is the law of a jurisdiction outside the United States, U.S. lawyers ordinarily do not give “as if” enforceability opinions for the reasons discussed below.

To give an “as if” enforceability opinion, the opinion preparers must consider how the highest court of the Covered Law State, in deciding whether to enforce the agreement, would interpret the terms of the agreement under the Covered Law (rather than the Chosen Law). Differences in how the agreement would be interpreted under the Covered Law and under the Chosen Law normally pose a serious problem for the opinion preparers when the law governing the agreement is the law of a jurisdiction outside the United States, because the agreement may use terms from the Chosen Law having no counterparts under the Covered Law. Thus, the opinion preparers have no way to make a professional judgment with the confidence needed to give an opinion as to how the highest court of the Covered Law State would interpret the agreement under the Covered Law.20 Applying the “as if” approach to agreements governed by non-U.S. law also can produce a meaningless opinion because provisions that do not appear in the agreement, such as so-called “non-derogable norms” of contract law in civil law countries, may be among a cross-border transaction’s most material terms, but the opinion preparers cannot be expected to be aware of them.21

Therefore, an “as if” opinion would be of no practical use to the recipient, particularly when one considers that the parties meant for the transaction to be governed by the non-U.S. Chosen Law both to the extent that terms are stated in the agreement and to the extent that provisions of the Chosen Law otherwise apply. The opinion recipient and its non-U.S. counsel presumably know how the agreement would be enforced in the Chosen Law Country. Conversely, neither the opinion recipient nor counsel for the U.S. party knows with any degree of confidence how a court in the Covered Law State that chose to apply the Covered Law, rather than the Chosen Law, might enforce a “hypothetical” agreement (i.e., the “as if” agreement rather than the actual agreement the parties entered into). Moreover, a court in the Covered Law State would likely see no reason to apply its own jurisdiction’s law rather than the law the parties chose and, were it to do so, it would likely have little, if any, precedent to guide it. Thus, rather than speculating about hypothetical scenarios that might make an “as if” opinion meaningful, the opinion recipient would be better served by focusing on whether a court in the Covered Law State, if asked to enforce the agreement, would do what the parties intended: apply the Chosen Law. That topic is discussed in the next section of this Report, which deals with choice-of-law opinions. If a court in the Covered Law State applies the Chosen Law, it will rely on testimony from experts knowledgeable about that law and practice in the Chosen Law Country. In so doing, the court will not engage in the exercise in which the preparers of an “as if” enforceability opinion would have to engage: pretending that the agreement is governed by a law (the Covered Law) that the parties did not choose.

These interpretive problems are inherent in giving an outbound “as if” enforceability opinion on an agreement governed by non-U.S. law and create the potential for misunderstanding by the opinion recipient in a cross-border transaction. In giving that opinion U.S. opinion preparers may interpret the terms of the agreement, even those that appear to have counterparts under the Covered Law, in ways that would come as a surprise to the non-U.S. recipient because those interpretations are based on U.S. legal principles with which the recipient is not familiar. Moreover, as discussed above, the opinion preparers may not have considered material terms because, instead of appearing in the agreement itself, they are prescribed by a statute or other law of the Chosen Law Country. The non-U.S. recipient would have little or no way of knowing how the opinion preparers using the “as if” approach came to the conclusion that a court applying the Covered Law would enforce the agreement, and may not be aware that the opinion does not address what the recipient believes to be the “true” commercial bargain.

For these reasons, this Committee regards as well-advised the practice of U.S. lawyers not to give an “as if” enforceability opinion in cross-border transactions when the agreement is governed by the law of a jurisdiction outside the United States, and believes that insisting that U.S. lawyers give it normally is inappropriate.22

III-2 CHOICE OF NON-U.S. LAW AS GOVERNING LAW

When the Chosen Law is the law of a non-U.S. jurisdiction, a non-U.S. party to a cross-border transaction may request an opinion from U.S. counsel for the U.S. party that, in an action relating to the parties’ agreement in a court of the Covered Law State, that court will give effect to the governing law clause and apply the Chosen Law.23 In the case of contracts, many states have choice-of-law rules based on section 187(2) of the American Law Institute’s Restatement (Second) of Conflict of Laws.24 Under section 187(2), a governing law clause is given effect unless one or both of the following exceptions apply: (1) the state whose law is chosen (the Chosen Law State) does not have a substantial relationship to the parties or the transaction and no other reasonable basis exists for the parties’ choice of law; or (2) giving effect to the agreement under the Chosen Law would be contrary to a fundamental policy of the state whose law would have applied had the agreement not contained a governing law clause (the Default State), if the Default State has a materially greater interest in the issue than the Chosen Law State.25 This Report refers to the second exception under section 187(2)—as described in clause (2) above—as the “Second Prong of the Restatement Test.”

In domestic U.S. transactions, when U.S. lawyers give an opinion on the effectiveness of a governing law clause that chooses the law of another state26 and the choice-of-law rules of the Covered Law State follow the Restatement, many opinion preparers limit the opinion’s coverage of the Second Prong of the Restatement Test or avoid covering it altogether.27 They do so because of the difficulty U.S. lawyers have determining with the confidence needed to give an opinion (1) whether the Covered Law would govern in the absence of a governing law clause, (2) whether the state whose law would govern—i.e., the Default State— has a materially greater interest in the issue, and (3) whether giving effect to the agreement under the Chosen Law would violate a fundamental policy of the Default State. Covering the Second Prong of the Restatement Test is even more problematic in the cross-border context because foreign legal systems are involved and each of these three determinations calls for an analysis U.S. lawyers ordinarily are not in a position to make.28

Even if the Covered Law State is, or is treated for purposes of the choice-oflaw opinion as if it were, the Default State, determining whether a fundamental policy of the Covered Law State would be violated requires the opinion preparers to have a full understanding of what the agreement provides and means under the Chosen Law.29 When, as this Report assumes, the Chosen Law is the law of a jurisdiction outside the United States, U.S. lawyers will not have that understanding because of their limited, if any, familiarity with that law. Thus, they are not in a position to determine whether giving effect to the agreement as interpreted under the Chosen Law would violate a fundamental policy of any jurisdiction, including one of the Covered Law State.30 Statutes or other laws in the Chosen Law Country may supply provisions that do not appear in the agreement or may override or modify provisions that do appear. In addition, terms in the agreement, some of which are likely to have no counterparts in U.S. law, may have a meaning under the Chosen Law that would come as a surprise to U.S. lawyers.31 The inevitable imprecision of translating into English agreements written in another language32 ordinarily will exacerbate the problem.33 As a result, even when the terminology of the agreement looks familiar to the opinion preparers, for example because it is based on a U.S. form of agreement, they cannot be expected to know whether the terms used have the same meaning under the Chosen Law as they do under the Covered Law.

Some U.S. lawyers are unwilling to give choice-of-law opinions in cross-border transactions in which the Chosen Law is the law of a jurisdiction outside the United States. Non-U.S. recipients, however, may request this opinion and regard it as important. This Committee believes that when the choice-of-law rules of the Covered Law State follow section 187(2) of the Restatement U.S. lawyers can give an opinion on the effectiveness under the Covered Law of a governing law clause choosing the law of a jurisdiction outside the United States, but, for the reasons discussed above, only if the opinion does not cover the Second Prong of the Restatement Test.34 Accordingly, this Committee recommends that, when giving choice-of-law opinions in cross-border transactions in which the Chosen Law is the law of a jurisdiction outside the United States, U.S. lawyers exclude coverage of the Second Prong by making clear in the opinion letter, by means of an express exception or assumption, that the opinion does not cover the fundamental policies of the Covered Law State or any other state or country that may be the Default State.35

An outbound choice-of-law opinion that does not cover fundamental policies under the Second Prong of the Restatement Test still covers matters important to non-U.S. recipients. Among those matters are: (1) the presence under the Covered Law of a sufficient nexus with the Chosen Law State to satisfy the first prong of the Restatement test; (2) the inapplicability under the Covered Law of mechanical rules (for example a rule that the governing law shall be the law of the place where the contract was entered into or the law of the jurisdiction with the closest relationship to the transaction) that would prevent a court in the Covered Law State from giving effect to the governing law clause; (3) the satisfaction of formal or procedural requirements under the conflict-of-laws rules of the Covered Law State; and (4) the absence of a general prohibition against application of the Chosen Law by the courts of the Covered Law State.36

When the Chosen Law is the law of a jurisdiction outside of the United States, the opinion preparers are entitled to base a choice-of-law opinion on an assumption that the agreement generally and the governing law clause specifically are valid, binding, and enforceable under the Chosen Law. For this purpose they are entitled to rely, without so stating, on the Omnibus Cross-Border Assumption.37

III-3 INTERNATIONAL ARBITRATION

The parties to cross-border transactions often choose arbitration as the method for resolving disputes that may later arise between them and to that end include in their agreements mandatory arbitration clauses.38 Arbitration clauses, however, would be of no value if courts were unwilling to compel the parties to arbitrate or to enforce arbitral awards made under them.39 Consequently, when an arbitration clause is included in an agreement in a cross-border transaction, a non-U.S. party may ask U.S. counsel for the U.S. party for an opinion that, under the Covered Law, (1) the agreement of the parties to arbitrate is an enforceable obligation of the U.S. party and (2) an arbitral award against the U.S. party made in accordance with the clause will be recognized and enforced by courts in the Covered Law State without a re-hearing on the merits.

The United States is a signatory to the 1958 United Nations Convention on the Recognition and Enforcement of Foreign Arbitral Awards (which is commonly referred to as the New York Convention).40 As discussed in greater detail in Parts III-3.1 and III-3.2,41 if the New York Convention applies to the transaction, U.S. counsel for the U.S. party usually will have no difficulty giving an opinion that, subject to the exceptions provided in the New York Convention, the agreement to arbitrate is enforceable under U.S. federal law against the U.S. party and an arbitral award made in accordance with the clause will be recognized and enforced in the United States.42 This opinion does no more than confirm that the prerequisites for application of the New York Convention have been satisfied. It does not cover the applicability of any of the exceptions provided in the New York Convention, whether in the context of a suit to compel arbitration or a suit to have an arbitral award recognized and enforced.43

Chapter 2 of the Federal Arbitration Act (the FAA) brings the provisions of the New York Convention into the framework of the U.S. legal system.44 The FAA preempts state law if state law conflicts with or departs significantly from the policies of the New York Convention or the FAA.45 While the New York Convention is not the only treaty that applies to international arbitration,46 it is the most important.47 This Report covers only opinions on arbitration clauses subject to the New York Convention. If the arbitration clause is not subject to the New York Convention and related provisions of the FAA, this Report does not address whether an opinion can be given.

Pursuant to section 202 of the FAA, the New York Convention applies to any arbitration agreement or foreign arbitral award arising out of an international contractual transaction. For purposes of the FAA, a transaction is not international if it is entirely between U.S. citizens, unless it otherwise involves international commerce, for example because it concerns property located outside the United States, the contract is to be performed outside the United States, or the transaction bears some other reasonable relationship to a foreign country. In addition, in the United States the New York Convention is subject to two important reservations48: (1) a reciprocity requirement that limits its application to awards made in other countries that are parties to the Convention;49 and (2) a requirement that limits its application to transactions considered “commercial.”50 Neither the New York Convention nor the FAA defines the term “commercial,” leaving that issue to the courts.

The New York Convention applies only to “foreign arbitral awards,” which it defines as any arbitral award that: (1) is made in the territory of a country other than the country where recognition and enforcement of the award is sought, or (2) is not considered a domestic award under the law of the country where recognition and enforcement of the award are sought.51 As discussed later in this Part, the Convention’s definition of “foreign arbitral award” may present an issue for the opinion preparers if the agreement does not require that the arbitration take place outside the United States or is silent as to the location of the arbitration.52

The New York Convention promotes international arbitration as a dispute resolution mechanism, and, consistent with that policy objective, U.S. courts have consistently compelled international arbitration, recognized and enforced international arbitral awards, and construed narrowly the grounds for judicial review of arbitral awards.53 Outbound opinions on the enforceability under U.S. law of agreements to arbitrate outside the United States are discussed in Part III-3.1. Outbound opinions on the recognition and enforcement in the United States of future foreign arbitral awards are discussed in Part III-3.2.

III-3.1 Enforceability of the Agreement to Arbitrate

The New York Convention requires the courts of a signatory country to enforce “an agreement in writing”54 in which the parties undertake to submit to arbitration all or any differences that may arise between them in respect of a defined legal relationship, whether contractual or not, concerning a subject matter “capable of settlement by arbitration.”55 Giving an opinion in reliance on the New York Convention on the enforceability of an agreement to arbitrate requires the opinion preparers to determine that the New York Convention applies. If the agreement to arbitrate is silent or ambiguous as to whether arbitration must take place outside the United States, or expressly allows arbitration to take place either in the United States or elsewhere, the New York Convention may not apply because an award made in an arbitration conducted pursuant to that type of agreement may not qualify as a foreign arbitral award. In those situations many opinion givers include in their opinions an express assumption that arbitration will take place outside the United States. Alternatively, they may base the opinion on an express assumption that the transaction and the dispute subject to arbitration have a sufficient foreign nexus to satisfy the second part of the definition of a “foreign arbitral award” in the New York Convention.

A court may refuse to enforce an agreement to arbitrate to which the New York Convention otherwise applies if it finds that it is null and void, inoperative, or incapable of being performed.56 Enforcement by a U.S. court of an arbitration clause under Chapter 2 of the FAA can take one of two forms. First, a party to an arbitration agreement can ask a court to compel the other party to arbitrate.57 Second, if a party to an arbitration agreement brings suit in a U.S. court with respect to a matter subject to the agreement, the other party can ask the court to stay the proceeding pending arbitration.

An opinion normally can be given that an agreement subject to the New York Convention requiring arbitration outside the United States of future disputes arising in connection with a cross-border transaction is enforceable under U.S. federal law,58 subject to the exceptions in the New York Convention.59 To give the opinion, the opinion preparers need to satisfy themselves that the five prerequisites for application of the New York Convention and the FAA (the Five Arbitration Prerequisites) are met: (1) the parties have entered into a written agreement to arbitrate; (2) the agreement provides for arbitration in the territory of a signatory country to the New York Convention; (3) the agreement is between a U.S. and a foreign party or between foreign parties or, if it is entirely between U.S. parties, the underlying transaction is international in nature; (4) the agreement arises out of a legal relationship that qualifies as commercial under U.S. law; and (5) the agreement does not relate to a subject matter that is within one of the few categories that are not arbitrable under U.S. law. The first three requirements are primarily matters of form. The “commercial” and “arbitrable” prerequisites require the opinion preparers to reach substantive legal conclusions that will rarely be a problem in the kind of cross-border transactions in which outbound opinions typically are requested.60 When the agreement selects non-U.S. law as its governing law, the opinion preparers are entitled to assume that the agreement generally and the arbitration clause specifically are valid, binding, and enforceable under the non-U.S. Chosen Law. For this purpose they are entitled to rely without so stating on the Omnibus Cross-Border Assumption.61

III-3.2 Recognition and Enforcement of Foreign Arbitral Awards in the United States

If the losing party refuses to honor a foreign arbitral award, the winner typically will seek to enforce it in the courts of a jurisdiction where the losing party has operations or assets.62 An objective of the New York Convention is to make international arbitral awards that satisfy its conditions readily transportable from country to country. It does so by requiring that arbitral awards be treated as final as to the merits of the dispute and that they be recognized and enforced by courts in all signatory countries pursuant to a uniform and streamlined set of standards.63

Giving an opinion on the recognition and enforcement in the United States of a foreign arbitral award against a U.S. party requires a determination by the opinion preparers that the New York Convention applies. This is the same issue the opinion preparers are required to address when giving an opinion on the enforceability of an agreement to arbitrate, as discussed earlier in this Report.

Apart from some simple formalities (producing authenticated copies of the award and the arbitration agreement with certified translations into the language of the forum court), the New York Convention allows each signatory country to establish its own procedures for enforcing foreign arbitral awards. The Convention does require, however, that signatory countries not subject the enforcement of foreign arbitral awards to substantially more onerous conditions or charges than apply to domestic awards. The United States established its procedures in Chapter 2 of the FAA.64

The New York Convention limits both the defenses that a party resisting enforcement of an arbitration award may assert and the scope of judicial review by a court in which enforcement is sought. The New York Convention lists seven grounds for refusing recognition and enforcement of an arbitral award and provides that the list is exhaustive, not illustrative.

Only the party resisting enforcement (not the court) may assert five of the seven grounds for refusing recognition and enforcement under the New York Convention: (1) lack of legal capacity to enter into the agreement under the law applicable to the parties or invalidity of the arbitration agreement under the law chosen by the parties or otherwise applicable in the place where the award was made; (2) lack of proper notice of the arbitration to the party against whom enforcement is sought or failure of the arbitration proceedings to meet minimum standards of due process; (3) lack of jurisdiction, for example because the award relates to a dispute not covered by the arbitration agreement or exceeds the arbitrators’ authority; (4) failure of the composition of the arbitral panel or its procedure to conform to the requirements of the agreement or, if not specified in the agreement, to the law of the country where the arbitration took place; and (5) the award’s not becoming binding in, or being set aside or suspended by a competent authority of, the country in which the award was made. Consistent with the U.S. policy of favoring enforcement of foreign arbitral awards, U.S. courts generally have applied these grounds narrowly so as not to undermine the reliability of international arbitration for resolving disputes.65

Either the party resisting enforcement or the court on its own motion may raise the remaining two grounds for refusing recognition and enforcement under the New York Convention: (i) the dispute was not capable of resolution by arbitration under the law of the jurisdiction where enforcement is sought, and (ii) recognition and enforcement of the award would be contrary to the public policy of that jurisdiction. As noted above, U.S. courts have rarely held disputes arising under cross-border agreements to be non-arbitrable.66 While the claim that recognition and enforcement of the award would be contrary to public policy is raised frequently, U.S. courts generally have construed that defense narrowly out of concern that refusing to give effect to an award on public policy grounds would disrupt the reliance many parties to cross-border agreements place on arbitration as a dispute resolution mechanism.67

An opinion normally can be given that a foreign arbitral award made pursuant to an arbitration clause to which the New York Convention applies will be recognized and enforced in the United States under federal law,68 subject to the exceptions set forth in the New York Convention.69 To give the opinion, the opinion preparers need to satisfy themselves that the New York Convention and the FAA will apply to the award by determining that the Five Arbitration Prerequisites discussed in Part III-3.1 are met. The exceptions to enforceability provided by the New York Convention include a finding by the court asked to enforce the award, applying the law of its country, that the dispute was not arbitrable or that the award violates public policy.70 Prior to the making of a specific award, the opinion preparers cannot determine whether an arbitral award would be subject to the exceptions in the New York Convention for arbitrability or public policy. Therefore, an opinion that a foreign arbitral award will be recognized and enforced in the United States under the New York Convention does not cover the possible application of those exceptions. While this is the case whether or not the opinion includes an express qualification to that effect, many opinion givers make clear in the opinion letter that they are not covering those exceptions, and this Committee endorses that approach.71

III-4 LITIGATION IN THE CROSS-BORDER CONTEXT

Although the parties to cross-border agreements often choose arbitration as the method for resolving disputes (in part because arbitration is governed by a network of international treaties), they also often leave disputes for the courts to decide. When they do, to avoid having to litigate in unfamiliar courts under unfamiliar laws,72 they often include a clause naming the courts of one or more countries as the forum for resolving disputes relating to the agreement, as well as a choice-of-law clause, opinions on which are discussed in Part III-2. Taken together, these clauses are intended to determine both the court or courts in which suit will be brought and the law to be applied. A court named expressly in a forum selection clause is referred to in this Report as a “named court.”

When a forum selection clause is included in a cross-border agreement, the non-U.S. party may request an opinion from counsel for the U.S. party that the clause will be given effect by courts in the Covered Law State. This opinion, which is discussed in Part III-4.1, provides comfort to the non-U.S. party that courts in the Covered Law State will defer to the parties’ choice of courts when deciding whether to consider the merits of a dispute. In domestic U.S. transactions separate opinions are rarely requested or given on the enforceability of forum selection clauses.73

Non-U.S. parties to cross-border agreements that do not provide for arbitration but name a non-U.S. court as the forum for resolving disputes also may request an opinion that courts in the Covered Law State will recognize and enforce a foreign judgment rendered by the named court. This opinion, which is discussed in Part III-4.2, provides comfort to the non-U.S. party that, if it prevails in litigation before a court located in a jurisdiction outside the United States, it will be able to enforce that court’s judgment against the U.S. party in a court in the Covered Law State without a rehearing on the merits. This opinion typically is not requested in domestic U.S. transactions principally because the Full Faith and Credit Clause of the U.S. Constitution requires that a judgment obtained in any U.S. state be enforced in all other U.S. states.

Cross-border agreements often specify how process can be served on parties in different countries. Non-U.S. parties sometimes request an opinion from U.S. counsel that service on the U.S. party it represents in the manner specified in the agreement will be given effect in the courts of the Covered Law State. This opinion is discussed in Part III-4.4.

III-4.1 Forum Selection

This Part deals primarily with opinions on forum selection clauses that name non-U.S. courts as the forum for resolving disputes under the agreement (referred to in this Report as “outbound forum selection clauses”). This Part also deals with opinions on forum selection clauses that name courts in the Covered Law State (referred to in this Report as “inbound forum selection clauses”). Opinions on inbound forum selection clauses are not unusual when cross-border agreements name U.S. courts (often federal courts) as an alternative to non-U.S. courts.

In domestic U.S. transactions in which the agreement includes a forum selection clause a separate opinion ordinarily is not given on the effectiveness of that clause. Instead, unless expressly excluded, the enforceability of the forum selection clause usually is covered by an opinion on the enforceability under the Covered Law of the agreement of which the clause is a part.74 Similarly, in cross-border transactions in which the Covered Law is the Chosen Law (for example New York law is chosen and New York courts are named), an opinion on the enforceability of the agreement under New York law covers the effectiveness of the inbound forum selection clause unless coverage of that clause is expressly excluded from the opinion.75

This Report, however, focuses on cross-border transactions in which the agreement chooses the law of a jurisdiction outside the United States as the governing law. When that is the case, U.S. lawyers are not in a position, as noted earlier, to give an opinion on the enforceability of the agreement as a whole. As a result, non-U.S. parties may ask U.S. counsel for a separate opinion that addresses whether a court in the Covered Law State applying the Covered Law would give effect to the forum selection clause specifically.76 The opinion does not address the related, but different, matter of venue selection (i.e., designation in the agreement of a specific federal district court or a specific court of the Covered Law State as the only one in which suit may be brought).77

III-4.1.1 Permissive and Mandatory Forum Selection Clauses

A forum selection clause can be either permissive or mandatory. A permissive clause, often described also as a “consent to jurisdiction clause,” typically permits the parties to bring suit in courts of a specified state or country, but does not prohibit the parties from bringing suit elsewhere.78 A mandatory clause requires the parties to bring suit only in the courts of the specified state or country to the exclusion of all others. Both permissive and mandatory forum selection clauses typically include the voluntary consent by the parties to the jurisdiction of the named courts.79

Cross-border agreements governed by non-U.S. law that include a forum selection clause80 may provide that in the event of a dispute, the parties either: (1) may bring suit in the courts of the Chosen Law Country (referred to in this Report as a “permissive outbound forum selection clause”), or (2) shall bring suit only in the courts of the Chosen Law Country (referred to in this Report as a “mandatory outbound forum selection clause”).81 Sometimes, a cross-border agreement either: (1) permits the parties to bring suit in courts in the U.S. state82 where the U.S. party to the agreement is located or owns substantial assets (referred to in this Report as a “permissive inbound forum selection clause”), or (2) requires the parties to bring suit only in a specified court in the United States (referred to in this Report as a “mandatory inbound forum selection clause”).83

An opinion that a permissive outbound forum selection clause will be given effect under the Covered Law requires the opinion preparers to conclude that, if the non-U.S. party sues the U.S. party in the non-U.S. court named in the clause, courts in the Covered Law State, if presented with the question, would find that the consent of the opinion giver’s client to be sued in that non-U.S. court is effective under the Covered Law.84

An opinion that a permissive inbound forum selection clause naming the courts of the Covered Law State will be given effect under the Covered Law requires the opinion preparers to: (1) make the same determinations regarding personal and subject matter jurisdiction they would have to make if they were giving an enforceability opinion under the Covered Law on an agreement containing a forum selection clause naming the courts of the Covered Law State in a domestic U.S. transaction;85 and (2) determine that the Covered Law does not prevent the non-U.S. opinion recipient, by reason of its status as a non-U.S. person, from bringing suit in the court or courts in the Covered Law State named in the clause.

An opinion on a mandatory outbound forum selection clause requires the opinion preparers to conclude that courts in the Covered Law State applying the Covered Law would grant the request of the non-U.S. opinion recipient to refuse to hear the case on its merits, and therefore would dismiss it, if the opinion giver’s client, contrary to the agreement, sues the non-U.S. party in those courts. This dismissal is sometimes referred to as an “ouster” of the case to the courts of the Chosen Law Country named in the agreement.

An opinion on a mandatory inbound forum selection clause requires the opinion preparers to conclude that, under the Covered Law, the parties’ choice of the named state or federal court would be given effect.

The work required to give an opinion on a permissive forum selection clause (discussed in Part III-4.1.3) is different from that required for a mandatory forum selection clause (discussed in Part III-4.1.4). Thus, an initial question for the opinion preparers is whether they should treat the clause on which they are giving an opinion as permissive or mandatory. Although, depending on the wording of a particular clause, answering that question might appear easy, it often is not for the reasons discussed below.86

As discussed later in this Part, courts in the Covered Law State may look to the non-U.S. Chosen Law when deciding whether a particular forum selection clause is permissive or mandatory.87 The opinion preparers, on the other hand, would read the clause as it would be interpreted under the Covered Law in deciding whether it is permissive or mandatory.88 In the event the two readings produce different results, the opinion preparers, to clarify for the recipient the manner in which they are analyzing the forum selection clause for purposes of the opinion, should consider including in the opinion letter language making clear whether they are treating the clause as permissive or mandatory.89 If the opinion preparers choose not to do so, an alternative approach is for them to analyze the clause both ways—i.e., as both permissive and mandatory.90 That approach, however, will require them to do additional work and that work likely will be difficult to justify on a cost-benefit basis. Moreover, depending on the Covered Law, it may not be possible to give the opinion if the clause is analyzed as both mandatory and permissive, while the opinion could have been given had the clause been treated only as permissive.91

III-4.1.2 Applicable Law

In deciding whether to give effect to a forum selection clause, a court in the Covered Law State will have to determine, as to each issue it is required to resolve, whether to apply: (1) the Covered Law, (2) the substantive law of the Chosen Law Country (the Chosen Contract Law), or (3) the procedural law of the named non-U.S. court (the Selected Forum Law).92 This Report focuses primarily on the common cross-border situation in which the Chosen Contract Law and the Selected Forum Law are the law of the Chosen Law Country.93 The issues a court in the Covered Law State typically will consider are: (i) whether a forum selection clause is presumptively effective under the Covered Law (this is often referred to as “enforceability in principle”); (ii) whether the specific circumstances of the case before it rebut the presumptive effectiveness of the parties’ choice of forum; (iii) whether the forum selection clause is invalidated by defects in the formation of the agreement such as fraud, duress, or mistake; (iv) whether the agreement itself is valid under the Chosen Contract Law; (v) whether the forum selection clause is permissive or mandatory; and (vi) whether it covers the dispute in question. Prior to 2006 U.S. courts generally applied the law of the state where they were located to all these issues, even when the agreement selected non-U.S. law as its governing law.94 Starting with a decision by the U.S. Court of Appeals for the Tenth Circuit in 2006, however, a trend has developed of applying the Chosen Contract Law to questions relating to the validity and interpretation of forum selection clauses in cross-border agreements.95 While this view has gained widespread acceptance, its acceptance is not universal.96

Therefore, when a court in the Covered Law State is asked to give effect to a forum selection clause in an agreement that chooses the law of a jurisdiction outside the United States as its governing law, the court can be expected to apply the law of the Chosen Law Country to at least some issues bearing on effectiveness of the clause, depending on the state and the wording of the agreement. The result, as discussed in detail in Part III-4.1.3 for permissive forum selection clauses and Part III-4.1.4 for mandatory forum selection clauses, is that in giving an opinion that a clause naming non-U.S. courts will be given effect under the Covered Law, the opinion preparers need to rely on assumptions regarding issues governed by non-U.S. law (such as the formation, validity, and interpretation of the contract and personal and subject matter jurisdiction of the named court), which they can do by relying on the Omnibus Cross-Border Assumption.

III-4.1.3 Opinions Addressing Permissive Forum Selection Clauses

The purpose of a permissive forum selection clause is to give a party wishing to bring a legal action the ability to bring it in any of the courts named in the clause. Thus, a clause may provide a non-U.S. party flexibility to bring suit against a U.S. party in a court in the Chosen Law Country or in a court in a U.S. state (which may be the Covered Law State) where the U.S. party has assets or operations by naming both courts. While the same flexibility might be provided by not having a forum selection clause in the agreement, having a permissive clause, particularly one stating the consent of all parties to being sued in the named courts helps ensure that the named courts will have personal jurisdiction over the parties when they otherwise might not.

An opinion that a permissive forum selection clause will be given effect under the Covered Law confirms the right of the recipient to bring suit against the U.S. party in the named courts of a jurisdiction that is named in the clause. A permissive clause does not prohibit the parties, either expressly or implicitly, from bringing suit in courts in other jurisdictions (which thus include courts in the Covered Law State if they are not named). If, however, a permissive forum selection clause does not name courts in the Covered Law State, the opinion does not address whether those courts will hear the case if suit is brought there.

Whether a clause is permissive outbound or permissive inbound, as discussed below, an opinion on its effectiveness only covers issues governed by the Covered Law. The effectiveness of a forum selection clause, however, also depends on matters that are governed by non-U.S. law, for example formation of the contract and validity of the forum selection clause under the Chosen Law.97 To the extent that these matters are not governed by the Covered Law, the opinion preparers are entitled to assume that the agreement generally and the forum selection clause specifically are valid, binding, and enforceable under the Chosen Law, which they can do by relying, without so stating, on the Omnibus Cross-Border Assumption.98

III-4.1.3.1 PERMISSIVE CLAUSES NAMING COURTS OUTSIDE THE UNITED STATES

A U.S. lawyer normally will be able to give an opinion that under the Covered Law a court in the Covered Law State will give effect to a forum selection clause permitting suit to be brought in a named court in a non-U.S. jurisdiction named in a cross-border agreement.99 The opinion means that the Covered Law does not prohibit a U.S. party represented by the opinion giver from consenting to the jurisdiction of the named court and that conditions imposed by the Covered Law, if any, on the U.S. party’s agreement to be sued in the named non-U.S. jurisdiction have been met. The opinion does not mean that a court in the Covered Law State would be bound by a decision of a named non-U.S. court if the non-U.S. party later brings an action in the Covered Law State to have a foreign judgment enforced.100

As a matter of U.S. customary practice, the opinion is understood not to cover specialized federal or state statutes, rules, or regulations that may prohibit or restrict commerce with jurisdictions outside the United States in which a named court is located, unless they are addressed expressly.101 The opinion also does not address the effectiveness of the submission by the opinion giver’s client to the jurisdiction of the named non-U.S. court under the Chosen Contract Law or the Selected Forum Law, which are covered by the Omnibus Cross-Border Assumption. Thus, the opinion provides a non-U.S. recipient comfort only on the narrow legal issue that the Covered Law does not shield the opinion giver’s client from its agreement to be sued by the recipient in a named court located outside the United States.

III-4.1.3.2 PERMISSIVE CLAUSES NAMING COURTS IN THE UNITED STATES

A U.S. lawyer ordinarily will be able to give an opinion that under the Covered Law a court in the Covered Law State will give effect to a permissive forum selection clause naming courts in the Covered Law State. The opinion means that the clause is enforceable against the parties because they submitted voluntarily to the jurisdiction of courts in the Covered Law State, even though the agreement requires those courts to apply the law of another country in resolving the dispute.102 If the clause names a U.S. federal court as one of the courts where the parties may bring suit, the opinion means that the named federal court also will give the clause effect under the Federal Rules of Civil Procedure. While many opinion givers do not take an exception for the possible lack of federal subject matter jurisdiction, some do.103

Giving an opinion on the enforceability of a permissive inbound forum selection clause in an agreement choosing the law of a jurisdiction outside the United States as its governing law requires the opinion preparers to be satisfied that under the Covered Law the named courts of the Covered Law State would have personal jurisdiction over the parties and subject matter jurisdiction over the matters covered by the clause.104 The opinion preparers also must be satisfied that the Covered Law does not prevent the opinion recipient, by reason of its status as a non-U.S. person, from bringing suit in the named court in the Covered Law State as a procedural matter.105 The opinion does not, however, cover issues other than jurisdiction that may impair the ability of the recipient to maintain an action in the Covered Law State, such as a failure to qualify to do business there when otherwise required to initiate suit.106 If the agreement includes a waiver of the doctrine of forum non conveniens, the opinion also covers the effectiveness of the waiver, absent an express exception. If the agreement does not include such a waiver, the opinion does not cover the possible refusal of the named court to hear the case based on the application of that doctrine.107

When an agreement contains a permissive forum selection clause, different parties may bring suit in different courts over the same disputed matter. An opinion on a permissive forum selection clause does not address whether a court in the Covered Law State would grant a motion to dismiss or stay the case if one party has brought suit in that court and another party has brought suit with regard to the same disputed matter in another court.108

III-4.1.4 Opinions Addressing Mandatory Forum Selection Clauses

III-4.1.4.1 MANDATORY CLAUSES NAMING COURTS OUTSIDE THE UNITED STATES

To give an opinion on the effectiveness under the Covered Law of a mandatory forum selection clause naming a non-U.S. court as the exclusive forum for resolving disputes, the opinion preparers need to satisfy themselves that, if the U.S. party they represent sues the other party in a court in the Covered Law State in violation of the agreement, the court will decline to consider the merits of the case.109 Although state law varies, most U.S. states have adopted the so-called modern view that forum selection clauses will be given effect unless doing so would be unfair or unreasonable or violate a strong public policy of the state.110 Some U.S. states, however, adhere to an older view that courts are generally free to determine for themselves whether to take jurisdiction over cases brought before them based on a variety of discretionary factors, without giving meaningful weight to the parties’ contractual choice.

III-4.1.4.2 BREMEN AND THE MODERN VIEW

The modern view was adopted in the cross-border context by the U.S. Supreme Court in 1972 in M/S Bremen & Unterweser Reederel, GmbH v. Zapata Off-Shore Co.111 In Bremen the Court held112 that a forum selection clause is presumptively effective and should not be set aside unless the party challenging it makes a strong showing that: (i) enforcement would be unreasonable and unjust; (ii) the clause is invalid for such reasons as fraud or overreaching, undue influence, or abuse of bargaining power; or (iii) giving effect to a forum selection clause when it would require the case to be dismissed in favor of another court will result in the enforcement by that other court of a contractual provision that would contravene a strong public policy of the jurisdiction where suit is brought, whether declared by statute or by judicial decision.113 This Report refers to these grounds collectively as the “Bremen exception.” To protect identified classes of contracting parties from exploitative contractual terms, some states have adopted statutes codifying specific non-waivable public policy rules that the courts of those states often treat as exceptions to the enforceability of mandatory forum selection clauses naming courts in other states or countries.114

If the Covered Law State has adopted the modern view, an opinion normally can be given that under the Covered Law a court in the Covered Law State will give effect to a mandatory outbound forum selection clause when the agreement chooses the law of a jurisdiction outside the United States as its governing law115 and names a court in that or another jurisdiction outside the United States as the exclusive forum for resolving disputes.116 Different states, however, have adopted different versions of the modern view, and some versions may lead the opinion preparers to question whether the state whose law they are covering has, in fact, adopted the modern view. Thus, the opinion preparers need to tailor their opinion to the specifics of the Covered Law. Even if the opinion does not expressly refer to the Bremen exception, an opinion on the effectiveness of a mandatory forum selection clause, whether or not it names a U.S. court, is understood as a matter of U.S. customary practice not to cover the possibility that a court, applying the Bremen exception, will decline to give the clause effect.117

When giving an opinion on the effectiveness of a mandatory outbound forum selection clause, the opinion preparers need to consider whether to refer expressly to the Bremen exception. In domestic U.S. transactions, the forum selection clause, which normally names a court in the Covered Law State, is covered by an opinion on the enforceability of the entire agreement under the Covered Law (which also is the Chosen Law when an enforceability opinion is given on the entire agreement).118 In cross-border transactions, however, a forum selection clause often names the courts of a jurisdiction other than the Covered Law State when it is included in an agreement that does not choose the Covered Law as its governing law. When the named court is not in the Covered Law State and the Chosen Law is not the Covered Law, a court applying the Covered Law may decline to give a mandatory forum selection clause effect not only on the basis of the first two prongs of the Bremen exception, but also on the basis of the third—strong public policy—prong.119 Nevertheless, as in domestic U.S. transactions, an opinion on the effectiveness of a mandatory outbound forum selection clause is understood, as a matter of U.S. customary practice, not to cover the possibility that a court will decline to give the clause effect on the basis of the third prong of the Bremen exception as well as the first two. Because of the greater likelihood that the Bremen exception, particularly the public policy prong, will apply in cross-border transactions and because non-U.S. recipients are less likely than U.S. recipients to be familiar with the Bremen exception, this Committee recommends that an express reference to the Bremen exception be included in opinion letters containing opinions on mandatory forum selection clauses naming courts outside the United States.120

While the opinion only covers issues governed by the Covered Law, the effectiveness of a mandatory forum selection clause also depends on matters governed by the non-U.S. Chosen Law such as the validity of the agreement as a whole and the enforceability of the clause itself.121 These matters, however, are covered by the Omnibus Cross-Border Assumption, whether stated or not, and, therefore, need not be addressed specifically in the opinion letter.122

A court in the Covered Law State may only be willing to decline jurisdiction over the case if it is satisfied that the named non-U.S. court will give effect to the parties’ choice of forum and hear the case if suit is brought in that court; otherwise the parties might not have any forum in which to resolve their dispute. These and other procedural matters ordinarily will be governed by the law of the jurisdiction where the named court is located (lex fori). Therefore, an opinion on a mandatory forum selection clause naming a court outside the United States must be based on an assumption that the named court will recognize the parties’ submission to its jurisdiction and decide the merits of the claims being made. As with other issues governed by non-U.S. law, such as the formation, validity, and interpretation of the contract, the personal and subject matter jurisdiction of the named court is covered by the Omnibus Cross-Border Assumption.123

To conclude, an opinion on the effectiveness of a mandatory forum selection clause naming a court outside the United States provides comfort to the non-U.S. recipient that courts in the Covered Law State will defer to the parties’ choice of the named court as the exclusive forum for resolving disputes.124 This deference is particularly important for non-U.S. parties who want not only the Chosen Law to govern but also the courts of the Chosen Law Country to be the only courts that can resolve disputes relating to the agreement (for example because of their expertise in applying the Chosen Law). As discussed above, a U.S. lawyer usually will be able to give the opinion when the Covered Law State has adopted the modern view, but, whether or not the opinion letter so states expressly, the opinion is subject to the Bremen exception and the Omnibus Cross-Border Assumption.

III-4.1.4.3 MANDATORY CLAUSES NAMING COURTS IN THE UNITED STATES

In the unusual case in which a cross-border agreement that does not choose U.S. law as its governing law selects courts in the Covered Law State as the exclusive forum for resolving disputes relating to the agreement, a U.S. lawyer ordinarily can give an opinion that under the Covered Law the mandatory inbound forum selection clause will be given effect.125 The opinion means that the clause is enforceable against the parties because they submitted voluntarily to the jurisdiction of the named courts in the Covered Law State, even though those courts will be applying the law of another country in resolving the dispute.126 The opinion does not cover issues other than jurisdiction that may prevent the recipient from maintaining an action in the named courts of the Covered Law State, such as the opinion recipient’s failure to qualify to do business in the Covered Law State when otherwise required.127 The opinion does not cover venue.

Prior to 2013, federal law was unclear as to how much deference a U.S. federal court was required to give a mandatory forum selection clause if suit was brought in a federal court other than the named court. The U.S. Supreme Court clarified the law in Atlantic Marine,128 holding that, so long as the federal courts have jurisdiction under federal law, federal courts are required to give controlling weight to the parties’ choice of the named court as the exclusive forum in all but the most exceptional cases.129

III-4.2 Recognition and Enforcement of Foreign Judgments in the United States

Because the non-U.S. parties to a cross-border agreement may obtain a judgment for breach of the agreement outside the United States but then have to enforce the judgment in the United States (where the U.S. party’s assets are located),130 they may request an opinion that courts in the Covered Law State will recognize and enforce131 judgments obtained in non-U.S. courts without a rehearing on the merits of the case.132 As discussed below, a U.S. lawyer usually can give this opinion when the Covered Law State has a statute in effect that provides for the enforceability of foreign judgments.133

Many U.S. states have adopted a version of the Uniform Foreign-Country Money Judgments Recognition Act (the Uniform Act).134 The Uniform Act governs the recognition of a judgment by a court of a foreign country that grants or denies recovery of a sum of money,135 other than for taxes, fines, or domestic support, and that is final, conclusive, and enforceable under the law of that country, unless one of the grounds for nonrecognition specified in the Uniform Act applies. The Uniform Act provides three mandatory grounds for nonrecognition136 and eight discretionary grounds.137 With the exception of reciprocity as a condition for recognition of a foreign judgment,138 the Uniform Act codifies general common law rules of comity.

In states that have adopted a version of the Uniform Act, U.S. lawyers normally can give an opinion that a foreign judgment against the U.S. party they represent will be recognized and enforced by a court applying the Covered Law subject to the prerequisites and exceptions set forth in the version of the Uniform Act enacted in the Covered Law State. Some opinion givers choose to spell out the precise statutory prerequisites or grounds for nonrecognition under the statute, while others limit the opinion’s coverage by incorporating the statutory prerequisites and exceptions by reference in the opinion without restating or summarizing them.139 Whether the opinion so states or not, the opinion does not cover compliance with statutory prerequisites because that determination can be made only after a foreign judgment has actually been rendered.

In states that have not adopted the Uniform Act or a statute to similar effect, the law of comity normally governs the recognition and enforcement of foreign judgments. Depending on the case law in their state, lawyers in those states may or may not be able to give an opinion under the law they are covering that a judgment by a foreign court will be recognized and enforced in the Covered Law State.140 As a condition of enforcement, some states require that the courts of the foreign country where the judgment was obtained recognize and enforce, in a reciprocal manner, judgments by their state courts. A determination that the reciprocity requirement is met may be difficult or impossible to make without the advice of a lawyer with expertise in the law of the foreign country, and therefore, a U.S. lawyer who is willing to give an opinion may need to rely on an express assumption to that effect.

III-4.3 2005 Hague Convention on Choice of Court Agreements

In 2005 the Hague Conference on Private International Law adopted the Convention on Choice of Courts Agreements (the Hague Convention) with the goal of achieving for mandatory forum selection clauses in cross-border agreements and resulting judgments what the New York Convention achieved for arbitration clauses and resulting awards.141 The Hague Convention was signed by the United States (subject to Senate consent) on January 19, 2009, and was also signed by Singapore on March 25, 2015, the European Community on April 1, 2009, and Mexico on September 26, 2007.142 It is expected to be signed in the near future by Argentina, Australia, and Canada, among others. The Hague Convention came into effect on October 1, 2015.143 Although commentators expect the U.S. Senate to consent to its becoming effective in the United States, full ratification by the United States likely will be delayed until implementing legislation has been enacted (as was the case with U.S. accession to the New York Convention).144

For the Hague Convention to apply to a forum selection clause, the clause must: (1) be agreed to by at least two parties, (2) be in writing or expressed in another acceptable means of communication, (3) designate the courts of one signatory country to the exclusion of all other courts for the resolution of disputes arising under the agreement, and (4) relate to international civil or commercial cases (the Four Hague Prerequisites).145 The Hague Convention by its terms applies only to mandatory forum selection clauses, but it permits a signa-tory country to declare that it also will apply to permissive forum selection clauses meeting its other prerequisites.146 The Hague Convention provides that: (i) the named court must hear the case if the mandatory forum selection clause is effective according to the standards established by the Hague Convention, unless the clause is null and void under the law of the named court’s country;147 and (ii) if a party to the agreement commences an action in a court other than the named court, that court must dismiss the case if the complaint relates to matters covered by the mandatory forum selection clause, unless one of five exceptions applies.148 The Hague Convention applies to commercial agreements and specifically excludes, among others: agreements involving consumers; employment agreements; real property and tenancies; the validity, nullity, or dissolution of business entities and the validity of decisions of their governing bodies; and the validity of intellectual property rights other than copyright unless the action is brought for a breach of contract.149

III-4.3.1 Effectiveness of Forum Selection Clause Under the Hague Convention

If it is signed and ratified by enough countries, the Hague Convention should achieve a meaningful degree of harmonization of legal standards that are currently a source of uncertainty, as discussed earlier in this Report. For example, Article 2 provides that the Hague Convention does not apply to tort or criminal claims that do not arise under the agreement, Article 3 provides that a forum selection clause shall be deemed mandatory unless the parties expressly provide otherwise, and Article 6 provides that determinations by a court that is not named in a forum selection clause as to whether an agreement is null and void must be made under the law of the jurisdiction in which the named court is located. On some of these topics U.S. courts currently are divided, and differences between their interpretation of U.S. law and the law of other countries can be meaningful. The Hague Convention also allows a court that is not named in the forum selection clause to apply, at least in part, the law of the jurisdiction where it is located (as opposed to the Chosen Contract Law or the Selected Forum Law) to some issues that bear upon the enforcement of the clause. For example, Article 6 of the Convention provides that grounds for not enforcing a forum selection clause include lack of capacity to enter into the agreement, manifest injustice, or violation of public policy, in each case as determined under the law of the jurisdiction where the court being asked to enforce a mandatory forum selection clause naming a court in another jurisdiction is located.

Assuming that the Hague Convention is ratified by the United States without additional qualifications, U.S. opinion givers should be able to give an opinion that a court in the Covered Law State will give effect to a mandatory forum selection clause that satisfies the Four Hague Prerequisites and names the courts of a jurisdiction outside the United States that is a signatory to the Convention, subject to the exceptions set forth in the Hague Convention.150 To give the opinion, the opinion preparers would need to confirm that the Four Hague Prerequisites are satisfied. Because the Hague Convention provides that exceptions similar to the Bremen exception can be invoked by a court not named in a mandatory forum selection clause to deny enforcement of the clause, the discussion in Part III-4.1.4.2 regarding the Bremen exception would apply to opinions under the Convention.151

If a mandatory forum selection clause names a court outside the United States and the agreement containing the clause chooses non-U.S. law as its governing law, the opinion would not cover the threshold issue of whether the clause is valid under either the Chosen Contract Law or the law of the jurisdiction outside the United States where the named court is located. Because these matters are not governed by the Covered Law, the opinion preparers are entitled to assume that both the agreement generally and the forum selection clause specifically are valid, binding, and enforceable under all applicable non-U.S laws. For this purpose, the opinion preparers may rely without so stating on the Omnibus Cross-Border Assumption.152

III-4.3.2 Recognition and Enforcement of Judgments Under the Hague Convention

The Hague Convention provides that, if a court named in a mandatory forum selection clause satisfying the Four Hague Prerequisites renders a judgment on the merits153 of a case and that court is in a signatory country, the courts of all other signatory countries must recognize and enforce that judgment without reviewing the merits, unless the judgment falls within one of the exceptions established by the Hague Convention.154 Except for the right to review the named court’s decision to determine whether one of the exceptions set forth in the Hague Convention applies, the courts of signatory countries will be bound by the findings of fact and decisions of law of the named court. The Hague Convention provides that the amount of compensatory damages awarded is not reviewable, but allows a court of a signatory country that is asked to enforce a foreign judgment to refuse to recognize awards of punitive or exemplary damages. The enforcing court may postpone recognition and enforcement of a judgment if the named court is reviewing the case or the time limits to seek review of that court’s decision have not expired.

Assuming that the Hague Convention is ratified by the United States without additional qualifications, U.S. opinion givers normally should be able to give an opinion that a judgment by a court named in a mandatory155 forum selection clause that is located in a country that is a signatory to the Hague Convention will be recognized and enforced in the United States, subject to the exceptions set forth in the Hague Convention.156 To give the opinion, the opinion preparers would need to determine that the forum selection clause satisfies the Four Hague Prerequisites on the date of the opinion letter. Because the Hague Convention provides that a violation of the public policy of the country where enforcement is sought is one of the grounds for refusing recognition and enforcement of a foreign judgment, U.S. opinion preparers should not have to include an express public policy exception in their opinion letters (although to help reduce the risk of misunderstanding they may choose to do so).

III-4.4 Service of Process

Agreements in cross-border transactions often contain a provision that specifies the manner in which a party wishing to bring suit can serve process on the other party. Such a clause provides certainty and allows parties such as international lenders to avoid the complexity, cost, and delay of resorting to procedures established by multilateral conventions or bilateral treaties for international service of process if the party being sued is not in the same country as the party bringing suit.157 When a cross-border agreement contains a service of process clause, non-U.S. parties sometimes request an opinion from counsel for the U.S. party that service on the U.S. party in the manner specified in the agreement will be effective under the Covered Law. This opinion addresses the non-U.S. party’s concern that a court in the Covered Law State would find service in the manner specified in the agreement inadequate to establish jurisdiction over the opinion giver’s client.

III-4.4.1 Service of Process for Suits in Named Courts Outside the United States

When the agreement contains an outbound forum selection clause naming a court outside the United States and the agreement does not choose U.S. law as its governing law, an opinion of U.S. counsel that service of process in the manner specified in the agreement is effective provides a non-U.S. recipient comfort that a court in the Covered Law State will not refuse to recognize a judgment of the named non-U.S. court against the opinion giver’s client on the grounds that the service made on the opinion giver’s client was inadequate.158 The opinion does not address whether the service of process clause is effective under the Chosen Law or whether the methods specified in the clause satisfy the requirements for validly commencing the suit in the named court outside the United States. These matters, which are not governed by U.S. law, are covered by the Omnibus Cross-Border Assumption, on which the opinion preparers are entitled to rely without so stating.159

If a court in the Covered Law State is later asked to enforce a judgment of the named non-U.S. court against the U.S. party, the law of the Covered Law State will determine whether the method used to serve process for purposes of bringing suit in the named court outside the United States was permissible under the Covered Law. If it is held not to be permissible, the court in the Covered Law State will likely refuse to recognize and enforce the non-U.S. court’s judgment, even though (i) under the named non-U.S. court’s procedural rules it had personal jurisdiction over the U.S. party against whom the judgment was rendered and (ii) under the Chosen Contract Law the forum selection clause was valid.160

Giving the opinion should present no difficulty if under the Covered Law the non-U.S. party seeking to have a judgment of a court outside the United States enforced could have used the methods for service of process specified in the agreement to bring suit against the U.S. party in a court in the Covered Law State (assuming for this purpose that bringing suit in the Covered Law State is permitted under the agreement).161 Thus, the opinion normally will present no difficulty when the agreement only permits service in person on the U.S. party or on its duly appointed agent.162

If the Covered Law does not clearly permit the methods for service of process specified in the agreement to be used to bring suit against the U.S. party in a court in the Covered Law State, the opinion preparers will need to consider whether service by those methods would be grounds for a court in the Covered Law State to refuse to recognize a judgment of a court outside the United States.163 The laws of many states impose special conditions on, or expressly disallow, waivers of service of process and may restrict the effectiveness of service of process by mail, publication, or methods other than personal service or service on an agent, if they do not assure adequate and timely notice to a defendant that a suit has been brought against it. Depending on the method in question, the law may not be clear enough to permit an opinion to be given or may only permit a reasoned opinion.

III-4.4.2 Service of Process When Suit Can Be Brought in the United States

If a forum selection clause in a cross-border agreement choosing non-U.S. law as its governing law names courts in the Covered Law State as a forum in which the parties may bring suit to resolve disputes under the agreement, the opinion provides a non-U.S. recipient comfort that under the Covered Law service of process in the manner specified in the agreement will establish personal jurisdiction over the opinion giver’s client if the recipient sues the opinion giver’s client in those courts. The opinion also provides the non-U.S. party comfort that under the Covered Law the methods for serving process specified in the agreement will be effective if, after obtaining a judgment from a court outside the United States, the non-U.S. party sues the U.S. party in a court in the Covered Law State to enforce that judgment.164

Whether the opinion can be given will, again, depend on the methods for service of process specified in the agreement and the law of the Covered Law State. Some states have adopted statutes or rules of court specifying which methods of service of process are permissible, while others have left that matter for the courts to decide. Sometimes, the law covering a particular method specified in the agreement will not be clear enough to permit an opinion to be given or may only permit a reasoned opinion.

III-4.4.3 Service of Process Through Agents Outside the United States

Cross-border agreements often provide for the appointment by the U.S. party of an attorney-in-fact or other agent in a foreign country and permit notices to be given to the U.S. party and service of process to be made on the U.S. party through that agent. The non-U.S. party to a cross-border agreement sometimes requests an opinion of U.S. counsel that the agent has been duly and validly appointed by the U.S. party. State law in the United States generally permits the appointment of agents for service of process. If the creation and scope of the agency are governed by the Covered Law, the requested opinion normally can be given.

The non-U.S. party sometimes requests an additional opinion that under the Covered Law it is permitted to serve the U.S. party through the U.S. party’s appointed agent in the manner specified in the agreement.165 Giving this opinion should present no difficulty if an opinion could be given that (i) the agent was duly appointed and (ii) as discussed earlier in this Part, the methods of service of process specified in the agreement are permissible under the Covered Law. If the agency relationship is not governed by the Covered Law (for example because it is created under an agreement governed by non-U.S. law), the opinion giver may assume the validity of the agent’s appointment under the governing non-U.S. law by relying, without so stating, on the Omnibus Cross-Border Assumption.166 The opinion in that event would mean that under the Covered Law the U.S. party duly authorized, executed, and delivered the document appointing the agent,167 the appointment of the agent is effective against the U.S. party, assuming the validity of the agency relationship under applicable non-U.S. law, and service can be made on the U.S. party by serving the agent.

III-5 ENTITY STATUS, POWER, AND ACTION

If an agreement designates non-U.S. law as its governing law, that law governs the validity, binding effect, and enforceability of the agreement. The Chosen Law, however, does not govern the corporate power of the U.S. party to the agreement to enter into and perform its obligations under the agreement or its authorization, execution, and delivery of the agreement. Closing opinions typically cover these matters in domestic U.S. transactions, and the non-U.S. parties to cross-border agreements ordinarily request opinions on these matters from U.S. counsel. The wording of these opinions and the work the opinion preparers are expected to perform to support them are the same in cross-border transactions and domestic U.S. transactions because the law governing them is the same—i.e., the law of the state of the U.S. party’s organization.168

In deciding whether they can give an opinion that a U.S. corporation or other legal entity has the power to enter into and perform its obligations under, and has duly authorized, the agreement (a power and authority opinion), the opinion preparers need to understand the general scope of the activities their client is committing to perform because some activities may exceed the client’s power under its organizational documents or the law under which it was formed.169 To give the opinion, however, the opinion preparers do not have to consider every provision of the agreement. Rather, all they need to understand is the nature of the business activities covered by, and the general scope of their client’s undertakings in, the agreement. Ordinarily, as in domestic U.S. transactions, the activities a client is committing to perform, for example repayment of a loan with interest, purchase of goods or services, or issuance of shares of capital stock or other securities, are readily apparent based on the opinion preparers’ familiarity with the client, transaction, and agreement. When those activities are not obvious, however, for example because an agreement governed by non-U.S. law uses concepts or terminology having no counterpart in the Covered Law, the opinion preparers may wish to seek clarification.170

In the cross-border context, some aspects of due execution and delivery, such as authentication by a notary, attestation by witnesses, or special form requirements for specific types of agreements or undertakings, may be governed by the non-U.S. Chosen Contract Law or by some law other than the Covered Law, such as the law of the jurisdiction where the agreement is executed and delivered.171 Because due execution and delivery are required for an agreement to be an enforceable obligation, the opinion preparers are permitted to rely, without so stating, on the Omnibus Cross-Border Assumption to the extent that they are not governed by the Covered Law.172

III-6 NO BREACH OR DEFAULT

The non-U.S. party to a cross-border agreement may ask U.S. counsel for the U.S. party for an opinion that the execution and delivery of the agreement and its performance by the opinion giver’s client will not result in a breach of or default under other contracts to which the opinion giver’s client is a party.173 This opinion addresses the concern of the opinion recipient that the transaction might have an adverse effect on the U.S. party under its existing contracts, for example because the transaction would violate a negative covenant, or on the opinion recipient, for example because the transaction might expose the non-U.S. party to a claim that entering into the agreement tortiously interferes with an existing contract of the U.S. party.

When a cross-border agreement chooses non-U.S. law as its governing law, giving a no breach or default opinion can be more difficult than in a domestic U.S. transaction even though the wording of the opinion is the same. That is because the opinion requires an understanding of the specific contractual obligations the opinion preparers’ client is undertaking (not just the transaction’s general scope and structure as is required to give a power and authority opinion) and the opinion preparers cannot be expected to have expertise in the non-U.S. law governing those obligations. Nevertheless, giving a no breach or default opinion may be possible to the extent that the opinion preparers do not need a complete understanding of every obligation their client is undertaking but instead only of those obligations being undertaken by the client pursuant to the agreement that could result in a breach of or default under the particular contracts to which the client is already a party that the opinion preparers specify they are covering in the opinion.174 What those obligations are in a particular situation, and therefore whether the opinion can be given, will depend on: (1) the nature of the transaction and (2) the terms of the contracts being covered by the opinion. For example, for U.S. counsel to give a no breach or default opinion in a cross-border loan transaction in which the loan agreement is governed by German law, the opinion preparers need not have the level of understanding of the agreement they would need when giving an enforceability opinion on behalf of the U.S. borrower in a comparable domestic U.S. transaction on a loan agreement choosing the Covered Law as its governing law. Instead, all the opinion preparers need is an understanding of those provisions of the loan agreement (for example the granting of a security interest) that may cause other contracts to which the borrower is already a party to be breached.

Recognizing that they may not fully understand each and every obligation their client is undertaking under an agreement governed by non-U.S. law, the opinion preparers nevertheless may decide, depending on the nature of the agreement, its complexity, and other factors, that they can give a no breach or default opinion based on their general familiarity with the client, the transaction, and the agreement.175 In making that decision, the opinion preparers may choose to seek additional clarification about the client’s obligations from their client or from counsel knowledgeable about the Chosen Law.176

Normally a company is a party to many contracts, only some of which are likely to be of practical concern. Therefore, the parties and their counsel should identify which contracts are to be covered by the opinion and consider the practicality of doing the work needed to address them.177 The contracts identified for coverage may include contracts governed by the law of a jurisdiction other than the Covered Law State. In domestic U.S. transactions, when a contract covered by a no breach or default opinion chooses as its governing law the law of another U.S. state, U.S. customary practice permits the opinion preparers to interpret that contract as lawyers in the Covered Law State would understand it.178

This approach applies whether or not stated, but to help reduce the risk of misunderstanding, some U.S. lawyers spell it out in their opinion letters.179

When a no breach or default opinion covers contracts governed by the law of a U.S. state other than the Covered Law State, the same approach works as well for cross-border transactions as it does for domestic U.S. transactions. That approach does not, however, work well if the opinion preparers are asked to give a no breach or default opinion covering contracts governed by the law of a jurisdiction other than a U.S. state. Foreign contracts to which the opinion giver’s client is a party are likely to contain terms that are unfamiliar to a U.S. lawyer and their interpretation may depend on legal concepts that do not have counterparts in U.S. law. Foreign contracts also may incorporate (with or without explicit reference) provisions supplied by statutes in the non-U.S. jurisdictions whose law they choose as their governing law. Thus, foreign contracts may have a meaning that is materially different from what the opinion preparers would think if they based their analysis on the approach permitted by U.S. customary practice for interpreting contracts governed by the laws of U.S. states other than the Covered Law State. Therefore, U.S. lawyers giving no breach or default opinions should not be expected to cover contracts that are governed by the law of jurisdictions outside the United States.180

In addition to a no breach or default opinion, non-U.S. opinion recipients (like opinion recipients in domestic U.S. transactions) sometimes request an opinion that the execution, delivery, and performance of the agreement will not violate judgments, injunctions, orders, or decrees to which the opinion giver’s client is subject. The analysis discussed above for giving a no breach or default opinion in a cross-border transaction also applies to giving this opinion. As they do when identifying contracts to be covered by a no breach or default opinion, the parties and their counsel should discuss early in the transaction whether judgments, injunctions, orders, or decrees are to be covered and, if so, how they should be identified in the opinion letter.

III-7 NO VIOLATION OF U.S. STATUTES, RULES, OR REGULATIONS; NO APPROVALS OR FILINGS

Opinion recipients sometimes request an opinion that execution and delivery of an agreement by the company do not, and performance by the company of its obligations under the agreement will not, violate statutes, rules, and regulations under the Covered Law.181 This opinion covers statutes, rules, and regulations that, if violated, will subject the company to a fine, penalty, or other governmental sanction.182

Despite its apparent breadth, a no violation opinion does not cover all statutes, rules, and regulations of the Covered Law because no lawyer, no matter how diligent, can reasonably be expected to be familiar with every law that might possibly apply. Instead, as a matter of U.S. customary practice, the opinion is understood to cover only statutes, rules, and regulations183 that a lawyer in the Covered Law State exercising customary professional diligence would reasonably be expected to recognize as being applicable to the entity, transaction, or agreement to which the opinion relates.184 Moreover, as a matter of U.S. customary practice, even some laws that are clearly applicable, such as tax, insolvency, and securities laws, are not covered unless an opinion refers to them expressly.185

A no violation opinion in a cross-border transaction raises the same issues as its counterpart in a domestic U.S. transaction: (1) what statutes, rules, and regulations would the opinion preparers, exercising customary professional diligence, reasonably be expected to recognize as being applicable to the entity, transaction, or agreement to which the opinion relates; and (2) which statutes, rules, and regulations, even if applicable, should be understood not to be covered unless they are addressed expressly. The answers to these questions are not always clear in domestic U.S. transactions; they are even less clear in cross-border transactions because of the absence of a consensus over which statutes, rules, or regulations among those specifically applicable to cross-border transactions should be understood to be covered. In addition, the answers may differ from transaction to transaction. As a result, although practice varies, in cross-border transactions many opinion givers include a non-exclusive list of statutes, rules, and regulations that may apply but that they nonetheless are not covering.186

As a technical matter a U.S. party’s execution, delivery, or performance of its obligations under the agreement may not “violate” some U.S. statutes, rules, and regulations relating to cross-border transactions. For example, the Committee on Foreign Investment in the United States, or “CFIUS,” a federal interagency committee empowered to review foreign investments in U.S. companies for national security concerns, has the power to require that the parties to an agreement mitigate those concerns, or, if they cannot be mitigated, to block a transaction. The parties can submit the transaction to CFIUS for pre-closing review, which prevents CFIUS from reviewing a completed transaction or ordering post-closing mitigation. While a pre-closing filing with CFIUS is voluntary, and thus a failure to make the filing does not violate a U.S. statute or regulation, the consequences of a failure to file can be significant (including divestiture).187 Thus, if a pre-closing filing is not being made, many U.S. lawyers expressly exclude CFIUS review from the coverage of their no violation opinions.188

One way opinion givers can help reduce the risk of misunderstanding about the coverage of a no violation opinion in a cross-border transaction is for them to include in the opinion letter: (1) a general statement that the opinion only covers statutes, rules, and regulations that a lawyer in the Covered Law State exercising customary professional diligence would reasonably be expected to recognize as being applicable to the entity, transaction, or agreement to which the opinion relates; and (2) a non-exclusive list of specific U.S. statutes, rules, and regulations affecting cross-border transactions that might be applicable but nevertheless are not covered.189 Many specialized statutes, rules, and regulations (mostly federal) that rarely apply to domestic U.S. transactions apply to similar cross-border transactions because non-U.S. parties are involved or performance is to occur outside the United States.190 Whether these laws apply to a particular cross-border transaction often depends on many factors, including the nationality of entities that are not the opinion giver’s clients or that may be controlled, directly or indirectly, by persons from different jurisdictions. Often in these situations the opinion preparers cannot determine the relevant facts with the confidence needed to give an opinion.191 In addition, many of these statutes, rules, and regulations have an expansive reach and their possible impact on a particular cross-border transaction may be uncertain because of the broad discretion they grant to the agencies of the U.S. federal government charged with their interpretation and enforcement.192 A non-exclusive list of statutes, rules, and regulations not covered by a no violation opinion on a cross-border agreement, if tailored thoughtfully to the circumstances, will make the opinion clearer and help reduce the cost of its preparation.

In many cross-border transactions, in the course of advising their clients the parties’ own counsel identify particular U.S. statutes, rules, and regulations that may be applicable to the entity, transaction, or agreement, and then help their clients structure the transaction to comply with those statutes, rules, and regulations, or to take advantage of available exemptions.193 When the opinion preparers are willing to cover those statutes, rules, or regulations in a no violation opinion, for example because they have done the work to ensure compliance, they can reduce the risk of misunderstanding over the opinion’s coverage by referring expressly in the opinion letter to the particular statutes, rules, and regulations they are covering.194

Because customary practice for no violation opinions in cross-border transactions is continuing to evolve, the opinion preparers should discuss with the recipient early in the transaction which of the many specialized statutes, rules, and regulations that might apply to the entity, transaction, or agreement they are prepared to cover in the opinion. In those discussions, each side should be guided (as in domestic U.S. transactions) by the practicality of addressing particular statutes, rules, or regulations, considering such matters as the degree of certainty that is possible, the significance of specific statutes, rules, or regulations to the particular transaction, and the cost of performing the additional work, if any, required to give the opinion.195

In addition to a no violation opinion, non-U.S. opinion recipients (like opinion recipients in domestic U.S. transactions) sometimes request an opinion that the execution and delivery by the opinion giver’s client of the agreement and the consummation by it of the transactions contemplated by the agreement do not require, except as set forth in the opinion, any consent, approval, license, or exemption by, order or authorization of, or filing, recording, or registration by the opinion giver’s client with, any governmental authority pursuant to the Covered Law.196 Some of the U.S. statutes, rules, and regulations that apply to cross-border transactions provide for review or approval by or require filings with the federal government. The analysis in this Part III-7 also applies to no approvals or filings opinions in cross-border transactions. If specific approvals or filings are to be covered, they should be identified in a similar manner early in the transaction.

If the agreement chooses non-U.S. law as its governing law, to give either a no violation or no approvals or filings opinion, the opinion preparers need to have a general understanding of the transaction and the obligations the parties are undertaking in the agreement as interpreted under the Chosen Law. What they need to do to gain that understanding and to conduct the necessary legal analysis under the Covered Law will depend on the statutes, rules, and regulations to be covered and may require advice from others about the transaction or agreement.197 In many cases an understanding comparable to that required to give a no breach or default opinion (which is discussed in Part III-6) may suffice. When, however, the opinion covers specialized statutes, rules, or regulations specifically affecting cross-border transactions, giving the opinion may require a more in-depth understanding of matters covered by the Chosen Law, such as the legal status of the transaction, the respective rights and obligations of the parties under the agreement, and the status, domicile, and affiliations of non-U.S. parties.198 In some cases, the opinion preparers may not be able to gain a sufficient understanding to give an opinion.

III-8 SOVEREIGN IMMUNITY

Depending on the circumstances, under U.S. law, the federal government, the governments of the various states, and the governments of foreign nations, as well as their respective instrumentalities, may be immune from suit and from having their properties attached by creditors and claimants.199 Sovereigns can waive their immunity and ordinarily are not immune when they act in a private or commercial capacity. The scope of sovereign immunity for states, their agencies, and their instrumentalities, as well as political subdivisions of the state, including counties and municipalities and their instrumentalities, is a matter of state law and differs from state to state.200 Federal law governs the immunity of the U.S. government, its agencies, and its instrumentalities.201 A federal statute, the Foreign Sovereign Immunities Act of 1976 (FSIA),202 governs the immunity in the United States of foreign sovereigns and their instrumentalities.

III-8.1 Opinions Addressing the Immunity of U.S. Parties

In a cross-border transaction, the non-U.S. party sometimes asks for an opinion from counsel for the U.S. party that neither the U.S. party nor its property is entitled to sovereign immunity under federal law or the law of the Covered Law State.203 This opinion typically deals with both aspects of sovereign immunity: the absence of immunity from the jurisdiction of courts in the Covered Law State (including legal process required to commence a suit or to enforce a foreign judgment in those courts) and the absence of immunity from attachment of assets (which a plaintiff may seek before or after obtaining a judgment).204 Normally U.S. lawyers can give this opinion either because (1) the U.S. party is a private business entity and not under the control of the federal government, a state government, or another entity that is entitled to sovereign immunity (a U.S. sovereign); or (2) the U.S. party has legally waived sovereign immunity.

When the U.S. party is a private business and the opinion recipient knows that the U.S. party is neither a U.S. sovereign nor controlled by one, the U.S. party’s inability to claim sovereign immunity is self-evident, and an opinion that it is not entitled to sovereign immunity serves no purpose and ordinarily should not be requested. Nevertheless, should an opinion be requested and given, to satisfy themselves that their client is a private business not under the control of a U.S. sovereign, the opinion preparers may rely on express factual assumptions or a certificate from an officer of the client regarding the client’s owners and the absence of voting or other arrangements that would subject it to the control of a U.S. sovereign.

If the U.S. party is an agency or instrumentality of a U.S. sovereign, it may or may not be entitled to sovereign immunity depending on the circumstances of the specific transaction and applicable federal and state law. For example, U.S. sovereigns generally are not immune when they engage in commercial activities or enter into or perform agreements involving commercial activities. Generally, however, the opinion preparers will start with a presumption that, if their client is a state or the federal government, a state or federal agency or instrumentality, or a political subdivision of a state such as a county or municipality, it is entitled to immunity absent a clear provision to the contrary in the Covered Law.

Determining with confidence that a U.S. sovereign is engaging in a commercial transaction and is not therefore entitled to sovereign immunity under the Covered Law with respect to the agreement covered by the opinion often is difficult and, therefore, giving an unqualified opinion to that effect may be impossible. That, however, ordinarily is not an opinion problem because despite the possible, or even likely, availability of an exception from sovereign immunity for the commercial activities of a U.S. sovereign (or of some other exception under the Covered Law), the non-U.S. party ordinarily will insist on including in the agreement a provision that unconditionally and irrevocably waives the U.S. party’s sovereign immunity with respect to its obligations under the agreement. In the absence of such a waiver, U.S. lawyers ordinarily are unwilling to give an opinion that a U.S. sovereign is not immune or at the most will give only a qualified, reasoned opinion.

When an opinion on sovereign immunity is based on a contractual waiver, it means that, under the Covered Law: (i) the U.S. party’s constituent documents and any enabling legislation and implementing regulations give the U.S. party the power (corporate or governmental) to grant the waiver,205 (ii) the U.S. party has taken all action (corporate or governmental) required to waive sovereign immunity,206 and (iii) the waiver is valid and binding and cannot be uni-laterally withdrawn or revoked by the U.S. party or by the U.S. sovereign of which it is an agency or instrumentality.207

Although a waiver of sovereign immunity may be worded broadly to cover more than the U.S. party’s obligations under the agreement, the opinion should be drafted to cover only the non-U.S. party’s ability under the Covered Law to bring suit to enforce the agreement against the U.S. party, to execute a judgment obtained in such a suit, and to attach the assets of the U.S. party pursuant to such a judgment.208

If the agreement containing the waiver chooses non-U.S. law as its governing law, the opinion may be based, without so stating, on the Omnibus Cross-Border Assumption to the extent that the waiver’s effectiveness depends on the Chosen Law or some other non-U.S. law.209

III-8.2 Opinions Addressing the Immunity of Non-U.S. Parties

U.S. counsel representing a party that is, or may be, a foreign state or one of its agencies or instrumentalities (a foreign sovereign) in a transaction in the United States sometimes is asked for an opinion that, under the FSIA, the foreign sovereign is not entitled to sovereign immunity in the United States with respect to the transaction. Under the FSIA, (1) a foreign sovereign is immune from suit in federal and state courts in the United States, and (2) property in the United States of a foreign sovereign is immune from attachment and execution, except as otherwise specifically provided in the FSIA.210 The FSIA provides seven specific exceptions from immunity, one of which is a waiver of immunity by a foreign sovereign.

In the absence of a waiver, the exception most often applicable in the types of transactions in which a closing opinion typically is requested is for activities of a foreign sovereign that are commercial in nature and that either are carried on in the United States or are the direct effect in the United States of a foreign sovereign’s commercial activity elsewhere.211 Other exceptions may be available in specific circumstances.212 However, rather than relying on the commercial nature of the transaction or another exception to sovereign immunity provided by the FSIA, U.S. parties typically require a non-U.S. party that might be a “foreign state” as defined in the FSIA to waive sovereign immunity through an express, unconditional, and irrevocable waiver in the agreement itself.213

A U.S. lawyer ordinarily can give an opinion that a foreign sovereign’s waiver of sovereign immunity is valid, binding, and effective under the FSIA.214 The opinion, however, would not cover matters not governed by the Covered Law such as: (i) the foreign sovereign’s status, power, and authority to waive sovereign immunity; (ii) governmental approvals required for the waiver to be valid and binding in the foreign sovereign’s jurisdiction; (iii) effectiveness of the waiver under the law chosen to govern the agreement (if not the Covered Law) or under mandatory provisions of foreign law; or (iv) the foreign sovereign’s right to revoke the waiver.215

If a non-U.S. party has not waived sovereign immunity, whether an opinion can be given that the non-U.S. party is not immune under the FSIA depends on the circumstances. The opinion preparers could give an unqualified opinion if they are able to conclude with sufficient confidence that the non-U.S. party is not a “foreign state” as defined in the FSIA.216 In rare situations a U.S. lawyer may believe, but not with the confidence needed to give an unqualified opinion, that a foreign sovereign’s activities in the transaction are commercial in nature and, therefore, fall within the FSIA exception for commercial activities; if so, if asked, the lawyer may be willing to give a qualified, reasoned opinion to that effect.

III-9 NO REQUIREMENT TO QUALIFY TO DO BUSINESS IN THE UNITED STATES

Lenders sometimes request an opinion that making a loan and, in the case of a secured loan, taking a security interest in a borrower’s property217 will not require the lender to qualify to do business as a foreign company in the Covered Law State.218 This opinion ordinarily is requested only when a non-U.S. lender is making a loan to a borrower in the Covered Law State and the lender is not otherwise conducting activities, and therefore is not qualified to do business generally, in that state. Although this opinion was once common, today it is rarely requested or given in domestic U.S. transactions. Some non-U.S. lenders, however, continue to request it in cross-border transactions. If the opinion is requested, U.S. lawyers ordinarily are willing to give it (if they are willing to give it at all) only when the transaction is a bank loan.219 The opinion is not typically requested, and is almost never, if ever, given in transactions such as cross-border joint ventures or investments in U.S. businesses by non-U.S. parties because of the difficulty of analyzing a complex web of contractual rights and obligations and of concluding with the confidence needed to give an opinion that none of the non-U.S. party’s activities contemplated by the agreement will constitute “doing business” in the Covered Law State.

Some U.S. lawyers are willing to give the opinion with respect to activities of a non-U.S. lender contemplated by the agreement, but only when the Covered Law clearly provides that those activities do not require the lender to qualify to do business in the Covered Law State. The activities covered by the opinion ordinarily should be limited to the lender’s making a loan to a borrower in, or obtaining a guaranty from a guarantor in, the Covered Law State and its taking a security interest in collateral located there.220 To give the opinion, the opinion preparers do not have to determine whether the lender’s possible future activities in the Covered Law State, such as exercising remedies under the loan agreement against a borrower or guarantor or enforcing rights against collateral, would constitute “doing business” under the Covered Law.221

Sometimes non-U.S. lenders request an opinion that covers additional matters under the Covered Law, such as licensing requirements, treatment as a resident for tax or other purposes, and exposure to being sued in the Covered Law State. Such requests are generally inappropriate because they relate to matters as to which the lender should be seeking advice from its own counsel rather than counsel for the borrower.222

IV. OTHER OUTBOUND OPINION ISSUES: SOME GUIDELINES FOR CONSTRUCTIVE ENGAGEMENT

Although this Report covers most of the opinions that are commonly given by U.S. lawyers in cross-border transactions,223 it does not cover every opinion a non-U.S. party may request. Moreover, non-U.S. parties and their counsel may seek formulations of opinions that are different from what U.S. lawyers commonly use. Thus, notwithstanding the guidance provided by this Report, opinion giving in cross-border transactions will continue to present challenges and opportunities for misunderstanding.224

Bar groups in the United States have articulated a Golden Rule225 to provide guidance on what opinions U.S. lawyers can properly be asked and expected to give in domestic U.S. transactions.226 The Golden Rule, however, does not translate easily to cross-border opinion giving.227 That is principally because the Golden Rule relies on an assumption that the opinion giver and counsel for the recipient will be in analogous but opposite positions in other transactions. That assumption does not hold true when opinion givers and recipients’ counsel practice in different countries having different legal systems, rules of professional conduct, and opinion practices. Moreover, the opinions requested and given in one country are often different from those requested and given in another, and market expectations are different as well.228

While opinion discussions between U.S. lawyers and non-U.S. counsel for the recipient present challenges that U.S. lawyers on opposite sides do not face in domestic U.S. transactions, this Committee believes that the guidelines below, which derive in part from experience with the Golden Rule, will facilitate the giving of opinions in cross-border transactions, and often will reduce friction and cost, if followed by all parties and their counsel.

First, lawyers give opinions in accordance with the customary practice of the jurisdiction in which they practice and should not be expected to know or take into account any other jurisdiction’s practice.229

Second, the parties to a cross-border agreement and their counsel should consider whether the cost of preparing each opinion requested is justified by its benefit to the recipient in the specific transaction.230

Third, a non-U.S. recipient should not insist on receiving an opinion simply because U.S. lawyers give it in domestic U.S. transactions.231 If the opinion is one that a non-U.S. recipient does not regularly ask non-U.S. lawyers to give in comparable circumstances, questions can legitimately be raised why it is asking U.S. counsel to give that opinion and whether the opinion’s benefit to the recipient justifies the cost to the opinion giver’s client. Conversely, if the opinion is one that is both regularly requested in the recipient’s jurisdiction and regularly given by U.S. lawyers in domestic U.S. practice, and the incremental cost of preparing it in a cross-border transaction is not significant, a question can legitimately be raised why a U.S. lawyer is refusing to give it to a non-U.S. recipient even though non-U.S. counsel for the recipient, acting under its jurisdiction’s practice, would not give an analogous opinion if the roles were reversed.

Fourth, opinion preparers and counsel for the recipient should always deal with each other professionally and should not treat a closing opinion as a bargaining chip in an economic exchange. Each side should work in good faith to bridge gaps in opinion coverage and achieve a sensible result for all parties under the circumstances. Gaps, however, cannot always be bridged; when U.S. counsel is unable to give a requested opinion, the non-U.S. party is put on notice that a legal issue may exist and faces a choice, with advice from its own counsel, between proceeding without a third-party legal opinion on the issue or changing the terms of the transaction to address the issue (if possible).232 The opinion process should not be approached as a game in which one side wins and the other side loses.233

Fifth, non-U.S. counsel for the recipient should recognize that U.S. opinions are normally worded in particular ways and should not press U.S. opinion givers to deviate from commonly used language for which U.S. customary practice supplies a well-understood meaning (referred to as “customary usage”).234 Customary usage is more than a matter of style. Sometimes, opinion requests by a non-U.S. party use different words and phrases than a U.S. opinion giver would use. The requested wording may stem from differences in law or practice between jurisdictions and not necessarily signal a substantive opinion issue. Misunderstandings and delays can be reduced if non-U.S. recipients and their counsel are sensitive to the importance to U.S. opinion givers of adhering to customary usage and, therefore, are willing to accept opinion language commonly used in the United States even if that language does not track the language of the initial opinion request.

Sixth, non-U.S. recipients should not treat an opinion given by U.S. counsel as providing anything more than U.S. counsel’s professional judgment on the particular legal issues the opinion addresses. They should not expect U.S. opinion givers to provide confirmations of what are essentially factual, rather than legal, matters or to state a lack of knowledge of acts or events.235 The parties to a transaction should look to their own counsel to advise them on legal matters, structure the transaction, and negotiate agreements. This is particularly important in transactions involving countries where opinion practice is not well established and each party is represented by lawyers with the necessary expertise to advise it on the relevant issues without incurring the cost and delay of negotiating and preparing a third-party opinion.

V. CONCLUSION

When U.S. lawyers give opinions in cross-border transactions, they have to deal with legal and interpretive issues that do not arise in domestic U.S. transactions. In addition, they have to deal with expectations of non-U.S. opinion recipients that often are different from those of U.S. recipients. These factors, as well as others discussed in this Report, create a greater risk of misunderstanding in cross-border opinion practice than in domestic U.S. opinion practice.

U.S. lawyers rely on U.S. customary practice when giving opinions in cross-border transactions, just as they do in domestic U.S. transactions. As a result, non-U.S. parties and their non-U.S. counsel must be prepared to commit the time and resources (possibly including retaining U.S. counsel to advise them) required for them to understand the opinions being given. Early in a cross-border transaction counsel for the parties should discuss: (1) the work required to deliver each requested opinion, (2) the cost of preparing each opinion requested compared to its benefit to the recipient, and (3) the assumptions, exceptions, and qualifications that are required to give the requested opinions.

One way of reducing the risk of misunderstanding in cross-border transactions is for U.S. opinion givers to spell out in their opinion letters assumptions, exceptions, or qualifications that do not have to be stated in opinion letters in domestic U.S. transactions. The goal of doing so is greater clarity for the benefit of both non-U.S. opinion recipients and non-U.S. courts that later may be called upon to interpret the opinion letter. To achieve that goal, the opinion preparers should seek to strike the right balance between specificity in the opinion letter’s language and reliance on U.S. customary practice, which provides that commonly understood assumptions, exceptions, and qualifications apply whether stated or unstated.

In some cases legal uncertainties will require that exceptions be taken to opinions being given or may make it impossible to give an opinion. In those cases, the parties, working together and with advice from their own counsel, will need to deal with those uncertainties by finding ways to reduce or allocate the risks they pose. Third-party legal opinions, either in domestic U.S. or in cross-border transactions, should not be expected to—and in any event cannot—bridge gaps that the parties are unwilling or unable to fill.

This Committee hopes that this Report will help U.S. lawyers who give opinions in cross-border transactions and lawyers, both U.S. and non-U.S., who advise the recipients of those opinions gain a better understanding of U.S. opinion practice so as to facilitate both requesting and giving outbound opinions on matters subject to U.S. law.

 

APPENDIX A: LIST OF DEFINED TERMS

ABA Guidelines, p. 143

ABA Principles, p. 141

Bremen exception, p. 179

Brussels Regulation, p. 170

CFIUS, p. 202

Chosen Contract Law, p. 172

Chosen Law, p. 147

Chosen Law Country, p. 147

Chosen Law State, p. 151

closing opinion, p. 141

CLLS Opinion Guide, p. 142

coverage limitation, p. 147

Covered Law, p. 147

Covered Law State, p. 148

customary usage, p. 216

cross-border transactions, p. 141

Default State, p. 151

FAA, p. 156

Five Arbitration Prerequisites, p. 161

Foreign Money Claims Act, p. 186

foreign sovereign, p. 207

Four Hague Prerequisites, p. 189

FSIA, p. 207

Glazer Treatise, p. 144

Golden Rule, p. 214

IBA Report, p. 141

Hague Convention, p. 166

Hague Service Convention, p. 193

inbound forum selection clauses, p. 167

lex fori, p. 147

mandatory outbound forum selection clause, p. 169

mandatory inbound forum selection clause, p. 169

Model Law, p. 155

modern view, p. 172

named court, p. 166

New York Convention, p. 155

Omnibus Cross-Border Assumption, p. 147

outbound forum selection clauses, p. 167

outbound opinions, p. 141

Panama Convention, p. 156

permissive inbound forum selection clause, p. 169

permissive outbound forum selection clause, p. 169

power and authority opinion, p. 197

reciprocity requirement, p. 157

Rome II Regulation, p. 180

Second Prong of the Restatement Test, p. 151

Selected Forum Law, p. 172

Statement on Customary Practice, p. 142

third-party closing opinion, p. 141

TriBar 1998 Report, p. 154

TriBar Remedies Opinion Report, p. 148

TriBar Supplemental Chosen-Law Report, p. 152

UNCITRAL, p. 155

Uniform Act, p. 186

U.S. customary practice, p. 141

U.S. sovereign, p. 208

 

APPENDIX B: ILLUSTRATIVE OPINION LANGUAGE, INCLUDING SELECTED ASSUMPTIONS, EXCEPTIONS, AND QUALIFICATIONS

The following language, which also appears in various footnotes in this Report (as indicated below in parentheses), is intended only as illustrative of how certain opinions and related assumptions, exceptions, and qualifications discussed in this Report could be drafted. The illustrative language may need to be customized to suit the circumstances of particular transactions and applicable law. Also, this Report contains numerous suggestions as to the phrasing of the opinion as well as related assumptions, exceptions, and qualifications, both in text and in footnotes, concerning the opinions covered by the illustrative language that the opinion preparers may want to consider when drafting their opinion letters.

ASSUMPTIONS, EXCEPTIONS, AND QUALIFICATIONS

1. Reference to U.S. customary practice (see note 15 and accompanying text):

Alternative 1: This opinion letter shall be interpreted in accordance with the Legal Opinion Principles prepared by the Legal Opinions Committee of the American Bar Association’s Business Law Section as published in 53 BUS. LAW. 831 (1998)[, a copy of which is attached to this opinion letter].

Alternative 2: This opinion letter shall be interpreted in accordance with the customary practice of United States lawyers who regularly give, and lawyers who regularly advise recipients regarding, opinions of the kind included in this opinion letter.

2. Omnibus Cross-Border Assumption (see note 17 and accompanying text):

We have assumed that the choice of the law of [FOREIGN COUNTRY] in the Agreement is valid and the Agreement and each of its provisions are valid, binding and enforceable under the law of [FOREIGN COUNTRY] and of any other jurisdiction whose law applies, other than law covered expressly in an opinion included in this opinion letter. [IF THE AGREEMENT CONTAINS A FORUM SELECTION CLAUSE, ADD—We also have assumed that, other than the courts of [COVERED LAW STATE] and United States federal courts, any court named in the forum selection clause of the Agreement will have jurisdiction over the parties and the subject matter of any action brought in that court under the Agreement.]

3. Bremen exception for opinions on the validity of forum selection clauses (see note 120 and accompanying text):

The opinion in numbered paragraph __ is limited to the extent that a court may decline to give effect to the forum selection clause in Section __ of the Agreement because enforcement would be unreasonable or unjust under the principles enunciated in the decision of the U.S. Supreme Court in M/S Bremen & Unterweser Reederel, GmbH v. Zapata Off-Shore Co., 402 U.S. 1 (1972) and in related cases, including that it would contravene a strong public policy of [COVERED LAW STATE].

4. Interpretation of contracts for purposes of the no breach or default opinion (see note 179 and accompanying text):

We have interpreted the provisions of the contracts addressed by the opinion in numbered paragraph __ as those provisions would be understood in [COVERED LAW STATE] whether they are governed by the law of [COVERED LAW STATE] or by the law of another jurisdiction.

OPINIONS

1. Validity of choice of non-U.S. law (see note 35 and accompanying text):

Under the law of [COVERED LAW STATE], the choice of the law of [FOREIGN COUNTRY] in the Agreement is valid except to the extent that giving effect to the law of [FOREIGN COUNTRY] would violate a fundamental policy of (i) the jurisdiction whose law is covered by this opinion letter or (ii) any other jurisdiction having a materially greater interest than [FOREIGN COUNTRY] in the determination of the issue, if the law of that jurisdiction would apply to the Agreement or any of its provisions in the absence of a governing law clause.

2. Enforceability of cross-border arbitration clause (see note 59 and accompanying text):

The arbitration clause in Section ___ of the Agreement is valid and enforceable under the federal law of the United States and the law of [COVERED LAW STATE], except to the extent that an exception set forth in the Convention on the Recognition and Enforcement of Foreign Arbitral Awards or the Federal Arbitration Act, 9 U.S.C. §§ 201–208, applies. (*)

(*) If the opinion is being given on the basis that the arbitration clause falls under the New York Convention and Chapter 2 of the Federal Arbitration Act, some lawyers choose to be specific about the scope of the arbitration provision by using language such as the following:

The Company’s covenant in Section ___ of the Agreement to submit to mandatory arbitration in [ARBITRAL TRIBUNAL OUTSIDE THE UNITED STATES] is valid and enforceable under the federal law of the United States and the law of [COVERED LAW STATE] to the extent that the arbitration relates to contract claims arising under the Agreement, except to the extent that an exception set forth in the Convention on the Recognition and Enforcement of Foreign Arbitral Awards or the Federal Arbitration Act, 9 U.S.C. §§ 201–208, applies.

3. Recognition and enforcement of foreign arbitral award (see note 69 and accompanying text):

Except to the extent that an exception set forth in the Convention on the Recognition and Enforcement of Foreign Arbitral Awards (the “New York Convention”) and the Federal Arbitration Act, 9 U.S.C. §§ 201–208 (the “FAA”), applies, an arbitral award made under Section __ of the Agreement will be recognized and enforced under the New York Convention and the FAA, if a proceeding to enforce the award is properly brought in a United States federal court within three years after the arbitral award is made. (*)

(*) If the opinion is being given on the basis that the arbitration clause falls under the New York Convention and Chapter 2 of the Federal Arbitration Act, some lawyers choose to make it clear that the arbitral award must be a “foreign” award by using language such as the following:

Except to the extent that an exception set forth in the Convention on the Recognition and Enforcement of Foreign Arbitral Awards (the “New York Convention”) and the Federal Arbitration Act, 9 U.S.C. §§ 201–208 (the “FAA”), applies, an arbitral award made by [ARBITRAL TRIBUNAL OUTSIDE THE UNITED STATES] in accordance with the requirements of Section __ of the Agreement will be recognized and enforced under the New York Convention and the FAA to the extent that the arbitration relates to contract claims arising under the Agreement, if a proceeding to enforce the award is properly brought in a United States federal court within three years after the arbitral award is made.

4. Validity of forum selection clause if the opinion does not characterize the clause as permissive or mandatory (see note 90 and accompanying text):

The forum selection clause in Section __ of the Agreement is valid and enforceable under the law of [COVERED LAW STATE] for actions relating to contract claims arising under the Agreement.

5. Validity of permissive outbound forum selection clause (see note 99 and accompanying text):

The Company’s agreement in Section __ of the Agreement to submit to the non-exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of [FOREIGN LAW COUNTRY] is valid and enforceable under the law of [COVERED LAW STATE] for actions relating to contract claims arising under the Agreement.

6. Validity of permissive inbound forum selection clause (see note 102 and accompanying text):

The Company’s agreement in Section __ of the Agreement to submit to the non-exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of [COVERED LAW STATE] [and United States federal courts] is valid and enforceable under the law of [COVERED LAW STATE] [and the federal law of the United States] for actions relating to contract claims arising under the Agreement.

7. Validity of mandatory outbound forum selection clause (see note 116 and accompanying text):

The Company’s agreement in Section __ of the Agreement that the courts of [FOREIGN COUNTRY] shall have exclusive jurisdiction is valid and enforceable under the law of [COVERED LAW STATE] for actions relating to contract claims arising under the Agreement.

8. Validity of mandatory inbound forum selection clause (see note 125 and accompanying text):

The Company’s agreement in Section __ of the Agreement that the courts of [COVERED LAW STATE] [and United States federal courts] shall have exclusive jurisdiction is valid and enforceable under the law of [COVERED LAW STATE] [and the federal law of the United States] for actions relating to contract claims arising under the Agreement.

9. Recognition and enforcement of foreign judgments (see note 133 and accompanying text):

To the extent that it relates to contract claims arising under the Agreement, a final and conclusive judgment granting or denying recovery of a sum of money, other than a judgment for taxes, a fine or other penalty, rendered by a court of [FOREIGN COUNTRY] against the Company that is enforceable in [FOREIGN COUNTRY] will be recognized as valid and enforced under the law of [COVERED LAW STATE] by the courts of [COVERED LAW STATE] or by United States federal courts having jurisdiction and applying the law of [COVERED LAW STATE], without a re-examination of the substantive issues underlying the judgment, subject to (i) grounds for non-recognition and exceptions to enforcement set forth in the Uniform Foreign Money-Judgments Recognition Act as adopted in [COVERED LAW STATE] (the “Act”)[IF OPINION GIVER WISHES TO REFER TO PARTICULAR EXCEPTIONS FROM THE STATUTE, ADD— , which include, but are not limited to, _________________ ] and (ii) the court’s power to stay proceedings to enforce a foreign judgment pending determination of any appeal or until the expiration of time sufficient to enable the defendant to prosecute an appeal. [IF APPLICABLE IN THE COVERED LAW STATE, ADD—This opinion is based on the assumption that the law of [FOREIGN COUNTRY] requires a court of competent jurisdiction in [FOREIGN COUNTRY], in a reciprocal manner, to recognize and enforce a final and conclusive judgment of a court of [COVERED LAW STATE] without reconsideration of the merits.]

10. Validity of service of process (see note 161 and accompanying text):

The methods for service of process set forth in Section __ of the Agreement are valid under the law of [COVERED LAW STATE].

11. No violation of U.S. statutes, rules, or regulations (see notes 189 & 194 and accompanying text):

Except as set forth below, the execution and delivery of the Agreement by the Company and consummation by the Company of the transactions contemplated by the Agreement do not result in any violation by the Company of statutes of the United States or [COVERED LAW STATE], or rules or regulations thereunder, that, subject to the limitations in the following sentence, we would reasonably be expected to recognize as being applicable to an entity, transaction or agreement to which this opinion letter relates. (*)

(*) Some lawyers choose to be specific about statutes, rules, or regulations that are not covered by the no violation opinion by using language such as the following:

The opinion in paragraph __ does not cover, without limitation, the following statutes, rules, and regulations: [. . .], or other statutes, rules, or regulations customarily understood to be excluded even though they are not expressly stated to be excluded.

12. No sovereign immunity of U.S. party (see note 204 and accompanying text):

Neither [U.S. PARTY] nor its assets are immune on grounds of sovereign immunity from (i) suit in connection with the Agreement in the courts in [COVERED LAW STATE] [or United States federal courts] or (ii) related legal process, including service of process, attachment of assets, or enforcement by those courts of a judgment against the Company related to the Agreement.

13. Waiver of sovereign immunity under FSIA (see note 214 and accompanying text):

Under the Foreign Sovereign Immunities Act of 1976, as amended, [NONU.S. PARTY] has validly waived its sovereign immunity (if any) from (i) suit in the courts in [COVERED LAW STATE] and United States federal courts and (ii) related legal process, including service of process, attachment of assets, or enforcement by those courts of a judgment against [NON-U.S. PARTY] related to the Agreement.

14. Foreign lender not required to qualify to do business (see note 220 and accompanying text):

Lender is not required to qualify to do business as a foreign corporation in [COVERED LAW STATE] solely by reason of its execution and delivery of the Agreement and consummation on the date of this letter of the transactions contemplated by the Agreement.

__________

1. Ettore Santucci, Vice Chair, Legal Opinions Committee, ABA Business Law Section, served as Reporter for this Report.

The other members of the editorial group for this Report were: J. Truman Bidwell, Jr., Daniel Bush-ner, Peter Castellon, Sylvia Fung Chin, Edward H. Fleischman, Richard N. Frasch, Donald W. Glazer, Timothy G. Hoxie, Jerome E. Hyman, Stanley Keller, Noël J. Para, John B. Power, James J. Rosen-hauer, and Elizabeth van Schilfgaarde. The views expressed in this Report are not necessarily the views of all members of the editorial group or of their respective law firms.

2. MICHAEL GRUSON, STEPHEN HUTTER & MICHAEL KUTSCHERA, LEGAL OPINIONS IN INTERNATIONAL TRANSACTIONS 10–11 (4th ed. 2003) [hereinafter IBA REPORT] (a project of the Subcommittee on Legal Opinions of the Committee on Banking Law of the Section on Business Law of the International Bar Association) (“The practice of asking counsel . . . for legal opinions originated in the U.S. It is not a common practice in purely domestic transactions in other countries. . . . Legal opinions, however, are gaining increasing acceptance in international transactions, including transactions involving only non-U.S. parties.”).

3. The term “U.S. customary practice,” as used in this Report, refers to the practice of lawyers who regularly give, and lawyers who regularly advise opinion recipients regarding, opinions in transactions between U.S. parties. U.S. customary practice covers both the meaning of standard language used in opinion letters and the work U.S. opinion preparers are expected to perform in preparing them. See generally Comm. on Legal Ops., ABA Bus. Law Section, Legal Opinion Principles, 53 BUS. LAW. 831 (1998) [hereinafter ABA Principles]; Statement on the Role of Customary Practice in the Preparation and Understanding of Third-Party Legal Opinions, 63 BUS. LAW. 1277 (2008) [hereinafter Statement on Customary Practice] (a statement approved by many state bar associations and other U.S. bar groups).

4. See Guide to the Questions to Be Addressed When Providing Opinion Letters on English Law in Financial Transactions, CITY LONDON L. SOCY 3 11 (Nov. 17, 2011), http://citysolicitors.org.uk [hereinafter CLLS Opinion Guide]. (“The approach to giving opinion letters may vary from jurisdiction to jurisdiction, because legal practitioners in each jurisdiction are bound by their own separate professional rules and because the practice of giving opinion letters may have developed differently. In particular, there is a significant difference of practice as between the United States and England.”).

In some non-U.S. jurisdictions, lawyers give written opinions primarily to their own clients, sometimes permitting third parties to rely on them. Ordinarily, however, those opinions are reasoned and are not analogous to third-party closing opinions typically given by U.S. lawyers. See IBA REPORT, supra note 2, at 8–9.

5. Comm. on Legal Ops., ABA Bus. Law Section, Guidelines for the Preparation of Closing Opinions, 57 BUS. LAW. 875, 876 (2002) (§ 1.2) [hereinafter ABA Guidelines].

6. For a discussion of the cost-effectiveness of a third-party opinion on the enforceability of the agreement, see BUS. LAW SECTION, STATE BAR OF CAL., REPORT ON THIRD-PARTY REMEDIES OPINIONS: 2007 UPDATE app. 4, at 15 (2007). (“In the absence of special factors, the benefit to be obtained by an opinion recipient from a third-party remedies opinion can often be realized in a more cost-efficient and informative manner through advice provided by the opinion recipient’s own counsel, especially as it relates to documents regularly prepared by counsel to the opinion recipient for the opinion recipient. In general, it would seem inappropriate for a third-party remedies opinion to be requested or given in that circumstance.”).

7. See ABA Guidelines, supra note 5, at 877 (§ 2.1). (“Early in the negotiation of the transaction documents, counsel for the opinion recipient should specify the opinions the opinion recipient wishes to receive. The opinion giver should respond promptly with any concerns or proposed exceptions, providing, to the extent practicable, the form of its proposed opinions.”).

Beginning discussions early is even more important in cross-border transactions because the non-U.S. lawyers representing the opinion recipient may not appreciate fully the work required for the U.S. lawyers to give the requested opinions. Also, before the U.S. lawyers can commit to giving an opinion, they may need time to understand how non-U.S. law affects their analysis even though their opinion letter only covers matters of U.S. law. U.S. counsel may be involved in some, but not all, aspects of the transaction and may need extra time to become familiar with relevant issues. Early discussions may lead the opinion preparers to conclude that they need to consult with non-U.S. counsel or lead the opinion recipient to conclude that it needs to consult with U.S. counsel.

8. If non-U.S. lawyers are also delivering closing opinions and in that connection are limiting their liability to the recipient, consideration should be given to whether U.S. lawyers similarly should be permitted to limit their liability to the recipient.

9. See generally Statement on Customary Practice, supra note 3.

10. See generally Statement on Customary Practice, supra note 3; see also RESTATEMENT (THIRD) OF THE LAW GOVERNING LAWYERS § 51(2)(a) (2000) (lawyer owes duty of care to non-client when lawyer or client “invites the non-client to rely on the lawyer’s opinion”); id. § 95 cmt. c (stating that the standard of care a lawyer giving a third-party closing opinion owes the recipient is to exercise “the competence and diligence normally exercised by lawyers in similar circumstances”). For a general discussion of the duty of care of opinion givers and the relevance of U.S. customary practice, see DONALD W. GLAZER, SCOTT FITZGIBBON & STEVEN O. WEISE, GLAZER AND FITZGIBBON ON LEGAL OPINIONS: DRAFTING, INTERPRETING, AND SUPPORTING CLOSING OPINIONS IN BUSINESS TRANSACTIONS § 1.6.1 (3d ed. 2008) [hereinafter GLAZER TREATISE].

11. See Legal Opinion Resource Center, AM. B. ASSN, http://apps.americanbar.org/buslaw/tribar/home.shtml (last visited Sept. 4, 2015); GLAZER TREATISE, supra note 10, apps.

12. In some countries a generally understood practice may not exist on which lawyers can rely for the meaning and scope of their legal opinions in the same way U.S. opinion givers rely on U.S. customary practice. See, e.g., CLLS Opinion Guide, supra note 4, at 13 (¶¶ 63–64) (terms of opinion should be complete and self-reliant, because there is no English law on whether it is possible to rely on “customary practice” being implied; good practice to use language that is easily intelligible and for the letter to be clearly laid out, or the reader may fail to detect the true message or draw the correct conclusion). Nevertheless, in England, at least, lawyers recognize that U.S. opinion givers rely on customary practice rather than stating expressly matters that English lawyers usually state expressly in opinion letters on English law. See, e.g., CLLS Opinion Guide, supra note 4, at 12 ( 60) (advising English lawyers on opinions given by U.S. lawyers in cross-border transactions).

13. U.S. closing opinions express legal conclusions in a streamlined manner and depend on U.S. customary practice to supply many assumptions, exceptions, and qualifications that otherwise would have to be stated expressly in every opinion letter. The ABA Legal Opinion Accord, a document of almost seventy pages, illustrates the magnitude of the task of trying to spell out all of those assumptions, exceptions, and qualifications. See generally Comm. on Legal Ops., ABA Bus. Law Section, Third-Party Legal Opinion Report, Including the Legal Opinion Accord, of the Section of Business Law, American Bar Association, 47 BUS. LAW. 167, 179 (1991).

14. The same concerns apply to a U.S. recipient of an opinion of non-U.S. counsel if the recipient is not familiar with the non-U.S. opinion practice under which the opinion was prepared. The U.S. recipient ordinarily should not assume that the opinion can be interpreted in accordance with U.S. customary practice or that it can rely on the apparent meaning of the words used in the opinion. See generally GLAZER TREATISE, supra note 10, § 5.3; IBA REPORT, supra note 2, at 19.

15. The language could read as follows:

This opinion letter shall be interpreted in accordance with the Legal Opinion Principles prepared by the Legal Opinions Committee of the American Bar Association’s Business Law Section as published in 53 BUS. LAW. 831 (1998)[, a copy of which is attached to this opinion letter].

Instead of incorporating the ABA Principles expressly in their opinion letter, some U.S. lawyers refer to U.S. customary practice generally using language such as the following:

This opinion letter shall be interpreted in accordance with the customary practice of United States lawyers who regularly give, and lawyers who regularly advise recipients regarding, opinions of the kind included in this opinion letter.

See, e.g., Donald W. Glazer & Stanley Keller, A Streamlined Form of Closing Opinion Based on the ABA Legal Opinion Principles, 61 BUS. LAW. 389, 393 (2005). If the ABA Principles are incorporated by reference, they may be attached to the opinion letter for greater clarity and easier access by a non-U.S. recipient. See ABA Principles, supra note 3.

16. Nevertheless, as stated in the ABA Guidelines, an opinion giver should not give an opinion that the opinion giver recognizes will mislead the recipient with regard to matters covered by the opinion. ABA Guidelines, supra note 5, at 877 (§ 1.5).

17. The Omnibus Cross-Border Assumption could be worded as follows:

We have assumed that the choice of the law of [FOREIGN COUNTRY] in the Agreement is valid and the Agreement and each of its provisions are valid, binding and enforceable under the law of [FOREIGN COUNTRY] and of any other jurisdiction whose law applies, other than law covered expressly in an opinion included in this opinion letter. [IF THE AGREEMENT CONTAINS A FORUM SELECTION CLAUSE, ADD—We also have assumed that, other than the courts of [COVERED LAW STATE] and United States federal courts, any court named in the forum selection clause of the Agreement will have jurisdiction over the parties and the subject matter of any action brought in that court under the Agreement.]

Because procedural matters ordinarily are governed by the law of the jurisdiction where a legal action is brought (commonly referred to as the lex fori), the third sentence of the illustrative language above covers both (i) the Chosen Law and (ii) if a court named in the forum selection clause is located in a jurisdiction outside the United States other than the Chosen Law Country, the law of that jurisdiction. See infra text accompanying note 123.

The Omnibus Cross-Border Assumption complements the statement traditionally included in an opinion letter regarding the law it is covering (the coverage limitation) because, as discussed in later sections of this Report, some of the legal conclusions the opinion preparers must reach under the Covered Law depend on assumptions as to matters governed by the Chosen Law or the lex fori even though neither one is covered by the opinion. If the opinion preparers expressly state that their opinions are to be interpreted in accordance with U.S. customary practice, for consistency they also ordinarily should state the Omnibus Cross-Border Assumption expressly. See supra note 16 and accompanying text.

18. To make the opinions they are giving easier for non-U.S. recipients to understand, U.S. opinion preparers may choose to be somewhat more expansive in their cross-border opinion letters than in opinion letters they deliver in domestic U.S. transactions. For example, they may choose to spell out assumptions, exceptions, or qualifications that under U.S. customary practice are generally understood without being stated (even though they may not always spell them out in their domestic U.S. opinion letters), while at the same time making clear that the stated assumptions, exceptions, and qualifications are not intended to be exclusive.

19. That may be because the opinion giver’s client does not have local counsel in the Chosen Law State, or because the opinion recipient does not insist on receiving an opinion on the enforceability of the agreement under the Chosen Law (perhaps because it is receiving that opinion from its own counsel). See TriBar Op. Comm., Special Report of the TriBar Opinion Committee: The Remedies Opinion—Deciding When to Include Exceptions and Assumptions, 59 BUS. LAW. 1483, 1497 n.70 (2004) [hereinafter TriBar Remedies Opinion Report] (discussing practice of rendering “as if” enforceability opinions).

20. These interpretive issues are equally present when the agreement is drafted in English, or when the opinion preparers are allowed to rely on a translation of the agreement into English, because the problem is not simply language, but legal concepts and technical terms that do not always lend themselves to translation. Even if the parties approve dual versions of the agreement, one in a foreign language and one in English, the situation is not necessarily better and may in fact be worse if suit against the U.S. opinion giver is brought in a court of the Chosen Law Country and ambiguities or conflicts exist between the two versions, because the English version on which the opinion giver relied for the “as if” analysis may or may not be the version on which the court relies.

21. This is not the same issue addressed above (how a provision of the agreement would be interpreted by a court in the Covered Law State). Rather, because a U.S. lawyer willing to give an “as if” opinion is permitted to disregard the Chosen Law, the issue is whether that U.S. lawyer would, in applying the “as if” logic, be analyzing a set of terms that under the Covered Law are in fact different from the those to which the parties intended to agree as they are under the Chosen Law. This issue results from likely differences between the legal system on which the opinion is based and the legal system on which the agreement is based. In many civil law jurisdictions, for example, the parties do not have the same latitude they have in the United States, subject to limited exceptions, to negotiate whatever business terms they wish, which in U.S. practice ordinarily are spelled out in the agreement itself. By contrast, statutes in many code-based jurisdictions supply terms that need not be, and ordinarily are not, set forth expressly in the agreement, or require that agreements conform to a statutory scheme that permits limited deviations from the norm (i.e., a statute either supplements or overrides negotiated contract clauses). Similar problems may arise even when the Chosen Law Country is a common law country. See infra note 33.

22. This position is consistent with the IBA Report’s conclusion regarding inbound “as if” enforceability opinions of non-U.S. counsel (“as if” formulation “makes no sense . . . where foreign countries are involved; . . . difference[s] in law and contract practice [make it] ludicrous to suggest to a lawyer from a civil law country or even from a non-U.S. common law jurisdiction that he read a New York law agreement as if it were governed by his law”). IBA REPORT, supra note 2, at 168. Sometimes, but infrequently, U.S. lawyers may be willing to give an “as if” opinion if they are satisfied that the agreement would be interpreted under the Covered Law in the same general way it would under the Chosen Law (for example because they also happen to have expertise in the Chosen Law Country’s law and practice with respect to agreements of the type on which they are giving the opinion). When giving the opinion, they often make clear in the opinion letter that the opinion (i) is based on a reading of the agreement within its four corners and as its provisions would be understood by a lawyer in the Covered Law State, which may be different in meaningful ways from how lawyers in the Chosen Law Country may understand them, and (ii) does not cover any substantive provisions of the non-U.S. Chosen Law that may be incorporated by reference in the agreement or supplied by the law of the Chosen Law Country. Some U.S. lawyers also add a statement to the effect that they are not qualified to interpret the terms of the agreement under the Chosen Law.

23. This opinion addresses the concern of the recipient that the Chosen Law will not be given effect should it choose to seek enforcement of the agreement in the courts of the Covered Law State (particularly when, as is often the case, the opinion giver’s client has significant operations there), rather than the courts of the Chosen Law Country. For example, in a cross-border loan, if the lender is located in Germany, the borrower is located in California, and the agreement chooses German law, the lender may ask a California lawyer for an opinion that the agreement’s choice of German law will be given effect under California law if the lender sues the borrower in the California courts. See IBA REPORT, supra note 2, at 250. Unlike the “as if” enforceability opinion discussed earlier in this Report (which would cover the agreement generally), the choice-of-law opinion only covers the specific issue whether, if a dispute relating to the agreement were litigated in a California court, the governing law clause would be given effect under California choice-of-law rules.

24. RESTATEMENT (SECOND) OF CONFLICT OF LAWS § 187 (1971). This Report assumes that section 187(1) (which provides that the law chosen by the parties will be applied if the particular issue is one that the parties could have resolved by an explicit provision in their agreement directed to that issue) does not apply and, thus, that the applicable test is set forth in section 187(2). The first exception under section 187(2) applies when sufficient contacts are not present between the parties or the transaction and the state whose law is chosen. That may be a concern in cross-border transactions when the parties as a matter of convenience or for other reasons (for example, the chosen law’s being better developed for the type of the transaction) choose the governing law of a jurisdiction with which neither they nor the transaction have any relationship. Some states have enacted statutes that validate, if spec-ified conditions relating to the nature and size of the transaction are met, contractual provisions selecting that state’s law regardless of whether contacts exist with that state. See, e.g., CAL. CIV. CODE § 1646.5 (West 2006 & Supp. 2011); DEL. CODE ANN. tit. 6, § 2708 (2011); N.Y. GEN. OBLIG. LAW § 5-1401 (Mc-Kinney 2010). Such statutes, however, typically do not address the enforceability of choice-of-law clauses selecting the law of another jurisdiction, and thus have no bearing on whether a court in the state that enacted the statute would give effect to the parties’ choice of the law of a jurisdiction outside the United States as the law governing their agreement. Other states have enacted statutes that validate contractual provisions selecting the law of another jurisdiction, whether a different state or foreign county, if specified conditions are met. See, e.g., TEX. BUS. & COM. CODE §271.005 (West 2013). Some states, for example New York, have developed their own rules for enforcing choice-of-law clauses selecting the law of another jurisdiction. This Report only deals with choice-of-law rules based on section 187(2) of the Restatement.

25. RESTATEMENT (SECOND) OF CONFLICT OF LAWS § 187(2).

26. In many domestic U.S. transactions in which the Chosen Law is not the Covered Law, recipients do not insist on receiving an opinion that specifically addresses the effectiveness of the governing law clause under the Covered Law. In lieu of a choice-of-law opinion, recipients often are willing to accept an enforceability opinion that is given “as if” the Covered Law were the Chosen Law. In the cross-border context, as discussed in Part III-1, “as if” enforceability opinions normally are not given. See supra text accompanying note 22.

27. See generally TriBar Op. Comm., Supplemental Report: Opinions on Chosen-Law Provisions Under the Restatement of Conflict of Laws, 68 BUS. LAW. 1161, 1168 & n.25 (2013) [hereinafter TriBar Supplemental Chosen-Law Report] (some lawyers are unwilling to give choice-of-law opinions; others treat the Covered Law State as if it were the Default State; others make clear opinion does not cover possibility that choice-of-law rules of Covered Law State might require consideration of fundamental policies of some other state, e.g., by expressly excluding fundamental policies of other states; and others expressly exclude coverage of fundamental policies of Covered Law State as well as other states).

28. See generally id. at 1163–64 & nn.5–13 (factors for determining Default State include needs of interstate and international systems, protection of justified expectations, and needs of judicial system; breadth and inherent imprecision of factors can (and often do) prevent opinion preparers from being able to identify Default State with the confidence opinions require). In the cross-border context the facts needed to determine what jurisdiction is the Default State are even more complex than in the domestic U.S. context, and the analysis is harder because of the possible relevance of the laws of countries of which the opinion preparers have limited, if any, knowledge. For an example of the kind of fact-intensive inquiry needed for a proper application of the Second Prong of the Restatement Test, see Wise v. Zwicker & Associates, P.C., 780 F.3d 710 (6th Cir. 2014).

29. TriBar Supplemental Chosen-Law Report, supra note 27, at 1166 & n.14 (noting that Restatement requires that agreement be interpreted under the Chosen Law for purposes of determining whether giving effect to agreement will violate fundamental policy of the Default State; meaning of contractual provisions under Chosen Law may be different than under Covered Law and that possibility may prevent opinion preparers from giving choice-of-law opinion, depending on type of agreement, matters covered, and terminology used).

30. See supra note 21 and accompanying text (discussing this interpretive difficulty in context of as-if opinions).

31. The IBA Report recognizes this interpretive problem but concludes that the challenges it poses for the opinion preparers can be reduced to a manageable level if the agreement sets forth comprehensively the rights and obligations of, and the remedies available to, the parties and does not rely extensively on a general body of applicable foreign law to govern the relationship between the parties. IBA REPORT, supra note 2, at 168. The IBA Report also concludes that the opinion could be given based on the opinion giver’s reading of the agreement “on its face and within the four corners of the document” even though the opinion giver is not familiar with the foreign law governing the agreement. Id. at 260. For the reasons discussed later in this Part, this Committee disagrees with these conclusions and recommends that the opinion expressly exclude coverage of the fundamental policies of any jurisdiction (whatever the Default State may be) that under the Second Prong of the Restatement Test might lead a court in the Covered Law State to decline to enforce the governing law clause. See infra note 33 and accompanying text.

32. When the opinion preparers rely on a translation, they often disclose that reliance in the opinion letter and expressly assume that the translation is a complete, fair, and accurate English rendition of the foreign language text of the agreement.

33. The same problems can arise even when the agreement is in English and the language of the Chosen Law Country also is English. An example is the phrase “best efforts,” a phrase that U.S. opinion preparers would likely not know has a different meaning in England than in many U.S. states. Under English law, “best efforts” means that a party to an agreement will do whatever is required to perform the obligation involved, no matter how onerous. In the United States, “best efforts” in many states means that a party will use the highest level of effort that is commercially reasonable under the circumstances. Depending on the facts, a U.S. court might find that an agreement using “best efforts” as interpreted under English law violates a fundamental policy of the Covered Law State against the imposition of a penalty if, for example, it requires a party to spend extravagant sums to cure a minor defect in performance. Because a choice-of-law opinion covering the Second Prong of the Restatement Test would cover the terms of the agreement as interpreted in accordance with English law, the failure (albeit understandable) of U.S. opinion preparers to understand the English interpretation of “best efforts” might result in an erroneous opinion that the choice of English law will be given effect by the courts of the Covered Law State (even assuming that the Default State is the Covered Law State).

34. The exclusion of fundamental policies from the opinion’s coverage should be readily understood by non-U.S. opinion recipients because the choice-of-law rules of many foreign countries are similar to the Restatement test: first determine whether the parties’ choice of law can be recognized in general, then identify any specific limitations, including public policy limitations, on the application of the chosen law. Cf. IBA REPORT, supra note 2, at 164–68 (acknowledging the existence of an “unavoidable gap” in confirming the effectiveness of the governing law clause, as neither foreign nor U.S. counsel can say whether giving effect to the agreement under the non-U.S. law selected by the parties would violate a fundamental policy of the jurisdiction whose law would otherwise apply without having expertise in all laws that may apply, and stating that “although the practical implications of this problem are small, it should be noted that this gap does exist and cannot be closed. The risk it creates must be assumed by the person who ultimately relies on the opinion.”).

35. The opinion could be worded as follows:

Under the law of [COVERED LAW STATE], the choice of the law of [FOREIGN COUNTRY] in the Agreement is valid except to the extent that giving effect to the law of [FOREIGN COUNTRY] would violate a fundamental policy of (i) the jurisdiction whose law is covered by this opinion letter or (ii) any other jurisdiction having a materially greater interest than [FOREIGN COUNTRY] in the determination of the issue, if the law of that jurisdiction would apply to the Agreement or any of its provisions in the absence of a governing law clause.

Some U.S. lawyers include in their outbound choice-of-law opinions a statement that they “do not believe” that application of the non-U.S. law chosen in the agreement would be contrary to a fundamental policy of the Covered Law State or other jurisdictions whose law may apply. This Committee recommends against including such language because of the difficulty discussed earlier in this Part of establishing a reasonable basis for that belief and because statements regarding an opinion giver’s knowledge or belief should be limited to matters of fact, not law. See TriBar Op. Comm., Third-Party “Closing” Opinions: A Report of the TriBar Opinion Committee, 53 BUS. LAW. 591, 619 n.59 (1998) [hereinafter TriBar 1998 Report].

36. These are some of the reasons why governing law clauses are not enforced in many countries. They explain why non-U.S. recipients ordinarily expect to receive choice-of-law opinions even though subject to “public policy” limitations. See IBA REPORT, supra note 2, at 165. Not all states apply choice-of-law rules based on section 187(2) of the Restatement, and even those that do may not follow the Restatement in all respects. See TriBar Supplemental Chosen-Law Report, supra note 27, at 1162 & n.2. When applying section 187(2) of the Restatement, opinion preparers need to make a determination that the Chosen Law State has a reasonable relationship to the parties or the transaction. The opinion preparers in each particular state need to assess what other determinations, if any, are required under the Covered Law. New York, for example, applies common law principles in determining whether to give effect to a choice-of-law clause choosing the law of another state. Id.

37. See supra text accompanying note 17. Because the Chosen Law is the law of a jurisdiction outside the United States, the validity and binding effect of the agreement as a whole are not governed by the Covered Law. Often non-U.S. parties will request opinions from U.S. counsel that the U.S. party has the corporate power to enter into the agreement and that it has duly authorized, executed, and delivered the agreement. See infra text accompanying notes 168–72.

38. Parties typically adopt so-called “broad form” arbitration clauses pursuant to which they elect to submit to arbitration the full range of disputes that may arise out of or relate to their contractual relationship, including issues relating to contract formation, such as fraudulent inducement to contract.

39. Although international arbitration is a private method of dispute resolution, it requires the support of a legal system if a party refuses to arbitrate or the losing party refuses to honor an arbitral award. See generally ALAN REDFERN ET AL., LAW AND PRACTICE OF INTERNATIONAL COMMERCIAL ARBITRATION 328 (4th ed. 2004). The court asked to enforce an arbitral award often will not be located where the arbitration took place, but rather where the losing party has operations or assets. Because the law of any one country may not be sufficient to deal with international arbitration, countries have entered into treaties and conventions. These treaties and conventions have the force of law in all signatory countries and are applied by their national courts.

40. June 10, 1958, 21 U.S.T. 2517 [hereinafter New York Convention]. As of the date of this Report, the New York Convention has more than 155 signatories, including both developed and less-developed countries. For an updated list of signatory countries, see Status, Convention on the Recognition and Enforcement of Foreign Arbitral Awards (New York, 1958), U.N. COMMN ON INTL TRADE L., http://www.uncitral.org/uncitral/en/uncitral_texts/arbitration/NYConvention_status.html (last visited Sept. 4, 2015) [hereinafter New York Convention Status]. Initiatives are ongoing to clarify or modify the New York Convention to reflect over fifty years of practice and jurisprudence. In 1985 the United Nations Commission on International Trade Law (UNCITRAL) approved the Model Law on International Commercial Arbitration, designed to modernize and harmonize arbitration laws applicable to both domestic and cross-border transactions. UNCITRAL MODEL LAW ON INTL COMMERCIAL ARBITRATION, U.N. Doc. A/40/17 (June 21, 1985) [hereinafter MODEL LAW], available at http://www.uncitral.org/pdf/english/texts/arbitration/ml-arb/07-86998_Ebook.pdf. The Model Law incorporates the provisions of the New York Convention but is more comprehensive and detailed. The U.N. General Assembly recommended the Model Law to member states for adoption, and many countries have adopted it, in some cases with minor changes. See UNCITRAL Model Law on International Commercial Arbitration (1985), with amendments as adopted in 2006, U.N. COMMN ON INTL TRADE L., http://www. uncitral.org/uncitral/en/uncitral_texts/arbitration/1985Model_arbitration_status.html (last visited Sept. 4, 2015). The Model Law, although not binding as a matter of U.S. law, provides valuable guidance on the interpretation of principles and practice under the New York Convention.

41. See infra notes 54–71 and accompanying text.

42. The New York Convention in the form ratified by the United States is not applicable to agreements to arbitrate in countries that are not signatories. See infra note 48. While this Report only deals with arbitration clauses subject to the New York Convention, if another international treaty to which the United States is a party applies to the arbitration clause, the ability of a U.S. lawyer to give an opinion on its enforceability will depend on the wording of the treaty and practice in its application. In the absence of a governing international treaty, the opinion preparers often will be unable to give an opinion on the arbitration clause because of the cost of doing the legal analysis and the difficulty of making the necessary determinations.

43. See infra text accompanying notes 56, 65–66. As a practical matter, the opinion preparers cannot address whether a U.S. court will determine that an exception provided in the New York Convention applies to a future dispute because that determination will depend on the specific claims made and the legal issues raised when a suit actually is brought.

44. See 9 U.S.C. §§ 201–208 (2012). Sections 203–205 of the FAA give U.S. federal courts non-exclusive jurisdiction over actions to enforce international arbitration agreements and awards, regardless of the amount in controversy, and allow defendants to remove actions brought in state court to federal court. See id. §§ 203–205. Pursuant to sections 206–207 of the FAA, a federal court may compel arbitration in accordance with the parties’ agreement and, subject to a three-year time limit, may issue an order confirming a foreign arbitral award unless one of the exceptions enumerated in the New York Convention applies. See id. §§ 206–207. Domestic, rather than international, arbitration clauses are covered by Chapter 1 of the FAA, not Chapter 2.

45. That is the case for both domestic arbitration in interstate U.S. commerce and international arbitration. This Report does not address how opinion preparers deal with arbitration clauses in closing opinions delivered in domestic U.S. transactions, where practice is not uniform. While beyond the scope of this Report, opinion preparers should be aware that the case law dealing with domestic U.S. arbitration clauses has not always been consistent when state law and Chapter 1 of the FAA do not line up precisely. Some aspects of state law also may apply to international arbitration, so long as they do not conflict with the New York Convention. Depending on the state, therefore, the opinion preparers may have to consider state law on arbitration in addition to Chapter 2 of the FAA.

46. For example, the United States is a party to the Inter-American Convention on International Commercial Arbitration, Jan. 30, 1975, 14 I.L.M. 336 [hereinafter Panama Convention], which Congress has implemented in Chapter 3 of the FAA. See generally 9 U.S.C. §§ 301–307 (2012). Chapter 3 of the FAA incorporates by reference sections 202–207 of the FAA. See id. § 302. As a result, implementation of the Panama Convention tracks closely that of the New York Convention. Under both the New York Convention (as implemented by the United States) and the Panama Convention, U.S. courts will only recognize and enforce arbitral awards made in arbitrations conducted in countries that are parties to the respective Convention (the reciprocity requirement). The FAA further provides that the Panama Convention applies when both conventions are applicable if a majority of the parties to the arbitration agreement are citizens of countries that have ratified or acceded to the Panama Convention and that are member states of the Organization of American States. See id. § 305. In all other cases the New York Convention applies.

47. The New York Convention has more signatories than any other convention relating to arbitration. See generally New York Convention Status, supra note 40. It expressly recognizes, however, the right of the parties to an arbitration agreement to invoke, if applicable, remedies and procedures available under other multilateral or bilateral treaties or the law of the country where enforcement is sought.

48. These reservations were adopted by the United States through a 1970 instrument of accession. See New York Convention Status, supra note 40.

49. U.S. courts have interpreted reciprocity as a formal requirement, not as a substantive issue. See Fertilizer Corp. v. IDI Mgmt., Inc., 517 F. Supp. 948, 953 (S.D. Ohio 1981) (holding that reciprocity only required determination that India was signatory to New York Convention, not analysis of how Convention was applied in India).

50. The New York Convention allows signatory countries to declare, as the United States has done, that they will apply the Convention only to disputes arising out of legal relationships, whether contractual or not, that are considered commercial under the national law of the country making the declaration. See New York Convention, supra note 40. Examples of matters that under the law of many countries are not deemed “commercial” are civil rights, employment discrimination, and family law and child custody. See generally WILLIAM W. PARK, ARBITRATION OF INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS DISPUTES 120 & n.18 (2006). Building upon practice under the New York Convention, the Model Law seeks to make the term more uniform and precise, stating that legal relationships of a commercial nature include: (1) trade transactions for the supply or exchange of goods or services; (2) distribution agreements; (3) commercial representation or agency arrangements; (4) factoring; (5) leasing; (6) construction of works; (7) consulting; (8) engineering; (9) licensing; (10) investment; (11) financing; (12) banking; (13) insurance; (14) exploitation agreements or concessions; (15) joint ventures or other forms of industrial or business cooperation; and (16) carriage of goods or passengers by air, sea, rail, or road. See MODEL LAW, supra note 40. When U.S. courts have considered whether particular activities are “commercial” under the New York Convention and the FAA, they often have treated “commercial” in the international context as encompassing a broader range of matters than in the domestic context. For a discussion of the separate, but related, concept of subject matter arbitrability, see infra notes 55 & 60.

51. New York Convention, supra note 40, art. 1. This definition reflects a compromise among signatory countries that favored a strict territorial approach (the first clause) and those that favored taking into account the nationality of the parties, the subject of the dispute, and the rules of the arbitration, including the governing law. See generally Paolo Contini, International Commercial Arbitration: The United Nations Convention on the Recognition and Enforcement of Foreign Arbitral Awards, 8 AM. J. COMP. L. 283, 293–94 (1959). Application of the first part of the definition of foreign arbitral award is purely mechanical. Application of the second part, however, requires a facts-and-circumstances analysis because, if an arbitral award regarding a cross-border transaction is made in the United States, the New York Convention may or may not apply depending on whether U.S. law considers the award a “domestic” or “non-domestic” award. The New York Convention leaves it to signatory countries to define “non-domestic” awards. The United States has not adopted a statutory definition, leaving the term for the courts to define. See Bergesen v. Joseph Muller Corp., 710 F.2d 928 (2d Cir. 1983) (award made in New York involving Norwegian and Swiss parties a “foreign” award because award made within the legal framework of another country, e.g., under foreign law or involving non-U.S. parties, is not considered domestic).

52. Section 202 of the FAA provides that an agreement or award entirely between U.S. citizens does not fall within the New York Convention unless it involves property located abroad, performance or enforcement abroad, or “has some other reasonable relation with one or more foreign states.” The New York Convention clearly applies to: (1) arbitral awards made outside the United States, because they satisfy the “territorial” part of the definition discussed earlier in this Part so long as the transaction itself has a foreign nexus; and (2) arbitral awards made in the United States if the parties are all non-U.S. parties. What is not as clear under the Convention and cases interpreting it, however, is whether and when an award made in the United States involving a transaction between a U.S. party and a non-U.S. party will be held under U.S. law to be a “domestic” award rather than a “foreign” award. See, e.g., Yusuf Ahmed Alghanim & Sons, W.L.L. v. Toys “R” Us, Inc., 126 F.3d 15 (2d Cir. 1997) (New York Convention clearly applies to disputes involving two non-domestic parties and a U.S. corporation and contract performance in the Middle East; yet domestic arbitration provisions of the FAA apply as well, giving U.S. district court power to vacate or modify award under the domestic law of the state in which, or under which, the award was made); Jain v. de Méré, 51 F.3d 686 (7th Cir. 1995) (arbitration dispute between French and Indian parties governed by French law clearly within Chapter 2 of the FAA, but where agreement failed to specify a location for arbitration U.S. district court had same power under Chapter 1 of the FAA to compel arbitration in its own U.S. district as it would for domestic arbitration), cert. denied, 516 U.S. 914 (1995). In those situations the opinion preparers may need to assume expressly that the transaction and the dispute subject to arbitration have a foreign nexus sufficient to satisfy the second part of the definition of “foreign arbitral award” in the New York Convention or that the arbitration will take place outside the United States so as to satisfy the first part of that definition. See infra text following notes 55 & 63.

53. The New York Convention imposes two principal requirements on U.S. courts: first, it requires them to defer to the jurisdiction of arbitrators when actions are brought concerning matters covered by arbitration agreements; and second, it requires them to enforce foreign arbitral awards without reviewing the merits of the arbitration decision. See Gerald Asken & Wendy S. Dorman, Applications of the New York Convention by United States Courts: A Twenty-Year Review (1970–1990), 2 AM. REV. INTL ARB. 65 (1991); see also Peter Gillies, Enforcement of International Arbitration Awards—The New York Convention, 9 INTL TRADE & BUS. L. REV. 19, 27–28 (2005) (citing The Bremen v. Zapata Off-Shore Co., 407 U.S. 1 (1972); Société Nationale Algerienne pour la Recherche, la Production, le Transport, la Transformation et la Commercialisation des Hydrocarbures v. Distrigas Corp., 80 B.R. 606, 612 (Bankr. D. Mass. 1987)).

54. The New York Convention provides that the term “agreement in writing” includes an arbitration clause in a contract, as well as a separate arbitration agreement. New York Convention, supra note 40, art. II.2. The New York Convention does not prescribe the precise form of the agreement to arbitrate, however, and courts have treated as “an agreement in writing” an exchange of letters or telexes through agents and brokers or subsequent conduct by parties who have received (but not signed) contract forms that include or incorporate by reference an arbitration clause. See, e.g., Chloe Z Fishing Co. v. Odyssey Re (London) Ltd., 109 F. Supp. 2d 1236 (S.D. Cal. 2000) (interpreting article II.2 requirement as exhaustive and mandatory, but then deeming it met by marine insurance broker’s slip and insurer’s certificate of insurance, although letters were not exchanged); see generally Asken & Dorman, supra note 53. The requirement that an agreement be in writing rarely is a problem for the opinion preparers because closing opinions ordinarily are given only in transactions in which the parties execute and deliver a “traditional” written agreement. Even though the opinion preparers are allowed to rely on the Omnibus Cross-Border Assumption with respect to contract formation and validity generally when the agreement chooses non-U.S. law as its governing law, they should decline to give an opinion if the agreement to arbitrate is not in an agreement signed by both parties, unless they are willing to deal with issues such as whether an exchange of e-mails satisfies the requirement that an arbitration agreement be in writing.

55. See New York Convention, supra note 40, art. II(2). Whether the subject matter of a dispute arising under an agreement in a cross-border transaction is capable of being settled by arbitration is referred to as the “arbitrability” issue. Arbitrability is decided by the court being asked to enforce an arbitration clause under the law of the jurisdiction in which the court is located. REDFERN ET AL., supra note 39, at 163–64. Although in theory the subject matter of all disputes is as capable of being decided by a qualified arbitrator as by a judge, in most countries some areas of the law are reserved for the courts and, therefore, under the New York Convention are not “capable of settlement by arbitration.” See, e.g., PARK, supra note 50, at 115, 121 (noting that courts have resisted giving effect to agreements to arbitrate “core” public law claims for fear that private adjudicators may under-enforce laws designed to protect society at large). Courts in the United States generally presume that disputes in cross-border transactions are capable of settlement by arbitration and show significant deference to arbitrators’ decisions regarding threshold arbitration issues. See, e.g., BG Grp. Plc v. Republic of Argentina, 134 S. Ct. 1198 (2014); see generally REDFERN ET AL., supra note 39, at 172. Accordingly, while arbitrability is a requirement for the application of the New York Convention, it normally will not prevent U.S. lawyers from giving an opinion that an agreement to arbitrate is enforceable under the Covered Law because arbitrability is rarely an issue in the types of cross-border transactions on which opinions are requested.

The term “arbitrability” is sometimes used to refer to the separate issue of whether the parties to an agreement intended that a particular dispute be arbitrated. See, e.g., Howsam v. Dean Witter Reynolds, Inc., 537 U.S. 79, 83 (2002) (party cannot be required to submit to arbitration a dispute it has not agreed to submit); Opalinski v. Robert Half Int’l, Inc., 761 F.3d 326, 334 (3d Cir. 2014) (arbitrability a “gateway” issue for judicial determination unless parties unmistakably provide otherwise; court to decide whether arbitration clause applies to a particular type of controversy); see generally PARK, supra note 50, at 111 & n.41 (suggesting that American courts’ increasing use of “arbitrability” interchangeably with “jurisdiction” is regrettable since it blurs distinction between refusing to compel arbitration because of parties’ drafting choice and refusing to compel because non-waivable legal rules prohibit arbitrator from considering subject matter). Lack of intent to arbitrate a particular matter is one of the defenses the New York Convention provides a party resisting enforcement. Unlike subject matter arbitrability, however, the intent of the parties to arbitrate a particular dispute cannot be determined (if it can at all) until after an actual dispute arises and, therefore, is not covered by an opinion on the validity of an arbitration clause. Moreover, as discussed later in this Report, the applicability of specific defenses or exceptions under the Convention is not covered by the opinion. See infra notes 59–60. Consistent with international practice, this Report uses the term “arbitrability” only as described in the preceding paragraph.

56. Courts in the United States (as in most of the jurisdictions that have adopted the New York Convention) construe these grounds for refusing to compel arbitration narrowly in light of the goal of the Convention to promote international arbitration. In deciding whether an arbitration clause that is part of a broader agreement (as opposed to a stand-alone agreement) is invalid under this exception, a court theoretically could approach “validity” in one of two ways: it could consider the validity of the broader agreement of which the clause is part, or it could consider only the validity of the arbitration clause itself. Courts in the United States generally have chosen not to focus on whether the broader agreement is valid as a whole. Instead, they usually consider the validity of the arbitration clause standing alone, and, if they determine that the clause itself (separately from the agreement of which it is a part) is not “null and void, inoperative or incapable of being performed,” New York Convention, supra note 40, art. II(3), they refer the parties to arbitration and leave the validity of the broader agreement, as well as any other disputed issues raised by the parties, for the arbitrators to decide. Consistent with the parties’ intent that substantive issues be resolved by arbitration, not the judicial system, U.S. courts applying the New York Convention tend to favor the validity of arbitration clauses absent compelling grounds for invalidity, for example that the agreement to arbitrate has been obtained by fraud, mistake, or duress. The New York Convention gives courts authority to assist the parties in implementing their intent to arbitrate disputes. For example, if an agreement specifies that arbitration is to take place in a particular country pursuant to the rules of an arbitration organization that does not exist in that country, a court considering whether the arbitration clause is capable of being performed may, instead of refusing to enforce the agreement, specify an alternative arbitral forum and rules so as to give effect to the parties’ intent that disputes between them be resolved outside of the courts. This authority, however, is used rarely.

57. Commentators have pointed out that enforcing an agreement to arbitrate is different from enforcing other commercial agreements. See, e.g., REDFERN ET AL., supra note 39, at 8. An award of damages for breach of the arbitration clause is unlikely to be a practical remedy given the difficulty of quantifying the loss. Under the FAA, a court order compelling arbitration carries the same force and sanctions (including contempt of court) as other injunctive relief. Although authorized by the FAA and not uncommon, court orders for specific performance may be difficult to enforce if the non-U.S. parties against whom they are issued continue to refuse to arbitrate and are beyond the reach of the court. Indirect enforcement of an agreement to arbitrate may be the most effective remedy: if a dispute arises between the parties and one party brings suit in violation of the arbitration clause, the New York Convention requires the court to stay the proceeding, leaving arbitration as the only available route for resolving the dispute.

58. This opinion addresses a federal statute (the FAA). Thus, to reduce the risk of misunderstanding, the opinion letter should cover U.S. federal law expressly, at least for purposes of this opinion.

59. The opinion could be worded as follows:

The arbitration clause in Section ___ of the Agreement is valid and enforceable under the federal law of the United States and the law of [COVERED LAW STATE], except to the extent that an exception set forth in the Convention on the Recognition and Enforcement of Foreign Arbitral Awards or the Federal Arbitration Act, 9 U.S.C. §§ 201–208, applies.

Some opinion givers choose to be specific about the scope of the arbitration clause in the agreement (instead of just referring to it as an “arbitration clause”) to make it clear that the agreement to arbitrate must fall within the coverage of the New York Convention and the FAA by using language such as the following:

The Company’s covenant in Section ___ of the Agreement to submit to mandatory arbitration in [ARBITRAL TRIBUNAL OUTSIDE THE UNITED STATES] is valid and enforceable under the federal law of the United States and the law of [COVERED LAW STATE] to the extent that the arbitration relates to contract claims arising under the Agreement, except to the extent that an exception set forth in the Convention on the Recognition and Enforcement of Foreign Arbitral Awards or the Federal Arbitration Act, 9 U.S.C. §§ 201–208, applies.

Some opinion givers refer expressly to the exceptions provided in Article II.3 of the New York Convention, which allows a U.S. court to refuse to refer the parties to arbitration if it finds that the agreement to arbitrate is null and void, inoperative, or incapable of being performed. New York Convention, supra note 40, art. II(3); see also supra note 56 and accompanying text.

60. For a general discussion of subject matter arbitrability, see supra note 55. Although many cases decided under the FAA discuss which matters are arbitrable, cases discussing the meaning of “commercial” are scarce. Nonetheless, in practice, the two concepts overlap to a great extent. U.S. courts will enforce almost all arbitration clauses in cross-border transactions, regardless of whether the subject matter of the agreement is governed by contract or statute. See Joseph T. McLaughlin, Arbitrability: Current Trends in the United States, 59 ALB. L. REV. 905, 906 (1996). The U.S. Supreme Court has held repeatedly that the FAA creates a strong presumption of arbitrability and over time has narrowed significantly the types of transactions in which contracting parties cannot agree to arbitration, particularly in international commerce. Id. at 940; see, e.g., Gilmer v. Interstate/Johnson Lane Corp., 500 U.S. 20 (1991) (finding claim for discrimination under Age Discrimination in Employment Act of 1967 arbitrable); Rodriquez de Quijas v. Shearson/Am. Express, Inc., 490 U.S. 477 (1989) (finding claims under Securities Act of 1933 arbitrable); Shearson/Am. Express, Inc. v. McMahon, 482 U.S. 220 (1987) (finding claims under Securities Exchange Act of 1934 and RICO arbitrable); Mitsubishi Motors Corp. v. Soler Chrysler-Plymouth, Inc., 473 U.S. 614 (1985) (finding antitrust claims arising under Sherman Act arbitrable in case involving international agreements); Scherk v. Alberto-Culver Co., 417 U.S. 506, 517 (1974) (upholding compulsory arbitration of fraud-based claims where subject matter of transaction was sale of securities in case involving international commerce to prevent “damage [to] the fabric of international commerce and trade,” even though subject matter may not have been arbitrable in domestic transactions). Lower courts often cite the U.S. Supreme Court’s statement in Mitsubishi that “international comity, respect for the capacities of foreign and transnational tribunals, and sensitivity to the need of the international commercial system for predictability in the resolution of disputes” compel them to enforce arbitration. See Mitsubishi Motors, 473 U.S. at 629.

When international commerce is the subject of a transaction, the presumption of arbitrability applies even though the arbitration of disputes between the parties may implicate what are often regarded as “core” public laws for the protection of broad societal interests, such as antitrust and insolvency. McLaughlin, supra, at 936, 937; see, e.g., Mitsubishi Motors, 473 U.S. at 629; Hays & Co. v. Merrill Lynch Pierce Fenner & Smith, Inc., 885 F.2d 1149 (3d Cir. 1989) (arbitration of churning claim brought by bankruptcy trustee enforced); Société Nationale Algerienne Pour La Recherche, La Production, Le Transport, La Trasnsformation et La Commercialisation des Hydrocarbures v. Distrigas Corp., 80 B.R. 606, 613–14 (Bankr. D. Mass. 1987) (bankruptcy stay modified to allow international arbitration).

Licenses of intellectual property commonly include arbitration clauses. Although at one time arbitrability sometimes was an issue when the subject of a dispute was intellectual property (see generally Julian D.M. Lew, Final Report on Intellectual Property Disputes and Arbitration, 9 ICC INTL CT. ARB. BULL. 37 (1998) (federal patent and trademark protections considered matters reserved for the courts)), in 1982 Congress expressly provided for the arbitration of patent-related issues (see 35 U.S.C. § 294 (2012)), and courts have found that U.S. law does not forbid arbitration of disputes relating to copyrights and trademarks even in the absence of a specific federal statute. See McLaughlin, supra, at 939–40.

Employment disputes, as opposed to disputes relating to collective bargaining/labor relations, normally have been held to be arbitrable, particularly because Congress included in key statutes (section 512 of the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 and section 118 of the Civil Rights Act of 1991) language expressly encouraging arbitration of sex, race, and disability discrimination claims. See 42 U.S.C. § 12212 (2012) (Americans with Disabilities Act); id. § 1981 (Alternative Means of Dispute Resolution) (Civil Rights Act); see also McLaughlin, supra, at 916, 918, 921. But see Ionosphere Clubs, Inc. v. Shugrue, 22 F.3d 403, 409 (2d Cir. 1994) (holding that priority of vacation pay claims in Chapter 11 case were for court to resolve and not subject to arbitration under collective bargaining agreement).

Whether a matter is arbitrable continues to be a significant issue for agreements relating to the following: matrimonial and family matters; inheritance, wills, and estates; consumer transactions; and labor relations. In the unlikely event that a cross-border agreement on which a closing opinion is requested covers one of these matters, the opinion preparers ordinarily should decline to give the opinion because courts may be reluctant to sever claims involving non-arbitrable matters from other claims if they all arise under the same agreement.

61. See supra note 17 and accompanying text. Typically non-U.S. parties will request an opinion from U.S. counsel that the U.S. party has the corporate power to enter into the agreement containing the arbitration clause and that it has duly authorized, executed, and delivered the agreement. See infra text accompanying notes 168–72.

62. Often, the parties to cross-border transactions choose as the place for arbitration a “neutral” country where none of them has connections. That means that an arbitral award usually will have to be enforced in a country other than the country in which the arbitration took place (typically the “home” country of the losing party).

63. See generally New York Convention, supra note 40. Both recognition and enforcement of an arbitral award deal with giving effect to the decision of the arbitrators, as opposed to compelling the parties to submit their dispute to the arbitrators for a decision. Typically, the winning party asks the court to recognize the award and enforce it against the losing party. Sometimes the winning party will ask a court to treat an arbitral award as a defense or counterclaim if the losing party brings a suit relating to a dispute that was the subject of the arbitration in which the award was made.

64. See 9 U.S.C. §§ 201–208 (2012). The FAA grants U.S. federal district courts non-exclusive subject matter jurisdiction over actions arising under the New York Convention regardless of the amount in controversy, addresses issues of venue, and permits removal of an action from state court to federal court by the defendant at any time prior to trial. The FAA requires the court to have personal jurisdiction over the party against whom enforcement of the foreign award is sought, for example because that party is a resident of or owns property in the United States. Personal jurisdiction and venue may be consented to in writing by parties who otherwise would not be subject to jurisdiction or who might have an objection to venue. The period for enforcement of an award under the New York Convention is three years. See id.

65. See, e.g., Parsons & Whittemore Overseas Co. v. Société Générale de l’Industrie du Papier (RAKTA), 508 F.2d 969 (2d Cir. 1974) (endorsing “pro enforcement bias” of New York Convention); see generally PARK, supra note 50, at 127 (noting that five procedural defenses are not intended to permit judicial review of merits of dispute, but merely allow courts to reject awards resulting from fraudulent, unfair, or basically unjust arbitration). U.S. courts have generally interpreted these defenses narrowly. If one or more of the specified grounds for refusal of recognition and enforcement are proven to exist, the New York Convention permits the forum court to refuse enforcement but does not require it to do so. New York Convention, supra note 40, art. V.

66. See supra notes 55 & 60 and accompanying text. When a U.S. court is considering whether to recognize and enforce a foreign arbitral award made pursuant to a valid arbitration clause that is subject to the New York Convention, its determination whether a dispute is arbitrable focuses narrowly on the specifics of the dispute that was actually submitted to arbitration rather than on the general subject matter of the agreement. Although the term “arbitrability” is used in connection with both an agreement to arbitrate’s being enforced by a court and a foreign arbitral award’s being recognized by a court under the New York Convention, the work the opinion preparers are expected to perform to support opinions on enforcement of an agreement to arbitrate and on recognition and enforcement of an award is different. To give an opinion that an agreement to arbitrate is enforceable, the opinion preparers must consider the broader issue of whether the subject matter of the agreement can be included in a pre-dispute agreement to arbitrate. See supra notes 55 & 60 and accompanying text. To give an opinion that a future arbitral award will be recognized and enforced, however, the opinion preparers do not have to consider arbitrability because it is one of seven exceptions in the New York Convention and the opinion does not cover their possible application to awards made after an opinion is given. See Mitsubishi Motors Corp. v. Soler Chrysler-Plymouth, Inc., 473 U.S. 614, 628 (1985) (noting that after allowing arbitration of antitrust issues to go forward, courts have another opportunity at award enforcement stage to ensure that government’s legitimate interest in enforcing antitrust laws has been addressed appropriately by arbitrators); see also PARK, supra note 50, at 116, 139 (stating that Justice Blackmun’s opinion in Mitsubishi Motors promotes transnational commercial arbitration because courts may compel arbitration of public law claims and still reserve “second look” after award is made to protect public interest, though second look might open door to rehearing on merits).

67. The language first used by the court in Parsons & Whittemore Overseas Co. v. Société Générale de l’Industrie du Papier (RAKTA) has become the standard for public policy challenges: “enforcement of foreign arbitral awards may be denied on this basis only where enforcement would violate the forum state’s most basic notions of morality and justice.” 508 F.2d at 974; see also PARK, supra note 50, at 128; see generally Gillies, supra note 53.

68. This opinion addresses a federal statute (the FAA). Thus, the opinion letter should cover U.S. federal law expressly, at least for purposes of this opinion.

69. The opinion could be worded as follows:

Except to the extent that an exception set forth in the Convention on the Recognition and Enforcement of Foreign Arbitral Awards (the “New York Convention”) and the Federal Arbitration Act, 9 U.S.C. §§ 201–208 (the “FAA”), applies, an arbitral award made under Section __ of the Agreement will be recognized and enforced under the New York Convention and the FAA, if a proceeding to enforce the award is properly brought in a United States federal court within three years after the arbitral award is made.

Some lawyers choose to make clear that the arbitral award must be a “foreign” award under the New York Convention and the FAA by using language such as the following:

Except to the extent that an exception set forth in the Convention on the Recognition and Enforcement of Foreign Arbitral Awards (the “New York Convention”) and the Federal Arbitration Act, 9 U.S.C. §§ 201–208 (the “FAA”), applies, an arbitral award made by [ARBITRAL TRIBUNAL OUTSIDE THE UNITED STATES] in accordance with the requirements of Section __ of the Agreement will be recognized and enforced under the New York Convention and the FAA to the extent that the arbitration relates to contract claims arising under the Agreement, if a proceeding to enforce the award is properly brought in a United States federal court within three years after the arbitral award is made.

Some opinion givers refer expressly to the exceptions provided in Article V.2(a) or (b) of the New York Convention (subject matter of the dispute not capable of settlement by arbitration or recognition and enforcement of the award contrary to U.S. public policy). New York Convention, supra note 40, art. V.2; see also supra notes 66–67 and accompanying text.

70. See generally COMM. ON INTL COMMERCIAL ARBITRATION, INTL LAW ASSN, INTERIM REPORT ON PUBLIC POLICY AS A BAR TO ENFORCEMENT OF INTERNATIONAL ARBITRAL AWARDS (2000), available at http://www.ilahq.org/en/committees/index.cfm/cid/19.

71. See supra note 69 and accompanying text.

72. The courts of all the jurisdictions involved in a cross-border transaction ordinarily can claim jurisdiction over a dispute between the parties. Therefore, the parties often specify in the agreement the courts they want to resolve disputes under the agreement. The desire to establish a uniform international framework for doing so with assurance of a consistent outcome was the impetus behind the Hague Convention on Choice of Courts Agreements (the Hague Convention). See infra Part III-4.3 and text accompanying notes 141–56.

73. See infra text accompanying note 74.

74. See generally TriBar Remedies Opinion Report, supra note 19, at 1498 & n.72 (discussing forum selection clause designating courts of the Covered Law State). In domestic U.S. transactions the remedies opinion ordinarily covers agreements that choose the Covered Law as their governing law and the courts of the Covered Law State as the forum for resolving disputes. The TriBar Remedies Opinion Report does not address opinions on forum selection clauses that do not name the courts of the Covered Law State, which often is the case in cross-border agreements choosing non-U.S. law as their governing law, where often the courts of the Chosen Law Country are named.

75. See generally IBA REPORT, supra note 2, at 192–95.

76. As discussed in Parts II-4.1.3 and II-4.1.4, the opinion is worded differently depending on the type of forum selection clause and is subject to different assumptions, exceptions, and qualifications, which may be stated or unstated.

77. As a matter of U.S. customary practice, if the agreement contains an inbound forum selection clause the opinion is understood to be based on an assumption, which may be stated or unstated, that an action brought in a named court in the United States will meet applicable federal or state venue requirements. Some U.S. lawyers choose to include an express exception for venue requirements, particularly when the agreement names a specific federal district court, because of the wide discretion federal courts have exercised under 28 U.S.C. § 1404(a) to transfer venue from one federal district to another. But see infra note 129.

Opinions specifically covering venue selection are rarely requested or given because of the inability to know whether venue requirements will be satisfied when an action is actually brought. Depending on the law of the Covered Law State, state courts may have discretion to decide the proper venue, without necessarily according significant deference to the parties’ choice. Federal venue generally is governed by 28 U.S.C. § 1391, which provides three alternative grounds for establishing whether venue is proper: (1) if all parties reside in the state where the court is located, a federal district where any defendant resides; (2) a federal district where the events occurred or the property is located; or (3) any federal district in which the court has personal jurisdiction over the defendant. Ordinarily the opinion preparers have no way of knowing whether the first or second ground will be satisfied, and in cross-border transactions often they will not be satisfied. The third ground ordinarily should be satisfied if the forum selection clause includes an express consent of the parties to be sued in the federal district court named in the agreement; in some circumstances, however, that may not be so, for example when neither the parties nor the transaction has any connection with the United States. If venue is improper, the case must be dismissed or transferred under 28 U.S.C. § 1406(a) or Federal Rule of Civil Procedure 12(b)(3). See, e.g., Richards v. Lloyd’s of London, 135 F.3d 1289, 1295 (9th Cir. 1998) (dismissing for improper venue under Rule 12(b)(3)); Jones v. Weibrecht, 901 F.2d 17, 19 (2d Cir. 1990) (dismissing claim covered by mandatory forum selection clause for improper venue under Rule 12(b)(3)); cf. Stewart Org., Inc. v. Ricoh Corp., 487 U.S. 22, 33 (1988) (valid forum selection clause given controlling weight in all but the most exceptional cases); Lambert v. Kysar, 983 F.2d 1110, 1112 n.1 (1st Cir. 1993) (applying Rule 12(b)(6)).

78. In an agreement containing a permissive clause the parties typically submit themselves to the jurisdiction of a specified court, which assures a party who chooses to bring suit in that court that the court will have personal jurisdiction over the other party. See Michael Gruson, Forum Selection Clauses in International and Interstate Commercial Agreements, 1982 U. ILL. L. REV. 133, 192–205 [hereinafter Gruson, Forum Selection] (discussing contractual submission to personal jurisdiction). Permissive forum selection clauses in cross-border agreements often provide a non-U.S. party flexibility to bring suit against a U.S. party in the non-U.S. party’s own jurisdiction or in a U.S. state where the U.S. party has assets or operations. See infra notes 97–108 and accompanying text.

Permissive clauses often are accompanied by a waiver of the right to assert the doctrine of forum non conveniens in suits brought in courts named in the agreement. The waiver is intended to prevent a court in which suit has been brought from granting a party’s request that the suit be dismissed in favor of another court (e.g., a court in that party’s own jurisdiction) on the ground that proceeding in that other court would be more convenient to the parties, the witnesses, or the court itself. See, e.g., Vivendi S.A. v. T-Mobile USA Inc., 586 F.3d 689 (9th Cir. 2009). Therefore, a permissive forum selection clause accompanied by a waiver of forum non conveniens is the functional equivalent for the party being sued of a mandatory clause because, once the plaintiff chooses to bring the suit in a court named in the clause, the party being sued cannot claim that a different court would be more convenient.

79. Even if the consent is not expressed, U.S. courts ordinarily deem it implicit in the clause. See infra note 104 and accompanying text. But see Global Packaging Inc. v. Superior Court of Orange Cty., 196 Cal. App. 4th 1623 (2011) (if parties mean forum selection clause to include consent to jurisdiction, they should not leave it to implication because courts should not be called upon to function as a backstop for sloppy contract drafting).

80. As noted above, forum selection clauses in cross-border transactions serve the parties’ desire for predictability, in light of concerns about being forced to litigate in an unfamiliar legal system or in an inconvenient forum. See generally Michael E. Solimine, Forum-Selection Clauses and the Privatization of Procedure, 25 CORNELL INTL L.J. 51 (1992) (discussing contractual choice-of-forum clauses).

81. This Part focuses on the typical situation in which the courts selected in the forum selection clause are those of the Chosen Law Country.

82. Often, when a permissive clause names U.S. courts, it names both the state courts of the Covered Law State and federal courts sitting in that state. See infra note 103 and accompanying text.

83. When an agreement chooses non-U.S. law as its governing law, a forum selection clause ordinarily will not require that suit be brought only in the United States. When it does, it rarely requires that suit be brought only in a state court in the United States. It is more common that the agreement requires that suit be brought only in a federal court in the United States. Some agreements simply refer to “courts in the State of _________,” which could be interpreted to mean either that state’s courts or U.S. federal courts sitting in that state.

84. See infra text accompanying note 100; see also infra note 136 and accompanying text (discussing a party’s agreement to submit to the jurisdiction of a foreign court in connection with the enforcement by a court in the Covered Law State of a judgment of that foreign court).

85. See TriBar Remedies Opinion Report, supra note 19, at 1500 & n.81 (opinion on permissive clause means that parties may bring suit in the designated forum and addresses requirements for personal and subject matter jurisdiction); see also infra text accompanying notes 104–08.

86. This is a threshold question that a court in the Covered Law State must resolve before addressing the effectiveness of a forum selection clause. Whether the clause is permissive or mandatory is a question of law in most cases. See, e.g., Global Seafood Inc. v. Bantry Bay Mussels Ltd., 659 F.3d 221 (2d Cir. 2011) (clause held permissive because it contained no specific language of exclusion depriving U.S. court of jurisdiction); Hunt Wesson Foods, Inc. v. Supreme Oil Co., 817 F.2d 75, 77 (9th Cir. 1987). In the United States, forum selection clauses usually are presumed to be permissive unless the parties clearly provide that they are mandatory. See, e.g., New Moon Shipping Co. v. Man B&W Diesel AG, 121 F.3d 24 (2d Cir. 1997); Caldas & Sons, Inc. v. Willingham, 17 F.3d 123 (5th Cir. 1994) (despite use of word “shall,” clause deemed permissive because lack of clear, unequivocal, and mandatory language indicated parties merely submitted to the jurisdiction of Zurich courts).

Outside the United States, forum selection clauses often are presumed to be mandatory unless the parties clearly provide that they are permissive. See, e.g., Council Regulation (EC) 44/2001 of 22 December 2000, art. 23, 2001 O.J. (L 12) 8 (Jurisdiction and the Recognition and Enforcement of Judgments in Civil and Commercial Matters) [hereinafter Brussels Regulation]; TH Agric. & Nutrition, LLC v. Ace European Grp. Ltd. (TH Agric. II), 488 F.3d 1282 (10th Cir. 2007) (same clause found to be permissive under Kansas law, mandatory under Dutch law).

87. See infra text accompanying notes 92–96; see, e.g., Rio Tinto PLC v. Vale SA, No. 14 Civ. 03042 (RMB) (AJP), 2014 WL 7191250 (S.D.N.Y. Dec. 17, 2014) (parties brought in English law experts to determine whether clause was mandatory); Baxter Int’l Inc. v. AXA Versicherung AG, 908 F. Supp. 2d 920, 923, 925 (N.D. Ill. 2012) (parties used German law experts to interpret clause); Ashall Homes Ltd. v. Rok Entm’t Grp., Inc., 992 A.2d 1239 (Del. 2010) (court interpreted clause in accordance with law (English) chosen to govern the contract); TH Agric. II, 488 F.3d at 1294–1296 (Dutch law applied to interpretation of clause because the agreement selected it as the governing law).

88. If the opinion giver’s client has counsel in the Chosen Law Country, the opinion preparers’ reading of the clause might be based on that counsel’s advice as to how the clause would be interpreted under the chosen non-U.S. law. If the opinion preparers have received such advice, they might choose to indicate their reliance on it in the opinion letter.

89. Nevertheless, after considering the issue the opinion preparers might choose not to make clear how they are reading a clause for a variety of reasons. These reasons include uncertainty whether a court in the Covered Law State would look to the Covered Law or the non-U.S. Chosen Law to determine the nature of the clause and uncertainty whether, even if the court were to apply the Covered Law, it would interpret the clause as permissive or mandatory. The interpretation adopted by a court may depend on whether the court finds clear evidence of the parties’ intent. That intent, however, may be unclear (the agreement, for example, may expressly contemplate that suit may be brought in a court of the Chosen Law Country but neither expressly permit nor prohibit suit from being brought elsewhere), and that lack of clarity may lead some courts to conclude that the parties intended the named court to be the exclusive forum and other courts to conclude that the parties intended to allow for suit to be brought in multiple courts. See, e.g., Boland v. George S. May Int’l Co., 969 N.E.2d 166 (Mass. App. Ct. 2012) (clause declaring that “jurisdiction shall vest in the State of Illinois” permissive absent plain statement that jurisdiction should be exclusive). U.S. courts dealing with an ambiguous forum selection clause often attempt to discern the parties’ intent from the agreement as a whole. See, e.g., Autoridad de Energia Eléctrica de Puerto Rico v. Ericsson Inc., 201 F.3d 15, 18–19 (1st Cir. 2000) (forum selection clause accompanied by choice-of-law language that indicated intent to make named court exclusive forum). The task is made more difficult when the drafters of a forum selection clause, rather than simply identifying courts where disputes are to be resolved and stating whether the selection is exclusive or non-exclusive, use less precise terms such as courts having jurisdiction or venue, which are sometimes used interchangeably. See, e.g., Global Seafood Inc. v. Bantry Bay Mussels Ltd., 659 F.3d 221 (2d Cir. 2011).

Small differences in terminology may be deemed sufficient by a court to treat differently two clauses that seem virtually indistinguishable, and case law in the Covered Law State may not provide much, if any, clear guidance. See, e.g., Terra Int’l Inc. v. Miss. Chem. Corp., 119 F.3d 688 (8th Cir. 1997); Boutari & Sons Wines & Spirits S.A. v. Attiki Imp. & Distrib. Inc., 22 F.3d 53 (2d Cir. 1994). Some courts have adopted interpretive rules under which certain words are deemed to make a clause mandatory and others to make it permissive. Case law is inconsistent, however, and contract language that the opinion preparers regard as clear may be interpreted differently by a court. See, e.g., K&V Sci. Co. v. Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft, 314 F.3d 494 (10th Cir. 2002) (holding “jurisdiction for all and any disputes [ . . . ] is Munich” permissive because parties did not use words like “exclusive,” “sole,” or “only” that would indicate parties’ intent to make it mandatory); Nascone v. Spudnuts, Inc., 735 F.2d 763, 767 (3d Cir. 1984) (reference to venue indicates a mandatory clause); Hull 753 Corp. v. Elbe Flugzeugwerke GmbH, 58 F. Supp. 2d 925 (N.D. Ill. 1999) (deeming “place of jurisdiction shall be Dresden” a permissive clause in light of reference to jurisdiction and not venue).

90. An opinion that does not characterize the forum selection clause as permissive or mandatory could be worded as follows:

The forum selection clause in Section __ of the Agreement is valid and enforceable under the law of [COVERED LAW STATE] for actions relating to contract claims arising under the Agreement.

Analyzing the clause as both permissive and mandatory may allow the opinion preparers to give the opinion even if they have been unable to decide with the confidence needed to give an opinion whether a court of the Covered Law State would find the provision to be permissive or mandatory. When the Covered Law is not the Chosen Law, the opinion recipient should seek advice from its own counsel whether the forum selection clause will be interpreted as permissive or mandatory under the Chosen Law. An opinion giver is not responsible for providing the recipient, who is not its client, legal advice. If a court in the Covered Law State, for example, interpreted the clause under the Covered Law as permissive and declined a request by the opinion recipient (who had intended to negotiate for a mandatory outbound forum selection clause) to dismiss an action brought in that court by the opinion giver’s client, the opinion would be correct even though under the Chosen Law the clause would have been interpreted as mandatory. See infra notes 95 and 96 and accompanying text regarding the law a U.S. court would apply to the interpretation of a forum selection clause contained in an agreement that chooses non-U.S. law as the governing law.

91. See, for example, infra text accompanying notes 110–17 regarding states that have not adopted the so-called modern view. In addition, other issues discussed later in this Report bear on the opinion preparers’ ability to conclude that a forum selection clause would be given effect under the Covered Law.

92. If the clause names a U.S. federal court, federal law, including the Federal Rules of Civil Procedure, will apply. See infra text accompanying note 103; see also supra text accompanying note 77 (regarding venue). If the agreement containing the forum selection clause does not contain a governing law clause, the opinion preparers may be able to give an opinion on the enforceability of the forum selection clause under the Covered Law even though they cannot determine which law a named court would apply. The Omnibus Cross-Border Assumption permits the opinion preparers to assume that the agreement containing the clause is enforceable under whatever foreign law may govern the agreement. See supra note 17 and accompanying text. Some commentators, particularly outside the United States, maintain that in the absence of an explicit choice-of-law clause the substantive law of the jurisdiction where the named court is located should always be regarded as the governing law because it was implicitly chosen by the parties when they named a court for the resolution of disputes.

93. When this is not the case, for example if Germany is the Chosen Law Country, but French courts are named in the forum selection clause, a French court could be expected to apply French law to procedural issues and German law to substantive issues, but also may apply French law to some substantive issues. Effective January 10, 2015, the Brussels Regulation was amended to clarify that the law governing the validity of a forum selection clause is the law of the jurisdiction where the named court is located, not the Chosen Contract Law. Brussels Regulation, supra note 86, as amended by EU Council Regulation 1215/2015 of 12 December 2012, art. 23. Assuming that the agreement chooses the law of the Chosen Law Country to govern, the conclusions in this section of the Report generally apply whether the courts named in a forum selection clause are located in the Chosen Law Country or in some other jurisdiction outside the United States, because neither the law of the jurisdiction where the named court is located (in the example, French law) nor the Chosen Contract Law (in the example, German law) is covered by the opinion letter and, in giving an opinion on the effectiveness of the forum selection clause, the opinion preparers can rely on the Omnibus Cross-Border Assumption with respect to the law of all jurisdictions outside the United States that may be applicable. See supra note 17 and accompanying text.

94. Jason Webb Yackee, Choice of Law Considerations in the Validity & Enforcement of International Forum Selection Clauses: Whose Law Applies?, 9 UCLA J. INTL L. & FOREIGN AFF. 43, 46, 63, 67 (2004) (criticizing tendency of U.S. courts considering the validity of forum selection clauses to reflexively apply their own law (the lex fori)); see generally J. Zachary Courson, Survey, Yavuz v. 61 MM, Ltd.: A New Federal Standard—Applying Contracting Parties’ Choice of Law to the Analysis of Forum Selection Agreements, 85 DENV. U. L. REV. 597, 601, 604–07, 610 (2008).

95. Yavuz v. 61 MM, Ltd., 465 F.3d 418 (10th Cir. 2006). The Yavuz court, citing Professor Yackee’s article (see supra note 94) and the Restatement (Second) of Conflict of Laws § 187 cmt. e (1971), held that courts ordinarily should honor a cross-border agreement’s choice of forum as it is construed under the law chosen by the parties to govern the agreement. The court found no reason why a U.S. court should apply to the forum selection clause a law different from the law governing other clauses, noting that international commerce requires the security parties derive from knowing that their contractual choices will be respected. Id. at 428–31 (“if parties agree on forum selection clause that has particular meaning under the law of a specific jurisdiction, and also agree that the contract is to be interpreted under the law of that jurisdiction, respect for the parties’ autonomy and demands of predictability in international transactions require that courts give effect to that meaning under that law”); see also Martinez v. Bloomberg LP, 740 F.3d 211 (2d Cir. 2014) (Chosen Contract Law (English law) applied to determine whether forum selection clause is permissive or mandatory and claim subject to clause, even though federal U.S. law ultimately must govern enforceability of clause); Phillips v. Audio Active Ltd., 494 F.3d 378 (2d Cir. 2007) (citing Yavuz, court should not single out forum selection clause for interpretation under law other than the law chosen to govern contract as a whole). The holding in Yavuz is consistent with decisions in the domestic U.S. context where: (1) an agreement chooses as its governing law the law of a U.S. state other than the state whose court is asked to enforce the forum selection clause; and (2) that court (which was not selected as the forum in the agreement), after holding the outbound choice-of-law clause effective, interprets the forum selection clause under the Chosen Contract Law. See Jacobson v. Mailboxes Etc. USA, Inc., 646 N.E.2d 741, 744 n.6 (Mass. 1995) (where agreement chose California law as governing law and California courts as exclusive forum, Massachusetts court applied governing law (California) both to enforceability of forum selection clause generally and to interpretation of that clause).

96. See also, e.g., Albemarle Corp. v. AstraZeneca UK Ltd., 628 F.3d 643 (4th Cir. 2014) (court stated that federal law must be applied, but then looked at chosen English law to hold clause mandatory); Doe 1, Doe 2 & Ramkissoon v. AOL, 552 F.3d 1077 (9th Cir. 2009); Abbott Labs. Inc. v. Takeda Pharm. Co., 476 F.3d 421, 423 (7th Cir. 2007); Manetti-Farrow, Inc. v. Gucci Am., Inc., 858 F.2d 509 (9th Cir. 1988) (applying federal law to all issues regarding forum selection clause); see generally Courson, supra note 94, at 615–20. Courts and commentators continue to differ as to which specific aspects of forum selection relate to contract formation and interpretation as opposed to enforceability, and which issues are procedural (and therefore presumptively governed by the Covered Law as the lex fori) and which issues are substantive (and therefore presumptively governed by the Chosen Contract Law). See Courson, supra note 94, at 621–24; see also Peter M. Haver, Enforceability of Forum Selection Clauses in U.S. Court Proceedings: What Law Applies in an International Setting? 1–2, 4–6 (Apr. 22, 2010) (unpublished manuscript, on file with the Reporter, as presented to the meeting of the Joint Cross Border Finance and International Commercial Law Subcommittee of the ABA Business Law Section in Denver on April 22, 2010).

97. See generally Yackee, supra note 94, at 50–56. Formal conditions for validity, which may include the form, content, or location of the forum selection clause, are not uncommon outside the United States. See, e.g., Brussels Regulation, supra note 86 (establishing four specific “forms” in which forum selection agreements must be made, which the European Court of Justice has suggested should be strictly construed); CODE DE PROCÉDURE CIVILE [C.P.C.][CIVIL PROCEDURE CODE] art. 48 (Fr.) (requiring forum selection clause to be specified in an instrument signed by the party against whom enforcement is sought and specification to be “very apparent”); Cour de casation [Cass.] [supreme court for judicial matters] com., Feb. 27, 1996, REV. CRITIQUE DROIT INTL ’PRIVÉ 1996, 734 (French court finding invalid forum selection clause printed in very small type on back of first page of contract); Bundesgerichtshof [BGH] [Federal Court of Justice] Feb. 22, 2001 (Ger.) (German Supreme Court finding forum selection clause included in loan guarantee form invalid because not physically signed by borrower). Contrary to the law of many U.S. states and European Union law, the law of some jurisdictions may provide that forum selection clauses are unenforceable in principle or valid only under limited circumstances. In addition, in some civil law countries to be valid certain categories of contracts must be executed in the presence of a notary public acting, depending on the circumstances, as a witness or as a public official.

98. See supra text accompanying note 17. In particular, the opinion does not address whether a court outside the Covered Law State, whether in another U.S. state or in a jurisdiction outside the United States, would have personal or subject matter jurisdiction, because those issues would not be governed by the Covered Law. Non-U.S. parties may request an opinion that a U.S. party has the corporate power to agree to a forum selection clause choosing a court outside the United States and that the agreement has been duly authorized, executed, and delivered by the U.S. party. See infra text accompanying notes 168–71.

99. The opinion could be worded as follows:

The Company’s agreement in Section __ of the Agreement to submit to the non-exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of [FOREIGN LAW COUNTRY] is valid and enforceable under the law of [COVERED LAW STATE] for actions relating to contract claims arising under the Agreement.

If a forum selection clause names U.S. federal courts, the opinion letter should cover U.S. federal law expressly, at least for the purposes of this opinion.

100. See infra notes 136–37 and accompanying text. Opinions on the recognition and enforcement of foreign judgments are discussed in Part III-4.2. Grounds on which a U.S. court can refuse to recognize and enforce a foreign judgment include the foreign judicial system’s not providing for impartial tribunals or having procedures incompatible with basic due process of law and questionable integrity of the court rendering the judgment in the specific case. The opinion preparers cannot make a professional judgment regarding any of these matters. See also IBA REPORT, supra note 2, at 194, 279.

101. See infra text accompanying notes 185–95. A number of U.S. statutes, rules, and regulations, mostly federal, that rarely apply to domestic U.S. transactions apply to similar cross-border transactions because non-U.S. parties are involved or because performance is to occur outside the United States. For example, the Office of Foreign Asset Control (OFAC) within the U.S. Treasury Department manages sanctions and trade restrictions with particular countries and parties pursuant to the International Emergency Economic Powers Act (50 U.S.C. § 1701 et seq.), the National Emergencies Act (50 U.S.C. § 1601 et seq.), and other similar statutes (see, e.g., OFAC regulations regarding Syria, 31 C.F.R. pt. 542, and OFAC’s Specially Designated Nationals List of persons and entities with whom, and with whose affiliates, U.S. citizens are not permitted to conduct business).

102. The opinion could be worded as follows:

The Company’s agreement in Section __ of the Agreement to submit to the non-exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of [COVERED LAW STATE] [and United States federal courts] is valid and enforceable under the law of [COVERED LAW STATE] [and the federal law of the United States] for actions relating to contract claims arising under the Agreement.

If a forum selection clause names U.S. federal courts, the opinion letter should cover U.S. federal law expressly, at least for the purposes of this opinion.

103. See generally TriBar Remedies Opinion Report, supra note 19, at 1499 n.78 (when a forum selection clause permits but does not require an action to be brought in federal court, many lawyers do not take an exception for the possible lack of federal subject matter jurisdiction. Some, however, do. Both practices are common.) The opinion preparers cannot know the facts and circumstances of a future suit when they give the opinion and therefore cannot predict whether requirements for federal court jurisdiction will be satisfied. See also supra note 77 for a discussion of venue.

104. See TriBar Remedies Opinion Report, supra note 19, at 1499. The personal and subject matter jurisdiction of a named court of the Covered Law State is governed by the Covered Law not the Chosen Law. Therefore, the analysis the opinion preparers are required to conduct is the same as the analysis required to give an opinion on the enforceability of an agreement governed by the Covered Law that contains a permissive forum selection clause (unless coverage of the clause is excluded from that opinion). The opinion is based on the facts as of the date of the opinion letter, and the opinion letter need not point out that the jurisdictional requirements may no longer be satisfied when suit actually is brought. TriBar Remedies Opinion Report, supra note 19, at 1499 & n.76; see also GLAZER TREATISE, supra note 10, at 387; Gruson, Forum Selection, supra note 78, at 136–37.

Even if the forum selection clause is not accompanied by an express consent of the parties to personal jurisdiction, U.S. courts ordinarily deem that consent implicit. Some states, however, require the parties or the transaction to have sufficient contacts with that state. See, e.g., McRae v. J.D./ M.D., Inc., 511 So. 2d 540 (Fla. 1987) (forum selection clause alone not sufficient to establish personal jurisdiction absent some minimum contacts or long-arm statute). In those states the opinion preparers must either expressly assume or satisfy themselves that there are sufficient contacts for the named court to take the case. That may be a concern in cross-border transactions if the parties choose the named state court even though neither they nor the transaction have any relationship with that state.

Normally, the requirement of subject matter jurisdiction is satisfied if the named state court is a court of general jurisdiction. TriBar Remedies Opinion Report, supra note 19, at 1499 & n.78 (if a clause specifies a particular type of court, such as, for example, the Delaware Chancery Court, the opinion preparers must determine whether the disputes covered by the clause are within that court’s subject matter jurisdiction, because the parties cannot by contract confer subject matter jurisdiction on a specialized court).

Some states, such as New York and California, have enacted statutes expressly validating forum selection clauses for transactions above a specified size if the clause selects the courts of that state as the forum for resolving disputes and the agreement containing the clause chooses the law of that state as its governing law. Some statutes also provide that the parties are deemed to have waived the right to assert the doctrine of forum non conveniens. Such statutes, however, do not apply to an agreement that chooses the law of another state or country as its governing law.

105. Thus, the opinion provides comfort to the non-U.S. recipient that it would not face automatic dismissal if it were to bring suit in a court in the Covered Law State named in the agreement, as would be the case, for example, in countries whose law prohibits private parties from voluntarily electing to sue or be sued in their courts. The Covered Law State also may have other requirements that the opinion recipient must satisfy to bring suit there, such as, for example, being qualified to do business in the state. If those requirements relate to the opinion recipient, the opinion does not cover them.

106. See, e.g., Credit Suisse Int’l v. Urbi, DeSarrollos Urbanos, S.A.B. de C.V., 971 N.Y.S.2d 177 (Sup. Ct. 2013) (foreign corporation doing business in New York without qualifying to do so prohibited from bringing suit there even if New York law prevents the defendant, who agreed to inbound forum selection clause, from asserting that New York courts are inconvenient or lack jurisdiction).

107. TriBar Remedies Opinion Report, supra note 19, at 1501 (permissive clause does not foreclose suit elsewhere or prevent application of doctrine of forum non conveniens (absent waiver); thus opinion does not mean that a party may not bring suit in another court or that named court will hear case). Although not required, in the absence of a waiver, some opinion preparers state expressly that the named court may decline to hear the case on the grounds that it is an inconvenient forum.

108. Whether the court would grant the motion may depend on which suit was brought first (lis alibi pendens rule), the convenience of the parties, witnesses, or the court (absent a waiver of forum non conveniens), or other priority/ordering considerations that cannot be known by the opinion preparers when they give the opinion.

109. When a party to an agreement brings suit in a court that is not named in a mandatory forum selection clause, that court typically enforces the clause by granting the other party’s motion to dismiss or stay the proceedings, thus requiring the plaintiff, if it wishes to pursue the action, to bring a new suit in the named court.

110. See TriBar Remedies Opinion Report, supra note 19, at 1501 & n.84 (as interpreted by the courts, for enforcement to be unfair or unreasonable, a judicial determination is required that “enforcement of the clause would be so unreasonable and unjust as to make a trial in the selected forum so gravely difficult and inconvenient that the challenging party would, for all practical purposes, be deprived of his or her day in court”).

111. 407 U.S. 1 (1972). Prior to 1972 U.S. courts considered agreements selecting foreign courts as the exclusive forum for resolving disputes involving a U.S. party to be an impermissible ouster of their jurisdiction. Bremen marked the U.S. Supreme Court’s rejection of the “per se invalidity” rule in favor of a “prima facie validity” rule. The over forty years since the Bremen decision have witnessed a sea change in the willingness of U.S. courts to enforce mandatory forum selection clauses in cross-border agreements. See generally Yackee, supra note 94, at 47–50, 64–67. The following dicta in Bremen is often quoted by U.S. courts: “The expansion of American business and industry will hardly be encouraged if, notwithstanding solemn contracts, we insist on the parochial concept that all disputes must be resolved under our laws and in our courts. . . . The elimination of all such uncertainties by agreeing in advance on a forum acceptable to both parties is an indispensable element in international trade, commerce and contracting.” See Bremen, 407 U.S. at 9, 14. In Phillips v. Audio Active Ltd., 494 F.3d 378, 383–84 (2d Cir. 2007), the U.S. Court of Appeals for the Second Circuit adopted a four-part analysis for determining the validity and enforceability of a forum selection clause in a cross-border agreement: (1) Was the clause reasonably disclosed to the resisting party? (2) Is the clause mandatory or permissive? (3) Does the clause extend to the claims involved in the suit? and (4) Has the Bremen presumption been rebutted? Some aspects of the Bremen exception are factual in nature, for example whether consent was coerced or otherwise invalid. Others are legal or equitable, for example, whether a strong public policy is implicated.

112. Although Bremen was decided under federal admiralty and maritime jurisdiction, it expresses the prevailing view in the United States on the issue of ouster. Recently the U.S. Supreme Court held, in a diversity jurisdiction case, that clauses choosing a particular federal court as the exclusive forum for resolving disputes are presumptively enforceable under the Federal Rules of Civil Procedure. Atl. Marine Constr. Co. v. U.S. Dist. Court for the W.D. of Texas, 134 S. Ct. 568, 581 (2013) (when an agreement contains a forum selection clause and an action is brought in federal court, in all but the most unusual cases the interest of justice is served by holding parties to their choice of forum). When a mandatory forum selection clause names the courts of a particular state and an action is brought in those courts, those courts will apply their state’s law in determining the enforceability of the forum selection clause. Many state courts follow Bremen.

113. The public policy ground only comes into play when the court considering whether to enforce a mandatory forum selection clause is not a named court. Thus, it applies when a court that is not named is asked to dismiss a suit brought in that court in violation of the forum selection clause. In Atlantic Marine the Court held that when a party to an agreement has violated a contractual obligation by filing suit in a court other than the one named in a valid mandatory forum selection clause, “[that court’s] dismissal would work no injustice on the plaintiff” even though, as a result of the running of a statute of limitations or otherwise, the plaintiff is unable to pursue its action in the named court. Id. at 582–84. The court noted that claiming that a suit was brought in violation of a mandatory forum selection clause is different from claiming forum non conveniens, where the burden is on the party seeking to move the case to a different court because of the potentially harsh results of dismissal. Id. at 580–81; see, e.g., Sinochem Int’l v. Malaysia Int’l Shipping Corp., 549 U.S. 422, 430 (2007); Norwood v. Kirkpatrick, 349 U.S. 29, 39 (1955).

Although a key issue in Bremen was whether giving effect to a forum selection clause choosing English courts would violate a U.S. policy of not enforcing exculpation provisions in some situations, U.S. courts generally are reluctant to apply the public policy exception to deny enforcement of a forum selection clause in agreements between sophisticated commercial parties. See Yackee, supra note 94, at 48–49, 79–83, 95 & n.276; see also Yackee, supra note 94, at 81 & n.202 (observing that, to deflect criticism of the Bremen exception as “unmanageably elastic” and “muddled and ambiguous,” courts apply it only when strong public policies are involved).

114. See, e.g., Jones v. GNC Franchising, Inc., 211 F.3d 495, 495 (9th Cir. 2000) (refusing to enforce mandatory forum selection clause choosing Pennsylvania courts, because to do so would contravene “strong public policy to protect California franchisees from expense, inconvenience, and possible prejudice of litigating in non-California venue” as articulated by California franchising statute); Verdugo v. Alliantgroup, L.P., 237 Cal. App. 4th 141 (2015) (holding forum selection clause unenforceable because it would operate as a waiver of unwaivable California Labor Code right in violation of California public policy); but see Brooks v. Sotheby’s, No. 13-CV-02183 RS, 2013 WL 3339356 (N.D. Cal. July 1, 2013) (mandatory forum selection clause given effect because plaintiff did not show English courts would not provide same or equivalent remedies, despite California public policy against waiving claims under consumer protection statute). In some states the modern view is codified in a statute, while in many others it has been adopted in judicial decisions.

115. For the same reasons separate opinions on the effectiveness of forum selection clauses normally are not requested or given in domestic U.S. transactions, they normally are not requested or given in cross-border transactions when the agreement chooses the Covered Law as its governing law: in those situations, absent an express exception, an opinion that the agreement is valid, binding, and enforceable under the Covered Law covers the effectiveness of the forum selection clause. See supra text accompanying note 74. If a forum selection clause names a U.S. federal court in the Covered Law State, the opinion letter should cover U.S. federal law expressly, at least for purposes of this opinion.

116. The opinion could be worded as follows:

The Company’s agreement in Section __ of the Agreement that the courts of [FOREIGN COUNTRY] shall have exclusive jurisdiction is valid and enforceable under the law of [COVERED LAW STATE] for actions relating to contract claims arising under the Agreement.

For sample wording of a qualification regarding the possible application of the Bremen exception, see infra note 120.

Opinion givers may need to consider whether an exception is necessary when a forum selection clause expressly covers not only disputes arising under the agreement, but also claims arising in tort and disputes involving extra-contractual claims relating to the transaction broadly. This type of clause appears most frequently in agreements with parties from EU member countries because Council Regulation (EC) 864/2007 (Law Applicable to Non-Contractual Obligations) art, 14, 2007 O.J. (L 199) 40, 46 [hereinafter Rome II Regulation], governing choice of law by EU courts in non-contractual (e.g., tort) matters, specifically allows the parties to provide in their agreement that the law that governs the agreement also applies to non-contractual causes of action; the same construct extends to forum selection under the Rome II Regulation. Depending on the law of the specific state, a U.S. court may be unwilling to defer to the parties’ choice of forum for extra-contractual disputes, with the court’s determination often turning on whether the claims are intertwined with, or dependent upon the construction of, the parties’ contractual relationship. See, e.g., Lambert v. Kysar, 983 F.2d 1110, 1121 (1st Cir. 1993) (refusing effort to evade enforcement of forum selection clause through artful pleading of tort claim in context of contract dispute); Coastal Steel Corp. v. Tilghman Wheelabrator Ltd., 709 F.2d 190, 203 (3d Cir. 1983) (pleading of alternative non-contractual theories of liability does not prevent enforcement of forum selection clause when relationship is contractual), overruled on other grounds, 490 U.S. 495 (1989); Ashall Homes Ltd. v. Rok Entm’t Grp., Inc., 992 A.2d 1239, 1248 (Del. 2010) (in policing boundary between contract and tort, court should consider extent to which tort claims relate to contractual relationship or hinge on contract’s scope). Depending on the law of the specific state, when tort claims are involved a U.S. court may decide that the law of the place where the claim arose, e.g., where the wrongful conduct took place or harm occurred, must be applied by a court in that jurisdiction, rather than deferring to the parties’ agreement as to a different governing law and forum. In some states, courts may focus instead on the intent of the parties with respect to the scope of the forum selection clause, thus being willing to broadly enforce the clause in a manner similar to what the Rome II Regulation requires if, for example, the language of the agreement provides that “all disputes arising out of or relating to the contract or the relationships formed thereby, including statutory claims and related tort claims,” are covered by the clause.

117. A court will apply the various prongs of the Bremen exception based on the nature of the claims made by the parties and the facts and circumstances at the time of the dispute, none of which the opinion preparers can ascertain when the opinion is given.

118. While the analysis is the same in domestic U.S. transactions as in cross-border transactions, the limited impact in domestic U.S. transactions of the Bremen exception is so well understood that many U.S. lawyers do not expressly refer to it when giving enforceability opinions. See TriBar Remedies Opinion Report, supra note 19, at 1501 & n.87, 1502 & nn.88–89. The TriBar report, however, only addresses opinions on the enforceability of agreements, including forum selection clauses in those agreements, that choose as their governing law the law covered by the opinion. The TriBar report does not address an opinion that is directed specifically at the effectiveness under the Covered Law of a forum selection clause in an agreement that is not governed by the Covered Law. The TriBar report therefore does not consider the desirability of including in that opinion an express reference to the Bremen exception. It also points out that the practice of not referring to the Bremen exception even in the opinions it does address is not universal, with some lawyers pointing out the possible application of the Bremen exception.

119. As a practical matter the opinion preparers cannot be expected to determine whether a U.S. court will decline to give effect to a mandatory outbound forum selection clause on the basis of the third prong of the Bremen exception because that determination requires knowledge they cannot be expected to have of how the named court would go about enforcing each obligation of the opinion giver’s client in the agreement containing the clause.

120. See supra text accompanying note 113. The reference could be worded as follows:

The opinion in numbered paragraph __ is limited to the extent that a court may decline to give effect to the forum selection clause in Section __ of the Agreement because enforcement would be unreasonable or unjust under the principles enunciated in the decision of the U.S. Supreme Court in M/S Bremen & Unterweser Reederel, GmbH v. Zapata Off-Shore Co., 402 U.S. 1 (1972) and in related cases, including that it would contravene a strong public policy of [COVERED LAW STATE].

If the opinion letter contains an opinion on the enforceability of the forum selection clause but not of the governing law clause, the opinion preparers should consider including in the opinion letter an express assumption that the choice of non-U.S. law as the governing law of the agreement will be given effect under the Covered Law. One could argue that the assumption is technically unnecessary because, if the forum selection clause is mandatory, it names a non-U.S. court, and a court in the Covered Law State gives the clause effect, no court in the Covered Law State would have the opportunity to consider independently the merits of the case and, therefore, to reach the choice-of-law issue. See, e.g., Gruson, Forum Selection, supra note 78, at 191 (once parties to agreement validly agree that foreign forum should adjudicate disputes, it is difficult to see what legitimate concern an excluded forum in which suit was brought would protect by deciding choice-of-law question). As discussed earlier, however, to decide that a mandatory outbound forum selection clause is effective, a court in the Covered Law State applying the Covered Law first must give effect to the choice of the Chosen Law Country’s law in the agreement. See supra notes 93–96 and accompanying text. Absent a choice-of-law opinion, assuming that a court in the Covered Law State would give effect to the choice-of-law clause will eliminate any risk that an opinion on the effectiveness of a forum selection clause naming courts in the Chosen Law Country could be interpreted as including an implicit, unqualified opinion that a court in the Covered Law State also will give effect to the choice of the Chosen Law Country’s law. Not all U.S. lawyers see a need to include this assumption, instead wording the Omnibus Cross-Border Assumption in a way that addresses the choice-of-law issue. See supra note 17 and accompanying text.

121. This is the same as for opinions on the effectiveness of permissive forum selection clauses. See supra text accompanying notes 99–101.

122. See supra text accompanying note 17. Typically a non-U.S. party will want comfort from a U.S. lawyer that a U.S. party has the corporate power to agree that a non-U.S. court will be the exclusive forum under the agreement. That issue is covered by the standard opinion on due authorization, execution, and delivery of the agreement under the Covered Law. See infra text accompanying notes 168–72.

123. See supra note 17. The last sentence of the illustrative Omnibus Cross-Border Assumption covers this issue not only under the Chosen Law but also under the lex fori so as to address the possibility that the court named in the forum selection clause is in a jurisdiction other than the Chosen Law Country.

124. This conclusion is consistent with the modern view, which requires a court to give substantial weight to the parties’ choice of courts. A non-U.S. recipient whose goal is not to be exposed to the risk of litigation in U.S. courts often seeks comfort on this issue because in many countries, instead of deferring to the parties’ choice of forum, a court decides whether to take a case by applying broad discretionary standards such as reasonableness, fairness, the extent of contacts with the parties and the transaction, the burden on the court, and the convenience of the parties or the witnesses. See generally Haver, supra note 96, at 2–3. The opinion also gives a non-U.S. recipient comfort that, in drafting the forum selection clause, it does not have to satisfy special form requirements imposed by the Covered Law, such as capitalized, special, or bold-face type, a specific placement within the agreement, or special signing formalities. If the Chosen Law imposes such form requirements, the Omnibus Cross-Border Assumption covers them. In addition, the opinion could be important to a non-U.S. recipient because the validity under the Covered Law of the submission by a U.S. party to the exclusive jurisdiction of a non-U.S. court may be relevant to the enforcement of the clause by the named non-U.S. court. See generally Michael Gruson, Controlling Site of Litigation, in SOVEREIGN LENDING: MANAGING LEGAL RISK 29, 35–36 (Michael Gruson & Ralph Reisner eds., 1984). The opinion also supports a conclusion that a judgment obtained in the named non-U.S. court will be recognized and enforced by courts in the Covered Law State, as discussed in Part III-4.2.

125. The opinion could be worded as follows:

The Company’s agreement in Section __ of the Agreement that the courts of [COVERED LAW STATE] [and United States federal courts] shall have exclusive jurisdiction is valid and enforceable under the law of [COVERED LAW STATE] [and the federal law of the United States] for actions relating to contract claims arising under the Agreement.

126. Some states, however, require the parties or the transaction to have sufficient contacts with the state for a court in the state to take a case. See generally supra note 104 and accompanying text.

The fact that a named court in the Covered Law State will be required to apply the law of another country will not prevent it from taking jurisdiction and deciding the case. Cf. Cambridge Biotech Corp. v. Pasteur Sanofi Diagnostics, 740 N.E.2d 195 (Mass. 2000) (upholding parties’ choice of French courts as forum for resolving disputes arising under agreement that chose Massachusetts law to govern, even though result was that Massachusetts law would be applied by French courts). If the clause specifies a U.S. federal court as the exclusive forum, the opinion preparers need to consider federal rules governing subject matter and personal jurisdiction. See supra note 103 and accompanying text.

127. See, e.g., Credit Suisse Int’l v. Urbi, DeSarrollos Urbanos, S.A.B. de C.V., 971 N.Y.S.2d 177 (Sup. Ct. 2013); supra text accompanying note 106.

128. See supra note 77. Under federal venue rules, (i) if an action is commenced in the named federal district court, in most cases that court will have venue under 28 U.S.C. § 1391 by reason of the parties’ express consent to be sued there; (ii) if an action is commenced in a federal district court other than the named federal district court and that other court does not have venue under § 1391, pursuant to 28 U.S.C. § 1406 the case can be transferred to the named court; and (iii) if an action is commenced in a federal district court other than the named federal district court, even if that other court has venue under § 1391 a party can request transfer of the case to the named court in reliance on the U.S. Supreme Court’s holding in Atlantic Marine that “§ 1404 permits transfer to any district where venue is also proper . . . or to any other district to which the parties have agreed by contract [ . . . because] the federal venue statute is not the right set of rules to deal with mandatory forum selection.” Atl. Marine Constr. Co. v. U.S. Dist. Court for the W.D. of Texas, 134 S. Ct. 568, 574 (2013). Thus, as a practical matter venue should not be a concern for non-U.S. parties when the agreement requires that suit be brought only in a specified federal district court. If asked, however, a U.S. lawyer typically will not be in a position to give an opinion covering federal venue rules. See supra note 77. Many opinion givers have continued the pre-Atlantic Marine practice of including an express exception for the federal venue rules in their opinion letters.

129. See supra note 112. In Atlantic Marine the Court stated that a refusal to transfer the case to the federal district court named in a mandatory forum selection clause is “conceivable,” but “will not be common” and requires “extraordinary circumstances unrelated to the convenience of the parties.” Atl. Marine Constr. Co., 134 S. Ct. at 581–82. Contrary to the wide discretion federal courts generally have under 28 U.S.C. § 1404(a) to allocate venue within the federal system, under Atlantic Marine a federal district court in which suit was brought in violation of the agreement cannot consider the convenience of the court, parties, or witnesses and must transfer the case to the named federal district court. According to the U.S. Supreme Court, the same standard would apply to mandatory forum selection clauses naming state courts even though in that situation a federal court cannot transfer the case to the named state court and instead must dismiss it.

130. A non-U.S. party often will seek to enforce an agreement that chooses non-U.S. law as its governing law in the courts of the non-U.S. jurisdiction whose law is chosen. If, however, the U.S. party’s assets or operations are in the United States, the non-U.S. party may need a U.S. court to enforce a judgment it has obtained outside the United States.

131. Recognition and enforcement are related but distinct concepts. Recognition of a foreign judgment means that a U.S. court accepts the determination of legal rights and obligations made by the non-U.S. court that decided the case on its merits. Enforcement involves the use of legal process in the United States to require the losing party to comply with the judgment of the foreign court. Recognition is a prerequisite to enforcement.

132. For many years enforcement of foreign judgments in the United States was solely a common law issue, with the U.S. Supreme Court’s decision in Hilton v. Guyot, 159 U.S. 113 (1895), as the leading authority. Today, however, state statutes or state court decisions provide the applicable legal framework. The Hague Convention (which is discussed in Part III-4.3) is the first international treaty signed by the United States on this subject but has not yet become effective. If and when it does and is ratified by the U.S. Senate, it will govern many judgments relating to cross-border transactions in which the agreement contains a mandatory forum selection clause. Until then, and even after for judgments relating to agreements that do not contain a mandatory forum selection clause covered by the Hague Convention, state law will continue to govern the enforceability of foreign judgments. In 2005, the American Law Institute completed work on a proposed federal statute that would preempt state law. See AM. LAW INST., RECOGNITION AND ENFORCEMENT OF FOREIGN JUDGMENTS: ANALYSIS AND PROPOSED FED ERAL STATUTE (proposed final draft Apr. 11, 2005), available at https://www.ali.org/publications/show/recognition-and-enforcement-foreign-judgments-analysis-and-proposed-federal-statute/. One of the ALI’s objectives was to provide a comprehensive uniform regime designed to address concerns about U.S. law frequently voiced by other countries and, thereby, to promote bilateral or multi lateral treaties broader in scope than the Hague Convention.

133. The opinion could be worded as follows:

To the extent that it relates to contract claims arising under the Agreement, a final and conclusive judgment granting or denying recovery of a sum of money, other than a judgment for taxes, a fine or other penalty, rendered by a court of [FOREIGN COUNTRY] against the Company that is enforceable in [FOREIGN COUNTRY] will be recognized as valid and enforced under the law of [COVERED LAW STATE] by the courts of [COVERED LAW STATE] or by United States federal courts having jurisdiction and applying the law of [COVERED LAW STATE], without a re-examination of the substantive issues underlying the judgment, subject to (i) grounds for non-recognition and exceptions to enforcement set forth in the Uniform Foreign Money-Judgments Recognition Act as adopted in [COVERED LAW STATE] (the “Act”) [IF OPINION GIVER WISHES TO REFER TO PARTICULAR EXCEPTIONS FROM THE STATUTE, ADD —, which include, but are not limited to, _________________] and (ii) the court’s power to stay proceedings to enforce a foreign judgment pending determination of any appeal or until the expiration of time sufficient to enable the defendant to prosecute an appeal. [IF APPLICABLE IN THE COVERED LAW STATE, ADD—This opinion is based on the assumption that the law of [FOREIGN COUNTRY] requires a court of competent jurisdiction in [FOREIGN COUNTRY], in a reciprocal manner, to recognize and enforce a final and conclusive judgment of a court of [COVERED LAW STATE] without reconsideration of the merits.]

See IBA REPORT, supra note 2, at 196 (noting that, though of limited value, the opinion is frequently requested because legal requirements vary significantly in number and specificity from country to country (most often including requirements relating to fair and due process, no violation of public policy, and reciprocity)).

134. UNIF. FOREIGN-COUNTRY MONEY JUDGMENT RECOGNITION ACT (UNIF. LAW COMMN 2005) [hereinafter UNIFORM ACT]. While establishing minimum standards under which state courts are required to enforce foreign judgments, the Uniform Act leaves courts free to recognize foreign judgments for other reasons applying widely accepted principles of comity. The Uniform Act does not apply to judgments enforcing foreign arbitral awards, because arbitral awards are covered by the FAA. See supra notes 40 & 44–46 and accompanying text. Approximately thirty-five states (including California, Delaware, Florida, Illinois, Massachusetts, New York, and Texas) have adopted the Uniform Act (or a prior version with largely similar rules and procedures—the Uniform Foreign Money Judgment Recognition Act of 1962). In other states the case law may or may not provide the opinion preparers a basis for reaching conclusions with the confidence needed to give an unqualified opinion.

135. When the foreign judgment is expressed in a currency other than U.S. dollars, a U.S. court must also decide how it should be satisfied. Many states have adopted the Uniform Foreign Money Claims Act (UNIF. FOREIGN MONEY CLAIMS ACT (UNIF. LAW COMMN 1989) [hereinafter FOREIGN-MONEY CLAIMS ACT]). That act (1) recognizes the parties’ right to select the currency for their transaction and allocate the risk of exchange rate fluctuations; and (2) in the absence of an agreement, codifies the basic principle that the aggrieved party should be restored to the economic position in which it would have been had the breach not occurred. In deciding how a foreign judgment should be satisfied, courts normally apply the so-called “payment day rule” (conversion of foreign currency into U.S. dollars at the exchange rate in effect when the judgment is paid), but alternatively sometimes apply other rules (such as the “breach day rule” or the “judgment day rule”). The Foreign Money Claims Act is intended to promote uniform judicial determination of claims expressed in a foreign currency, thereby reducing forum shopping and uncertainty, and to address related issues such as adjustments to and interest on foreign money claims. An opinion on the recognition and enforcement of foreign judgments under the Uniform Act does not cover currency conversion and related issues.

136. They are: (1) the judgment was rendered under a judicial system that does not provide impartial tribunals or procedures compatible with the requirements of due process of law; (2) the foreign court did not have personal jurisdiction over the defendant, except that jurisdiction is deemed established, if the defendant: (i) was served with process personally in the foreign country; (ii) voluntarily appeared other than to contest jurisdiction; (iii) agreed to submit to the jurisdiction of the foreign court; or (iv) had an office in the foreign country (the specified grounds are not exclusive and the forum court may find that the foreign court had personal jurisdiction on some other basis); or (3) the foreign court did not have jurisdiction over the subject matter of the dispute. UNIFORM ACT, supra note 134, §§ 4(b), 5.

137. They are: (1) the defendant did not receive notice of the proceeding in sufficient time to prepare a defense; (2) the judgment was obtained by “extrinsic” fraud on the part of the prevailing party that deprived the losing party of an adequate opportunity to present its case (such as deliberately serving the defendant at the wrong address), as opposed to “intrinsic” fraud (such as false testimony or forged evidence), which is a matter for the foreign court to deal with; (3) the judgment is repugnant to the public policy of the forum state or the United States (a stringent test, requiring clear injury to public health, public morals, or public confidence in the administration of law, as opposed to a mere difference in law, no matter how significant); (4) the judgment conflicts with another final and conclusive judgment; (5) the proceeding in the foreign court was contrary to a valid agreement such as an exclusive forum selection or arbitration clause; (6) judgment was rendered by the foreign court solely on the basis of personal service and the forum court believes that the original action should have been dismissed on grounds of forum non conveniens; (7) substantial doubt exists regarding the impartiality or integrity of the specific court that rendered the judgment (such as corruption of the judge); or (8) the specific proceeding leading to the judgment (as opposed to the entire judicial system in the foreign country) was incompatible with the due process of law. UNIFORM ACT, supra note 134, § 4(c).

138. The drafters of the Uniform Act decided, after lengthy debate, not to include a reciprocity requirement, noting that “while recognition of U.S. judgments continues to be problematic in a number of foreign countries, there [is] insufficient evidence to establish that a reciprocity requirement would have greater effect on encouraging foreign recognition of U.S. judgments.” UNIFORM ACT, supra note 134, prefatory note.

139. See supra note 133.

140. In some cases the cost of preparing the opinion may be prohibitive. In other cases only a reasoned or qualified opinion may be possible.

141. Convention on Choice of Court Agreements, HAGUE CONF. ON PRIV. INTL L. (June 30, 2005), http://www.hcch.net/upload/conventions/txt37en.pdf [hereinafter Hague Convention]. This was the culmination of a twenty-five-year process promoted by the United States with the goal of creating a multilateral treaty that would allow litigants to obtain and enforce judgments internationally on a scale comparable to that of the Full Faith and Credit Clause of the U.S. Constitution. Currently parties to cross-border agreements have no assurance that a judgment they obtain in one country will be recognized as final and legally binding by courts in other countries. As discussed in Part III-4.2, U.S. courts generally recognize and enforce foreign judgments under the Uniform Act or principles of comity, typically without a reciprocity requirement. See supra text accompanying notes 134–38. The same is not always true for the enforcement of U.S. judgments abroad. See Matthew H. Adler & Michele Crimaldi Zarychta, The Hague Convention on Choice of Court Agreements: The United States Joins the Judgment Enforcement Band, 27 NW. J. INTL L. & BUS. 1 (2007). In the absence of treaties between the United States and other countries on the enforcement of judgments, U.S. judgment creditors must seek enforcement abroad under non-treaty rules, which can be slow, procedurally complex, and uncertain. Moreover courts in some countries may have reservations about fully recognizing and enforcing U.S. judgments because of discomfort with U.S. notions of expansive jurisdiction and some aspects of U.S.-style litigation such as jury verdicts, pre-trial discovery, class actions, contingent fees, and punitive or multiple damages. Id. at 7 n.24; see Comm. on Foreign & Comparative Law, N.Y. City Bar Ass’n, Survey of Foreign Recognition of U.S. Money Judgments, 56 REC. ASSN B. CITY N.Y. 378 (2001), discussed in Richard W. Hulbert, Some Thoughts on Judgments, Reciprocity and the Seeming Paradox of International Commercial Arbitration, 29 U. PA. J. INTL L. 641, 647 (2008). The Hague Convention will give commercial parties greater certainty as to the effectiveness of mandatory forum selection clauses and the enforceability of judgments in signatory countries. HAGUE CONFERENCE ON PRIVATE INTL LAW, OUTLINE—HAGUE CHOICE OF COURT CONVENTION (2008) [hereinafter HAGUE CONFERENCE OUTLINE], available at http://www.hcch.net/upload/outline37e.pdf.

142. Status Table, 37: Convention of June 30, 2005 on Choice of Court Agreements, HAGUE CONF. ON PRIV. INTL L., http://www.hcch.net/index_en.php?act=conventions.status&cid=98#nonmem (last updated Nov. 19, 2010).

143. The European Union had exclusive authority to ratify the Hague Convention, which does not have to be signed by individual member countries, except for Denmark, to be binding on them. When the European Union gave its approval on June 1, 2015, enough countries had ratified the Hague Convention for it to become effective for European Union members (other than Denmark) and Mexico. When additional countries will sign and ratify the Hague Convention to make it meaningful for cross-border transactions remains an open question. See HAGUE CONFERENCE OUTLINE, supra note 141, at 2.

144. The State Department is working with Congress to determine the best way to implement the Hague Convention. On January 19, 2013, the State Department recommended implementing the Hague Convention in a memorandum that included draft implementing legislation. The memorandum recommended that implementing legislation take the form of a combination of federal and state statutes in what has been referred to as a “cooperative federalism” approach, under which a state could opt out of the federal implementing law and instead enact its version of a uniform act. Although the objective would be for the federal implementing law and the uniform state act to be as similar as possible to ensure consistency throughout the United States, the precise balance between federal and state law on issues the Hague Convention leaves to be determined under the law of each signatory country remains an open question.

145. Under the Hague Convention a case is not “international” if all parties are from the country where recognition and enforcement is sought and all issues relating to the dispute, other than the location of the named court, involve only that country. Hague Convention, supra note 141, art. 1(2). Entities are resident where they were formed, have their statutory seat, or have their headquarters or other principal place of business. Hague Convention, supra note 141, art. 4(2).

146. Hague Convention, supra note 141, art. 22. The Hague Convention applies to permissive forum selection clauses only if both the country of the named court that issued the judgment and the country of the court being asked to enforce it have made the optional declaration (reciprocity requirement). If they have, judgments by a court named in a permissive clause will be recognized and enforced if: (1) suit was brought in that court first and (2) a judgment has not already been rendered by another court that also was permitted to hear the case. Hague Convention, supra note 141, art. 22. The declaration would also limit the availability of the doctrine of forum non conveniens. Commentators see the potential for this optional declaration, if made widely, to increase greatly the impact of the Hague Convention because forum selection clauses in cross-border agreements often name multiple courts on a non-exclusive basis.

147. Hague Convention, supra note 141, art. 5(1). In particular, the named court may not decline jurisdiction because it believes that a court of another country is more appropriate (forum non conveniens) or that a suit was brought first in another court (lis alibi pendens). The jurisdictional rules of the Hague Convention do not affect signatory countries’ internal rules as to the named court’s subject matter jurisdiction, minimum value of the claim, or venue, although the Hague Convention recommends that when the named court has discretion on these issues it give due consideration to the contractual choice of the parties. Hague Convention, supra note 141, art. 5(3)(b). The named court also may refuse jurisdiction if it determines that the country in which it is located has no connection with the defendant or the claim because the Hague Convention discourages “random” forum shopping. Hague Convention, supra note 141, art. 19.

148. Those exceptions are: (1) the forum selection clause is null and void under the law of the jurisdiction in which the named court is located, including its conflict-of-law rules, (2) a party lacked the capacity to enter into the forum selection clause under the law of the country in which the court asked to enforce the agreement is located, (3) giving effect to the agreement would lead to a manifest injustice or would be manifestly contrary to the public policy of the country of the court asked to enforce the agreement, (4) for reasons beyond the parties’ control, the agreement cannot reasonably be performed, and (5) the named court has declined to hear the case. Hague Convention, supra note 141, art. 6.

149. Hague Convention, supra note 141, art. 2. Other subjects excluded are: status and legal capacity of natural persons; spousal and child support obligations; family law; will and succession; insolvency; common carriers, both of passengers and goods; most maritime matters; antitrust and competition law; nuclear damage; personal injury; tort claims for damage to property not arising out of a contractual relationship; real property and tenancies; public registers; and arbitration. Hague Convention, supra note 141, art. 2.

150. Because the matters addressed by the opinion would be governed by a treaty to which the United States is a party and, therefore, are a matter of federal law, the opinion letter should cover U.S. federal law expressly, at least for purposes of this opinion.

151. See supra text accompanying notes 117–18.

152. See supra note 17 and accompanying text. Sometimes, non-U.S. parties request a specific opinion that a U.S. party has the corporate power to choose a non-U.S. court as the forum for resolving disputes. This opinion is generally subsumed in the typical opinion that a U.S. party has duly authorized, executed, and delivered the agreement. See infra text accompanying notes 168–71.

153. Injunctions and other interim measures of protection or relief are excluded from the scope of the Hague Convention. The Hague Convention, therefore, neither requires nor precludes the grant, refusal, or termination of interim protective measures, such as preliminary injunctions, by a court that is not named, and does not require a named court to abide by them, if granted. Hague Convention, supra note 141, art. 7. The Hague Convention requires that settlements approved by the named court that have the force of judgments under the law of the jurisdiction in which it is located be recognized and enforced in every signatory country in the same manner as foreign judgments. Hague Convention, supra note 141, art. 12.

154. The exceptions include the following: (1) the judgment was given by default, such that the court being asked to enforce the judgment is not bound by the findings of fact on which the named court based its jurisdiction; (2) the judgment does not have effect or is subject to review in the country in which the named court is located; (3) the agreement was null and void under the law of the country in which the named court is located, including its conflict-of-law rules, unless the named court has determined that the agreement is valid; (4) a party lacked the capacity to conclude the agreement under the law of the country in which the court being asked to enforce the judgment is located; (5) the defendant either (i) did not receive notice of the complaint in sufficient time and in such a way as to enable it to arrange for its defense, unless the defendant entered an appearance and presented its case in the named court without contesting lack of notice, or (ii) was notified of the complaint in the country in which the court being asked to enforce the judgment is located in a manner that is incompatible with fundamental principles of that country’s law concerning service of process; (6) the judgment was obtained by fraud in connection with a matter of procedure; (7) recognition or enforcement would be manifestly incompatible with the public policy of the country in which the court being asked to enforce the judgment is located, including because the specific proceedings leading to the named court’s judgment were incompatible with fundamental principles of procedural fairness of that country; (8) the judgment is inconsistent with another judgment rendered in a signatory country (including the countries in which the named court and the court being asked to enforce the judgment are located) in a dispute between the same parties that satisfies the conditions for being recognized and enforced under the Hague Convention; or (9) the judgment awards damages, including exemplary or punitive damages, that do not compensate a party for actual loss or harm suffered. Hague Convention, supra note 141, arts. 8–9.

155. If the United States makes the declaration discussed earlier in this Report, see supra note 146 and accompanying text, the opinion also could be given when a non-U.S. court is named in a permissive forum selection clause if the country where that court is located also has made the declaration.

156. Because the matters addressed by the opinion would be governed by a treaty to which the United States is a party and, therefore, a matter of federal law, to help reduce the risk of misunderstanding, the opinion letter should cover U.S. federal law expressly, at least for the purposes of this opinion.

157. The principal treaty is the Hague Convention on the Service Abroad of Judicial and Extra-judicial Documents in Civil or Commercial Matters, Nov. 15, 1965, 20 U.S.T. 361, 68 U.N.T.S. 164 [hereinafter Hague Service Convention]. The Hague Service Convention provides for one main channel of transmission to be used when documents need to be transmitted between parties in different signatory countries. That channel relies on governmental authorities in both countries involved. The Hague Service Convention also provides for four alternative channels involving different parties, both governmental and non-governmental, in the country of origin and in the destination country in which service is to be made. The destination country may object to the use of some of the alternative channels and “derogatory channels” are allowed in bilateral or multilateral agreements among specific countries.

The Hague Service Convention does not provide substantive rules on actual service of process in signatory countries. Instead, those rules are provided by the internal law of each country. Depending on which channel of transmission is chosen, the country in which service of process is made may require that additional steps be taken (not governed by the Hague Service Convention) for service of process to be effective. Some countries allow service to be made using channels provided in the Hague Service Convention without acceptance by the addressee (service with compulsion), while other countries require voluntary acceptance of service by the addressee.

The Hague Service Convention also has provisions protecting a defendant, both prior to and after a judgment by default, that operate differently depending on which channel is used and legal requirements in the destination country. Among other things, at least six months must elapse between the date of transmission of the complaint and the entry of a default judgment, and the defendant has at least one year after the entry of a default judgment to challenge the effectiveness of service of process.

158. See supra text accompanying notes 130–40 for a discussion of recognition and enforcement of foreign judgments. If the Covered Law State has adopted some version of the Uniform Act, a court in the Covered Law State may refuse to enforce a foreign judgment if the defendant did not receive notice of the proceeding in sufficient time to prepare a defense. See supra text accompanying note 137. If the Covered Law State has not adopted the Uniform Act, the opinion preparers will have to look to the law of comity and U.S. due process standards. See supra text accompanying note 140. The Hague Convention (which is discussed in Part III-4.3) allows for nonrecognition of a foreign judgment if the defendant was notified of the proceedings in an untimely fashion or in a manner incompatible with fundamental principles concerning service of process under the law of the jurisdiction in which the court being asked to enforce the judgment is located. See supra text accompanying note 154.

159. See supra note 17 and accompanying text.

160. See IBA REPORT, supra note 2, at 195.

161. The opinion could be worded as follows:

The methods for service of process set forth in Section __ of the Agreement are valid under the law of [COVERED LAW STATE].

Ordinarily what those methods are will be obvious from a review of the agreement. Sometimes, however, that will not be the case, for example, because the service of process provision refers to methods of service under non-U.S. law. In that event the opinion preparers may decide to consult with non-U.S. counsel (and if they receive advice from non-U.S. counsel, may choose to state their reliance on that advice in the opinion letter).

162. Although many different methods for service of process may be permissible under the law of the jurisdiction outside the United States in which the named court is located, as a practical matter parties to cross-border agreements in transactions in which closing opinions are delivered usually choose methods on which an opinion can be given. An opinion on service of process does not cover other provisions often included in an agreement, such as (i) an express consent to be sued in a particular court, (ii) a waiver of procedural or substantive defenses, or (iii) a covenant not to claim that service of process was ineffective.

163. If the agreement provides for alternative methods of service of process, the opinion preparers will have to consider whether each method is permissible under the law of the Covered Law State and take an exception for methods they find problematic. If the agreement provides for service on one party by a particular method but not on the other or otherwise treats different parties differently under comparable circumstances (for example a non-U.S. lender may bring suit against a U.S. borrower in a particular way or court, but not vice versa), the opinion preparers also will have to consider whether the Covered Law permits such an agreement.

164. In either case, the Covered Law alone governs the adequacy of service of process for commencing a suit. In the case of enforcement of a foreign judgment, as discussed earlier in this Part, the opinion preparers also need to consider whether the method used to serve process in the non-U.S. court was permissible under the Covered Law. As a practical matter, if, as discussed earlier in this Part, an opinion can be given that all methods specified in the agreement for service of process to bring suit in the non-U.S. court are permissible under the Covered Law, this opinion also can be given.

165. If the agent is appointed in the agreement itself, this opinion would be subsumed in the opinion discussed earlier in this Part on the status under the Covered Law of the methods of service of process. See generally IBA REPORT, supra note 2, at 276–77.

166. See supra note 17 and accompanying text.

167. See infra text accompanying notes 168–71.

168. See generally TriBar 1998 Report, supra note 35, at 641–42 (§ 6.1), 652–54 (§§ 6.3 & 6.4).

169. For example, the business activities a corporation has the power to engage in may be restricted by its charter or, in the case of banking and insurance activities, by the corporation law under which it was incorporated. See TriBar 1998 Report, supra note 35, at 653 & nn.142–44 (§ 6.3), 654 & n.146 (§ 6.4); see also GLAZER TREATISE, supra note 10, at 236–44, 264–80. In addition, the applicable corporation law and the corporation’s charter and bylaws will determine which matters may be approved by directors and officers and which require shareholder approval. As a matter of U.S. customary practice the power and authority opinion is understood to address only restrictions on the entity’s power that derive from the statute under which the entity was formed or its governing documents, and not restrictions that derive from other statutes, rules, or regulations such as those requiring licenses or permits to engage in specific activities.

170. Depending on the circumstances, reliance on the client’s representations regarding the business activities it is undertaking in the agreement may be sufficient. Alternatively or in addition, the opinion preparers may consult with non-U.S. counsel on aspects of the transaction or non-U.S. law that bear on their analysis of their client’s power to enter into and perform its obligations under the agreement (and if the opinion preparers receive the advice of non-U.S. counsel, they may choose to state their reliance on that advice in the opinion letter).

171. See IBA REPORT, supra note 2, at 146 (under most countries’ choice-of-law rules, the law of the place where the agreement was executed, as well as the law chosen in the agreement, the law of the entity’s home jurisdiction, or possibly some other law may apply, so that advice from counsel in each jurisdiction as to proper execution and delivery may be appropriate on matters such as proper evidence of corporate authority, witness attestation, notarization requirements, signing procedures, sworn affidavit requirements, etc.).

172. This is the same as in domestic U.S. transactions when the Chosen Law is not the Covered Law. In states that follow the Restatement (Second) of Conflict of Laws, the Chosen Law normally governs at least some of the formalities required to execute and deliver a contract. For example, a “duly executed” opinion for a Delaware corporation means that persons having the actual authority to bind the corporation signed the agreement in such a manner as to bring it into effect as a binding obligation of the corporation, based on the Delaware General Corporation Law, the corporation’s charter and by-laws, resolutions of the board of directors, and evidence of the incumbency of signing officers. If, however, the agreement chooses as its governing law the law of a jurisdiction other than Delaware, an opinion whose coverage is limited to Delaware law would not cover the legal requirements for execution and delivery to the extent that the law of that other jurisdiction governs those matters.

173. See generally TriBar 1998 Report, supra note 35, at 654–61 (§ 6.5) (no breach or default). Sometimes the requested opinion is broader, covering acceleration of the company’s obligations, creation of rights in others to exercise remedies or require payments, creation of liens on the company’s assets, or termination of a contract.

174. Normally, those contracts will be specifically identified. See infra note 177.

175. In many transactions in which non-U.S. law is the governing law and a closing opinion of U.S. counsel is requested, the U.S. party will have retained non-U.S. counsel to work with U.S. counsel on the structure of the transaction and the terms of the agreement. Depending on their respective roles, U.S. counsel may be able to look to non-U.S. counsel for help in gaining the understanding needed to give a no breach or default opinion. The type of business the client engages in, the nature and complexity of the transaction, and other circumstances will all affect what the opinion preparers do in order to be able to give the opinion.

176. The client, for example, may be able to provide sufficient clarification about the commercial terms of the transaction and the business activities to be performed under the agreement. If the opinion preparers conclude that further clarification is necessary, for example because the agreement refers to foreign statutes or uses concepts under non-U.S. law with which the opinion preparers are not familiar, they may decide they need to consult with non-U.S. counsel for guidance on what the agreement means. In some circumstances, however, the cost of consulting non-U.S. counsel may not be justified by the benefit of the opinion to the recipient, or the transaction may be too complex or the governing non-U.S. law may be too intricate for U.S. counsel to give an unqualified opinion. If the opinion preparers receive advice from non-U.S. counsel, they may choose to state their reliance on that advice in the opinion letter.

In some cases, the opinion preparers may choose to describe in the opinion letter their understanding of those aspects of the transaction or agreement on which they have based their analysis or to rely on express assumptions about specific matters that are governed by non-U.S. law. A combination of these steps may be needed before U.S. counsel can give a no breach or default opinion in a cross-border transaction, and in some circumstances U.S. counsel may conclude that it does not have a sufficient understanding to give the opinion.

177. See ABA Guidelines, supra note 5, at 879 (§ 3.4). Practice has shifted away from covering contracts “known to counsel” and toward limiting the coverage of the opinion to specific contracts listed on a schedule, which may be part of the agreement or some other existing document, or may be prepared specifically for the opinion letter.

178. See TriBar 1998 Report, supra note 35, at 661 & n.161.

179. The wording could be as follows:

We have interpreted the provisions of the contracts addressed by the opinion in numbered paragraph __ as those provisions would be understood in [COVERED LAW STATE] whether they are governed by the law of [COVERED LAW STATE] or by the law of another jurisdiction.

180. The CLLS Opinion Guide reaches a similar conclusion. CLLS Opinion Guide, supra note 4, at 10 ( 45) (English lawyers should give a no breach or default opinion only on contracts governed by English law and then only when the opinion giver is fully familiar with their terms). See also Part III-1, which discusses similar reasons why, when an agreement is governed by non-U.S. law, U.S. lawyers ordinarily will not give an “as if” opinion on its enforceability.

181. See generally TriBar 1998 Report, supra note 35, at 661–62 (§ 6.6) (violation of law). Whether the opinion is cast in the present or future tense, it covers not only violations resulting from the company’s entering into the agreement but also violations that could result from future performance by the company of its obligations under the agreement. TriBar 1998 Report, supra note 35, at 657–58, 662. Depending on the transaction, covering future performance may broaden significantly the analysis the opinion preparers must conduct, particularly if the agreement imposes on the company contingent as well as fixed obligations. As a matter of U.S. customary practice the opinion preparers are not required to speculate about future facts or to take into account the possibility of changes in statutes, rules, or regulations after the date of the opinion letter (except for changes then enacted but not yet in effect). TriBar 1998 Report, supra note 35, at 658 & nn.155–56. Some opinion preparers give a more limited opinion that removes the future element by covering only the execution and delivery of the agreement and “consummation of the transaction on the date of the closing.” In most, if not all, situations, this more limited opinion should strike the right balance between the benefit of the opinion to the recipient and its cost. If the recipient also wants an opinion on particular aspects of the company’s future performance, it should request that those aspects be specifically addressed.

182. A statute might, for example, make the export of certain types of goods illegal and impose sanctions ranging from a fine to an order prohibiting the company’s performance of its contractual obligations to deliver the goods (e.g., technology with military applications). In domestic U.S. transactions the no violation opinion complements the remedies opinion because statutes, rules, or regulations that, if violated, may subject the company to fines, penalties, or governmental sanctions may not render the agreement unenforceable as against the company and thus not require an exception to an opinion on the agreement’s enforceability. See TriBar 1998 Report, supra note 35, at 661. The no violation opinion does not address the enforceability of the agreement under the Covered Law (even though enforceability will not be addressed at all by U.S. counsel when the agreement chooses non-U.S. law as its governing law).

183. The no violation opinion does not cover ordinances or regulations adopted by political subdivisions below the federal and state level. See TriBar 1998 Report, supra note 35, at 661–62 & nn.164–65 (§ 6.6).

184. See ABA Principles, supra note 3, at 832 ( II.B); see also TriBar 1998 Report, supra note 35, at 627–28 (opinion preparers do not ordinarily seek (nor are they expected to seek) guidance from experts in every specialized field of law that might be implicated by the undertakings in an agreement; effort would seldom be cost-justified even in very large transactions).

185. Which statutes, rules, and regulations are understood not to be covered depends on the parties and the transaction. See, e.g., TriBar 1998 Report, supra note 35, at 628 & n.81 (while federal securities laws customarily not covered, opinion preparers should consider application of the Investment Company Act of 1940 when subject of opinion is a registered investment company), 661 (opinion preparers should consider laws regulating sale of narcotics when company in the pharmaceutical business is selling assets that include controlled substances, the sale of which without proper licenses could expose parties to serious sanctions). Discussions with U.S. counsel regarding the coverage of the no violation opinion may lead a non-U.S. opinion recipient to request that particular statutes, rules, or regulations be covered expressly, leaving it to the opinion preparers to decide whether and, if so, how they can cover them. See, e.g., TriBar 1998 Report, supra note 35, at 628–29 (opinion does not cover statutes or regulations applicable solely to opinion recipient; custom not clear regarding coverage of application of Federal Reserve Board’s margin regulations to specific bank loan and, therefore, better practice is for recipient to request separate opinion if it wants margin regulations to be covered).

186. This approach is less common in domestic U.S. transactions, where opinion givers often choose not to state expressly what is understood as a matter of U.S. customary practice. See generally TriBar 1998 Report, supra note 35, at 630 (ordinarily counterproductive for opinion givers to try to list in opinion letter each area of law that is not covered, as list can never be complete).

187. See, e.g., William McConnell, Polaris Pares off U.S. Digital Security Arm, THE DEAL (Sept. 16, 2013) (discussing CFIUS order that Polaris Financial Technology Ltd., an Indian company, divest its 85.3 percent ownership stake in IdenTrust Inc., a U.S. company providing digital identification services); Richard Metheny, 3 Things to Know About CFIUS’ Recent Activism, LAW360 (Sept. 16, 2015, 4:51 PM EST), http://www.law360.com/articles/477329/3-things-to-know-about-cfius-recent-activism (discussing CFIUS order that Huawei Technologies, a Chinese company, divest the assets of U.S.-based 3Leaf Systems, a cloud computing technology company); see also infra note 192.

188. An alternative to an exception is to point out in the opinion letter that no filing with CFIUS has been made, thereby putting the recipient on notice that under the statute a post-closing review of the transaction is possible and mitigation measures may be imposed.

189. The opinion could be worded as follows:

Except as set forth below, the execution and delivery of the Agreement by the Company and consummation by the Company of the transactions contemplated by the Agreement do not result in any violation by the Company of statutes of the United States or [COVERED LAW STATE], or rules or regulations thereunder, that, subject to the limitations in the following sentence, we would reasonably be expected to recognize as being applicable to an entity, transaction or agreement to which this opinion letter relates. The opinion in this paragraph __ does not cover, without limitation, the following statutes, rules, and regulations: [ . . . ].

Whether it says so or not, the list should be understood not to be exhaustive or exclusive. Some opinion preparers couple a list of excluded statutes, rules, and regulations with wording such as the following:

[ . . . ], or other statutes, rules, or regulations customarily understood to be excluded even though they are not expressly stated to be excluded.

This wording, although not required as a matter of U.S. customary practice, is intended to put the recipient on notice that an opinion covers some matters (such as tax, insolvency, and securities laws) only if it does so expressly. Whether or not the opinion letter says so, however, those matters are not covered.

190. Among these statutes, rules, and regulations are: (i) the Exon-Florio Amendment to the Defense Production Act of 1950 (Exon-Florio), as amended by the Foreign Investment and National Security Act of 2007, including procedures governing CFIUS reviews thereunder; (ii) the Trading with the Enemy Acts; (iii) the International Emergency Economic Powers Act, the National Emergencies Act and regulations issued thereunder, as well as other laws prohibiting or restricting, or imposing sanctions on persons engaging in certain types of activities involving specified countries; (iv) the Export Administration Regulations (EAR) of the U.S. Department of Commerce, Bureau of Industry and Security; (v) the International Traffic in Arms Regulations (ITAR) of the U.S. Department of State, Directorate of Defense Trade Controls; (vi) the Foreign Assets Control Regulations of the U.S. Department of the Treasury, Office of Foreign Assets Control (OFAC); (vii) the USA PATRIOT Act and other anti-money laundering (AML) laws and regulations; (viii) a variety of U.S. executive orders (such as Executive Order 13224: Blocking Property and Prohibiting Transactions with Persons Who Commit, Threaten to Commit or Support Terrorism, 66 Fed. Reg. 49079 (Sept. 24, 2001)); and (ix) the Foreign Corrupt Practices Act. Many opinion preparers believe that some or all of these laws are not covered by a no violation of law opinion even if not expressly excluded. Including a specific exception in the opinion letter, however, seems advisable to help reduce the risk of misunderstandings.

191. For example, a statute or regulation may apply to a transaction if it involves a party from a “black-listed” jurisdiction. The facts necessary to establish with the confidence needed to give an opinion the true “provenance” of parties involved in the transaction whom the opinion preparers may not even represent, as well as their direct and indirect affiliates, often are not ascertainable by U.S. counsel.

192. For example, in recent years CFIUS’s authority to scrutinize the effect on U.S. national security of foreign investments that could result in foreign control (evaluated functionally) of U.S. businesses has been extended to an ever broader range of transactions. The term “national security” is not defined by statute or regulation, and, while the statute under which CFIUS was established (50 App. U.S.C.A. § 2170) does list some factors CFIUS may consider and while CFIUS has provided some guidance about the types of national security considerations it has reviewed, those factors (such as “critical infrastructure” or “critical technologies”) are non-exclusive and general in nature.

193. This is often the case when failure to comply with particular statutes, rules, or regulations could result in serious governmental sanctions rather than a small fine or penalty.

194. This could be as simple as adding at the end of the first sentence in the italicized opinion language in note 189 above “including, without limitation, [ . . . ]. See generally TriBar 1998 Report, supra note 35, at 627–30, 662 (noting that in the absence of custom or in areas where custom is unclear, the opinion recipient should request specifically that the opinion cover those matters it wishes to have covered; custom is unclear as to many statutes, rules, and regulations that may bear on an agreement, including among others antitrust laws and Exon-Florio).

195. See TriBar 1998 Report, supra note 35, at 627–28, 662 & n.166 (analyzing which bodies of law are covered by the remedies opinion). That analysis also is referenced in that report’s discussion of the no violation opinion. Id. at 661. Delaying a discussion with the opinion recipient regarding the coverage of the no violation opinion may have the practical effect of limiting what the opinion preparers can analyze in the available time and may prevent them from addressing some statutes, rules, or regulations they might otherwise have been willing to cover in the opinion.

196. See generally TriBar 1998 Report, supra note 35, at 664–65 (§ 6.7) (opinion on approvals and filings overlaps considerably with no violation opinion).

197. Depending on the circumstances, reliance on the client’s factual representations about the scope of its undertakings in the agreement may be sufficient. Alternatively or in addition, the opinion preparers may decide to seek legal advice of non-U.S. counsel on some aspects of the agreement or on the governing non-U.S. law (and if the opinion preparers receive that advice, they may choose to state their reliance on it in the opinion letter).

198. See supra notes 175–76 and accompanying text.

199. See generally IBA REPORT, supra note 2, at 211. Dating back centuries, sovereign immunity has been recognized as a legal principle in most legal systems, either as a procedural matter (one cannot sue the king in the courts he created) or as a substantive matter (the king can do no wrong).

200. In many jurisdictions the legal doctrine that traditionally has shielded state and local governments, as well as their instrumentalities, from litigation consists of two elements: (1) sovereign immunity, which applies to the state itself and its agencies, officers, and employees and immunizes them from suit in that state’s own courts without the state’s consent (see, e.g., Fernald Corp. v. Governor, 31 N.E.3d 47 (Mass. 2015) (history and character of corporation materially different from those characteristic of state agencies); see generally RESTATEMENT (SECOND) OF TORTS § 895B(1) (1979)); and (2) governmental immunity, which derives from but is narrower in scope than sovereign immunity and applies to political subdivisions of the state, such as counties and municipal corporations (see, e.g., Evans v. Bd. of Cty. Comm’rs of El Paso Cty., 482 P.2d 968 (Colo. 1971); Bd. of Educ. of Prince George’s Cty. v. Mayor & Common Council of Town of Riverdale, 578 A.2d 207 (Md. 1990); Tilton v. Dougherty, 493 A.2d 442 (N.H. 1985); Tilli v. Northampton Cty., 370 F. Supp. 459 (E.D. Pa. 1974) (Pennsylvania law)). The difference stems from the fact that political subdivisions and municipal corporations have the dual character of governmental entities and corporate bodies functioning as private entities. Both sovereign and governmental immunity are procedural in nature and, unless waived, shield states and political subdivisions from judicial authority. Technically, they only apply when a state is sued in its own courts, but another state’s courts may give them effect voluntarily as a matter of comity. See Nevada v. Hall, 440 U.S. 410 (1979).

Immunity may be based on common law, constitutional provisions, or state statutes. Under traditional common law principles, governmental immunity applies with respect to governmental or discretionary functions, but not corporate, ministerial, or proprietary functions. State constitutions may recognize a state’s sovereign immunity but generally do not deal with the governmental immunity of political subdivisions. Many state constitutions neither adopt nor abolish sovereign immunity but rather give the legislature express authority to determine its scope. In most if not all states, common law doctrines of both sovereign and governmental immunity have been replaced by statutes taking a variety of approaches, such that the scope of immunity may range from nearly absolute to nearly nonexistent.

Whether governmental or administrative bodies below the level of state government are protected from suit varies from state to state and typically depends on the relationship between the state and a particular body based on a wide variety of tests and factors. See, e.g., Ky. Ctr. for Arts Corp. v. Berns, 801 S.W.2d 327 (Ky. 1990); Rucker v. Hartford Cty., 558 A.2d 399 (Md. 1989); Ohio Valley Contractors v. Bd. of Educ. of Wetzel Cty., 293 S.E.2d 437 (W. Va. 1982). Statutory provisions, and in particular nomenclature like “agency,” “department,” or “division,” can affect a court’s determination whether a particular body has immunity. Statutes, however, are not always dispositive. Other questions courts often ask are: Was the body created by the legislature? Is it subject to the control of the legislature or the state’s executive branch? Is its funding part of the state budget? Does the body operate statewide? Examples of governmental bodies that often are entitled to share in the state’s immunity include: departments of the state’s executive branch and their divisions, state law enforcement agencies, state hospitals, state prisons, state agencies engaged in some non-governmental business functions, state universities, and local school districts. In the absence of statutory provisions that grant immunity for specific bodies or functions or types of claims, counties and municipal corporations may be subject to suit to the same extent as private parties. See, e.g., Fernald Corp., 31 N.E.3d 47 (suit to clarify title to land does not implicate concerns that support finding of sovereign immunity). Identification and application of the rules on sovereign immunity and governmental immunity may be straightforward in some situations and not in others.

201. The sovereign immunity of the U.S. government is inherent in the constitutional structure of the federal government and not based on specific provisions of the U.S. Constitution. See, e.g., Cohens v. State of Virginia, 19 U.S. 264 (1821); Christensen v. Ward, 916 F.2d 1462 (10th Cir. 1990); Williamson v. U.S. Dep’t of Agric., 815 F.2d 368 (5th Cir. 1987). As a jurisdictional defense, when sovereign immunity applies it operates as a complete bar to lawsuits against the U.S. government, its departments and agencies, and their officers and employees in their official capacity, even if the government’s conduct may have been wrongful. See, e.g., Drake v. Panama Canal Comm’n, 907 F.2d 532 (5th Cir. 1990); Kozera v. Spirito, 723 F.2d 1003 (1st Cir. 1983). Congress has the power to grant immunity to governmental corporations even though they have functions that are comparable to private entities and may not inherently possess sovereign immunity. See, e.g., Edmonds v. Fed. Crop Ins. Corp., 684 F. Supp. 656 (N.D. Ala. 1988). The government’s waiver of immunity or consent to suit is a prerequisite for a court’s jurisdiction. See United States v. Mitchell, 463 U.S. 206 (1983). Congress alone has authority to enact legislation waiving immunity and giving consent to suit. United States v. Testan, 424 U.S. 392 (1976). Congress’s authority includes the power to place conditions and limitations on a waiver (Honda v. Clark, 386 U.S. 484 (1967); United States v. Sherwood, 312 U.S. 584 (1941)) and to withdraw a waiver at any time it deems proper (Maricopa Cty., Ariz.v. Valley Nat’l Bank of Phoenix, 318 U.S. 357 (1943)).

Statutes creating federal administrative agencies and corporations often contain clauses permitting them to sue and be sued. These clauses have been construed as waiving sovereign immunity broadly for the entity. See, e.g., Roche v. Am. Red Cross, 680 F. Supp. 449 (D. Mass. 1988). General “sue and be sued” provisions are liberally construed because the U.S. Supreme Court has stated that, when Congress authorizes federal corporations to engage in commercial and business transactions with the public, those corporations, to establish they are entitled to sovereign immunity, must clearly show that implied restrictions on the ability of a plaintiff to sue them are necessary to avoid grave interference with their performance of a governmental function or that Congress plainly intended that the “sue and be sued” clause be read narrowly. See, e.g., Franchise Tax Bd. of Cal. v. U.S. Postal Serv., 467 U.S. 512 (1984); Fed. Hous. Admin., Region No. 4 v. Burr, 309 U.S. 242 (1940).

202. 28 U.S.C. §§ 1330, 1332(a)(2)–(a)(4), 1391(f), 1441(d), 1602–1611 (2012). Native American tribes are technically “foreign” sovereigns in the United States and as such they, as well as tribal corporations and in some cases their agents and counsel, are entitled to sovereign immunity under federal law. The sources of the law applicable to a particular tribe may include, in addition to federal statutes, regulations, and case law, treaties between the United States and the tribe, as well as tribal law and administrative ordinances of tribal courts. The resulting complexity can make the legal analysis required to give an opinion in a transaction involving an entity controlled by a Native American tribe challenging.

203. The reason why opinions regarding sovereign immunity are requested in cross-border transactions and not in domestic U.S. transactions is largely historical: in the past sovereigns accounted for a much larger proportion of cross-border transactions; the resulting practice of requesting opinions on sovereign immunity in those transactions has continued even though today most cross-border transactions in which opinions are given involve private parties.

204. The opinion could be worded as follows:

Neither [U.S. PARTY] nor its assets are immune on grounds of sovereign immunity from (i) suit in connection with the Agreement in the courts in [COVERED LAW STATE] [or United States federal courts] or (ii) related legal process, including service of process, attachment of assets, or enforcement by those courts of a judgment against the Company related to the Agreement.

205. Even if a U.S. sovereign waives its immunity, a creditor may be unable to attach assets the U.S. sovereign needs to fulfill a public purpose. See, e.g., Tooke v. City of Mexia, 197 S.W.3d 325, 330 (Tex. 2006) (legislation allowing for waiver of sovereign immunity may include measures designed to insulate public resources from the reach of judgment creditors). As a matter of U.S. customary practice the opinion is understood not to cover limitations, including but not limited to public interest, public policy, or equity, on the ability of a judgment creditor to exercise ordinary remedies with respect to properties of a U.S. sovereign that are integral to its governmental or non-commercial function. If, however, the opinion preparers are aware of a specific provision of the Covered Law that places onerous limits on the effectiveness of a waiver of sovereign immunity, they should consider taking a specific exception.

206. The action required may include approval not only by the U.S. party’s governing body or authorized officers but also by specific government agencies or officials with oversight authority over the U.S. party.

207. This assumes that the opinion letter covers the statutes, rules, and regulations governing the U.S. party’s status and power to waive sovereign immunity. Depending on the circumstances and the law covered by the opinion letter, the opinion preparers may have to interpret specialized statutes, rules, and regulations that affect the U.S. party’s status as a sovereign, or its power to waive sovereign immunity, and the judicial decisions that interpret them. If the opinion preparers cannot make the necessary legal determinations with sufficient confidence, they will need to qualify the opinion (or may not be able to give it at all). Sometimes an opinion also is requested that the waiver is valid, binding, and irrevocable under the Covered Law. Because giving that opinion would not require the opinion preparers to make any different or additional determinations than are required to give a typical sovereign immunity opinion (see supra note 204), a separate opinion on the effectiveness of the waiver adds nothing and therefore should not be requested.

208. An overly broad waiver might refer, for example, to “all immunities, including sovereign immunity, in any jurisdiction and under all applicable laws.” In the extreme, the concept of “legal immunity” is the opposite of the concept of “legal liability.” Ordinarily, U.S. sovereigns are subject to a different legal liability regime than private parties. For example, a state agency often is shielded from some aspects of tort liability, is exempt from taxation, and is excused from complying with some statutes, rules, or regulations that apply to private parties. While the opinion preparers may be able to give an opinion that the agency has effectively waived immunity from suit with respect to specific contractual obligations, ordinarily they will not be able to give an opinion that the waiver is effective as to all of the agency’s privileges and exemptions under all laws.

209. See supra text accompanying note 17. If, for example, the Chosen Law Country has a statute like the FSIA governing the immunity of sovereigns of other countries when they engage in transactions in that country (see infra text accompanying notes 202–12), it may include requirements for a valid waiver of immunity. The Omnibus Cross-Border Assumption also would cover compliance with that statute.

210. See 28 U.S.C. §§ 1604, 1609 (2012). The FSIA defines a “foreign state” to include a political subdivision of a foreign state and an agency or instrumentality of a foreign state. The FSIA defines an agency or instrumentality to include a separate legal person that is an organ of a foreign state or political subdivision of a foreign state and an entity organized under the laws of, and the majority of whose shares or other ownership interests are owned by, a foreign state or political subdivision. Thus, a corporation that is majority-owned by a foreign state and incorporated in it is a “foreign state” within the meaning of the FSIA. Examples of when this definition may raise issues include financings by public-private partnerships, investment in or by sovereign wealth funds, and business transactions by enterprises in which the government owns a minority stake but also holds a “golden share” that gives it a veto over specified matters. See generally GSS Grp. Ltd. v. Nat’l Port Auth., 680 F.3d 805, 811 (D.C. Cir. 2012); Gang Chen v. China Cent. Television, 320 F. App’x 71, 72–73 (2d Cir. 2009); Globe Nuclear Servs. & Supply, Ltd. v. AO Teshsnabexport, 376 F.3d 282, 285 (4th Cir. 2004); Corporacion Mexicana de Servicios Maritimos, S.A. de C.V. v. The M/T Respect, 89 F.3d 650 (9th Cir. 1996) (discussing the status of indirect subsidiaries); Proyecfin de Venezuela, S.A. v. Banco Industrial de Venezuela, S.A., 760 F.2d 390 (2d Cir. 1985); O’Connell Mach. Co. v. M.V. “Americana,” 734 F.2d 115 (2d Cir. 1984), cert. denied, 469 U.S. 1086 (1984); Kao Hwa Shipping Co., S.A. v. China Steel Corp., 816 F. Supp. 910 (S.D.N.Y. 1993).

211. 28 U.S.C. §§ 1605(a)(2), 1603(d) (2012). The legislative history of the FSIA indicates, for example, that a foreign state’s borrowing of money from U.S. commercial banks is “commercial” in nature and that a foreign state’s incurrence of indebtedness in the United States (if the loan agreement is negotiated and executed in the Untied States) is a commercial activity carried out in the United States. See, e.g., Republic of Argentina v. Weltover, Inc., 504 U.S. 607 (1992) (foreign state engages in commercial activity when it acts not as a regulator of a market, but in the manner of a private player within it). For other examples of commercial activities, see Universal Trading & Inv. Co. v. Bureau for Representing Ukrainian Interests in Int’l & Foreign Courts, 727 F.3d 10 (1st Cir. 2013); Shapiro v. Republic of Bolivia, 930 F.2d 1013 (2d Cir. 1991); Eckert Int’l, Inc. v. Gov’t of Sovereign Democratic Republic of Fiji, 834 F. Supp. 167 (E.D. Va. 1993), aff’d, 32 F.3d 77 (4th Cir. 1994). Courts have great latitude in determining what activities are commercial and whether a particular commercial activity has been performed in the United States, sometimes with surprising results. See, e.g., EM Ltd. v. Republic of Argentina, 389 F. App’x 38, 44 (2d Cir. 2010) (securities held by Argentine law trust in New York banks on behalf of foreign state for investment and eventual sale is “the kind of activity that a private player in the market would carry on for profit and, therefore, a commercial activity in the U.S. under the FSIA”); see also Birch Shipping Corp. v. Embassy of Republic of Tanzania, 507 F. Supp. 311 (D.D.C. 1980).

212. For example, the FSIA contains an exception for the judicial enforcement of an agreement to arbitrate to which a foreign sovereign is a party, whether in an action to compel arbitration or an action to confirm an arbitral award. 28 U.S.C. § 1605(a)(6) (2012). This exception is consistent with section 15 of the FAA, which provides that the enforcement of arbitration agreements and the recognition and enforcement of arbitral awards cannot be avoided by a foreign sovereign’s claiming the act of state doctrine (which states that every sovereign nation is bound to respect the independence of every other sovereign nation) if they are otherwise covered by the New York Convention.

213. While an implicit waiver is not prohibited by the FSIA, it lacks the certainty of an express waiver, particularly one that is part of the agreement the parties are entering into in connection with the transaction and that expressly (i) covers immunity from suit, immunity from execution upon a judgment, and immunity from attachment prior to or after a judgment; and (ii) provides that it remains in effect notwithstanding any attempt to revoke or withdraw it. See generally Capital Ventures Int’l v. Republic of Argentina, 552 F.3d 289 (2d Cir. 2009); Atwood Turnkey Drilling, Inc. v. Petroleo Brasileiro, S.A., 875 F.2d 1174, 1177 (5th Cir. 1989), cert. denied, 493 U.S. 1075 (1990); Proyecfin de Venezuela, S.A. v. Banco Industrial de Venezuela, S.A., 760 F.2d 390, 393 (2d Cir. 1985); Libra Bank Ltd. v. Banco Nacional de Costa Rica, S.A., 676 F.2d 47 (2d Cir. 1982); ICC Chem. Corp. v. Indus. & Commercial Bank of China, 886 F. Supp. 1 (S.D.N.Y. 1995).

Determining how far a waiver extends under the FSIA may not be straightforward. In First National City Bank v. Banco para el Comercio Exterior de Cuba, 462 U.S. 611, 627 (1983) (Bancec), the U.S. Supreme Court held that duly created instrumentalities of a foreign state are to be accorded a presumption of independent status, such that the property of an instrumentality that has not waived immunity cannot be used to satisfy a judgment against another that has. This presumption, however, can be overcome if the instrumentality is so extensively controlled by its owner that a relationship of principal and agent is created or if recognizing the instrumentality’s separate juridical status would work fraud or injustice. See generally EM Ltd., 473 F.3d at 476–80. Courts have been unwilling, however, to take the Bancec analysis too far. See, e.g., EM Ltd. v. Banco Central de la Republica Argentina, No. 13-3819, slip op. at 24 (2d Cir. Aug. 31, 2015) (“both Bancec and the FSIA legislative history caution against too easily overcoming the presumption of separateness”); NML Capital, Ltd. v. Banco Central de la Republica Argentina, 652 F.3d 172, 195–96 (2d Cir. 2011) (waiver under FSIA must be clear and unambiguous; broadly worded waiver not clear and unambiguous enough to waive central bank’s immunity); see also Latelier v. Republic of Chile, 748 F.2d 790 (2d Cir. 1984) (cautions against too easily overcoming the Bancec presumption of separateness).

214. The opinion could be worded as follows:

Under the Foreign Sovereign Immunities Act of 1976, as amended, [NON-U.S. PARTY] has validly waived its sovereign immunity (if any) from (i) suit in the courts in [COVERED LAW STATE] and United States federal courts and (ii) related legal process, including service of process, attachment of assets, or enforcement by those courts of a judgment against [NON-U.S. PARTY] related to the Agreement.

215. On these issues the opinion can be based, without so stating expressly, on the Omnibus Cross-Border Assumption. See supra text accompanying note 17. Alternatively, the opinion preparers may expressly assume that under any applicable non-U.S. law the foreign state’s waiver is valid, binding, and effective, is unconditional, and cannot be unilaterally withdrawn or revoked.

216. The opinion preparers may need to base the opinion on stated assumptions as to factual matters and qualify it to the extent that the non-U.S. party’s status depends on non-U.S. law.

217. The opinion preparers ordinarily rely on a factual assumption that the non-U.S. lender has no other activities in or contacts with the Covered Law State or phrase the opinion to relate solely to specific activities involved in the transaction, or both.

218. See generally TriBar 1998 Report, supra note 35, at 646–47 & n.119 (§ 6.1.6) (opinion provides comfort that that recipient is not exposed to fines, penalties, or administrative sanctions for failure to qualify); GLAZER TREATISE, supra note 10, at 229 & n.26. Failing to qualify to do business in a state, if required, can expose an entity to adverse consequences, including the inability to enforce its rights under contracts in that state, typically unless and until the failure is cured. See, e.g., CAL. CORP. CODE § 191(d) (West 2014) (discussing foreign lenders); Credit Suisse Int’l v. Urbi, DeSarrollos Urbanos, S.A.B. de C.V., 971 N.Y.S.2d 176 (Sup. Ct. Aug. 21, 2013) (unauthorized foreign corporation doing business in New York prohibited from bringing suit even if choice of New York forum valid). An opinion that a foreign judgment may be enforced in the Covered Law State does not address a lender’s need to qualify to do business in that state before it can sue to enforce the judgment. See supra text accompanying notes 106 & 127.

The opinion that a party is not required to qualify to do business as a result of a particular transaction requires an analysis of the legal definition of “doing business.” That distinguishes it from an opinion that an out-of-state entity is duly qualified to do business in a particular state, which, when given as it sometimes is in domestic U.S. transactions, is normally based on a certificate from state officials that the company has qualified to do business in the state. State officials do not issue certificates that qualification is not required. See also ABA Guidelines, supra note 5, at 877 (§ 4.1) (opinion that company is qualified as a foreign corporation in all jurisdictions in which its properties or activities require qualification should not be requested; analysis of “doing business” requirements in all relevant states is rarely cost-justified and requires knowledge of facts and expertise opinion preparers typically do not have).

219. Even in lending transactions the opinion preparers may be unwilling to give the opinion if the loan is not straightforward and requires them to address the difficult issues often presented by complex corporate financing transactions. For example, if the agreement provides for a series of loan advances, the opinion preparers may not be comfortable with activities that the lender may have the right to engage in under the agreement over the term of the transaction, which may, for example, be contingent on how the project being financed progresses (or fails to progress) over time.

220. The opinion could be worded as follows:

Lender is not required to qualify to do business as a foreign corporation in [COVERED LAW STATE] solely by reason of its execution and delivery of the Agreement and consummation on the date of this letter of the transactions contemplated by the Agreement.

221. Depending on the facts and the Covered Law, steps a lender can later take to enforce its rights under the agreement, such as attachment of assets to execute on a judgment, foreclosure on collateral, or taking possession or disposing of the borrower’s or a guarantor’s property, may require it to qualify to do business in the Covered Law State. While some state statutes include in their list of activities that do not constitute “doing business” foreclosure by a lender on property in which it has a security interest and taking possession of collateral, many state statutes do not. If the lender requests that future activities in which it may engage in the Covered Law State be covered by the opinion but, as often will be the case, the Covered Law is not clear on whether those activities would constitute “doing business” for purposes of the qualification requirement, the opinion preparers may not be able to give the opinion or may have to qualify it.

222. State and federal regulations governing financial services and financial institutions determine what filings or permits are required for different types of lending. To determine whether and how they apply would require an opinion giver to conduct an analysis of the lender’s structure and operations in the United States that goes well beyond what can reasonably be expected of counsel for a borrower. Eligibility for the benefits of bilateral treaties against double taxation often depends on non-resident status or whether a non-U.S. entity has a “permanent establishment” in the United States, issues that go well beyond the specific transaction. Whether a non-U.S. party’s activities subject it to taxation in the United States at the federal, state, or local level is often a complex issue that does not bear on the question of whether a bank is required to qualify to do business as a foreign entity in a particular state.

223. The CLLS Opinion Guide contains a list of comparable opinions English lawyers give when transaction documents are governed by foreign law. CLLS Opinion Guide, supra note 4, at 11 ( 55).

224. The risk of misunderstanding is magnified by the growing number of countries and parties involved in cross-border transactions. Moreover, opinion discussions can be complicated by language barriers and widely different legal systems. Also, as discussed earlier in this Report, in many countries limited guidance is available on what third-party opinions can be given, what assumptions, exceptions, and qualifications are reasonable, what various opinions mean, and what work is required to support them.

225. The ABA Guidelines express the Golden Rule as follows:

An opinion giver should not be asked to render an opinion that counsel for the opinion recipient would not render if it were the opinion giver and possessed the requisite expertise. Similarly, an opinion giver should not refuse to render an opinion that lawyers experienced in the matters under consideration would commonly render in comparable situations, assuming that the requested opinion is otherwise consistent with these Guidelines and the opinion giver has the requisite expertise and in its professional judgment is able to render the opinion.

ABA Guidelines, supra note 5, at 878 (§ 3.1).

226. See infra note 233. Many of the opinions which U.S. lawyers should not give are identified in bar association reports, which often characterize even requests for these opinions as inappropriate.

227. CLLS Opinion Guide, supra note 4, at 2 ( 8), 12 ( 59) (the Golden Rule can minimize difficulties and costs, but can be difficult to apply). As discussed in prior sections of this Report, opinions given in cross-border transactions often raise issues that do not arise when the same opinions are given in domestic U.S. transactions. Moreover, some opinions U.S. lawyers regularly give in cross-border transactions are not normally given in domestic U.S. transactions (e.g., separate opinions on choice of law, forum selection, and arbitration).

228. Even when a law firm has lawyers with expertise in, and is giving opinions covering, the law of more than one of the jurisdictions whose laws are involved in the transaction, it generally provides a separate opinion letter covering the law of each jurisdiction. This Committee endorses that approach because it reduces potential confusion if matters of both U.S. law and non-U.S. law were addressed in the same opinion letter. The different opinion letters can refer to each other, just as advice from, or reliance on opinions of, non-U.S. counsel from a different law firm can be referred to in opinion letters of U.S. counsel.

229. See supra text accompanying notes 9–16; see also CLLS Opinion Guide, supra note 4, at 12 ( 60).

230. The principle that the benefit of an opinion to the recipient should warrant the time and expense required to prepare it is particularly important in cross-border transactions. See ABA Guidelines, supra note 5, at 878 (§ 1.2); see generally supra text accompanying notes 6–7. The cost-benefit analysis should take into account such factors as the type of transaction, the importance of the agreement to the transaction, the role played by U.S. law (when the opinion is requested of U.S. counsel), and the relevance of the issues to be covered by the opinion to the commercial bargain between the parties. See CLLS Opinion Guide, supra note 4, at 11 ( 54). These factors may be weighted differently in the cross-border setting than in the domestic U.S. setting. In some jurisdictions or transactions, legal advice from a party’s own counsel may take the form of a written opinion; in that case, the cost of an opinion by U.S. counsel that duplicates an opinion the recipient already is receiving from its own counsel may well not be justified by the incremental benefit to the recipient.

231. Some opinions that are worded the same as opinions routinely given in domestic U.S. transactions are more difficult to give in cross-border transactions. See supra Parts III-6 & III-7 (regarding no breach or default and no violation of law opinions); see also supra text following note 6.

232. Closing opinions serve as part of the recipient’s diligence, providing the opinion giver’s professional judgment on legal issues the recipient has determined to be important to it in the transaction. See ABA Guidelines, supra note 5, at 875 (§ 1.1). Recipients, however, should not expect opinions given to them by counsel for the other party to address all important legal issues. See generally IBA REPORT, supra note 2, at 23–25 (some gaps will remain; opinion recipient should understand those gaps).

233. An opinion request requiring more than an expression of professional judgment on legal issues or seeking overly broad opinions is inappropriate. See ABA Guidelines, supra note 5, at 876 (§ 1.2) (opinion should be limited to reasonably specific and determinable matters that involve the exercise of professional judgment by the opinion giver). Examples cited by the ABA Guidelines of inappropriate requests include: an opinion that a client is qualified to do business wherever such qualification is required, possesses all necessary licenses and permits to conduct its business, is not in violation of any applicable laws or regulations, or is not in default under any of its contracts; a statement that a client’s assets are not subject to any prior security interests; a statement that the client’s representations and warranties in the agreement are accurate; and a blanket statement as to the absence of pending or threatened litigation or as to the expected outcome of litigation. Inappropriate opinion requests are not rendered appropriate by limiting them to the opinion giver’s knowledge or subjecting them to broadly worded disclaimers.

See also CLLS Opinion Guide, supra note 4, at 4 ( 9) (inappropriate for scope of opinion to become part of commercial negotiation; law firm instructed to request opinion it would be unwilling to give might explain to client that opinion is unlikely to assist in practice and could lead to difficulty and greater cost, pressuring opinion giver to give opinion will not change the law, and reasonableness of client’s reliance on opinion, if given, could be undermined in view of opinion giver’s reluctance).

234. Starting with a seminal 1979 report (TriBar Op. Comm., Legal Opinions to Third Parties: An Easier Path, 34 BUS. LAW. 1891 (1979)), U.S. customary practice has evolved over the past thirty-five years, with U.S. lawyers developing a common understanding of the meaning of many standard opinions.

235. See ABA Guidelines, supra note 5, at 875 (§ 1.1), 880 (factual confirmations do not require the exercise of professional judgment and are inappropriate subjects for legal opinions even when limited by broadly worded disclaimers).